Home

TNC 620 - heidenhain

1. Example Programming Q Parameters il 8 9 Entering Formulas Directly Entering formulas You can enter mathematical formulas that include several operations directly into the part program by soft key Press the FORMULA soft key to call the mathematical functions The TNC displays the following soft keys in several soft key rows Addition Example Q10 Q1 Q5 Subtraction Example 025 Q7 Q108 Multiplication Example Q12 5 Q5 Division Example Q25 Q1 Q2 Opening parenthesis Example Q12 Q1 Q2 Q3 Closing parenthesis Example Q12 Q1 Q2 Q3 Square of a value Example Q15 SQ 5 un D AA A Square root Example 022 SQRT 25 SQRT Sine of an angle Example 044 SIN 45 H Cosine of an angle Example 045 COS 45 Tangent of an angle Example 046 TAN 45 a Arc sine Inverse of the sine Determines the angle from the ratio of the side opposite the hypotenuse Example Q10 ASIN 0 75 ASIN i Arc cosine Inverse of the cosine Determines the angle from the ratio of the side adjacent to the hypotenuse Example Q11 ACOS Q40 HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 Sonne Formulas Directly j il 2 olllltering Formulas Directly Arc tangent Inverse of the tangent Determines the angle from the ratio of the opposite to the adjacent side Example Q12 ATAN Q50 Powers of values Example Q15 3 3 Constant pi
2. Program cus DIAGNOSIS 2 Left program right program structure PRogran 7 7 T a we En RESET SECTS START Left program blocks right graphics Ea ee Sensei 1 In the Test Run mode of operation the TNC checks programs and TERE E RA program sections for errors such as geometrical incompatibilities N5 Gog G40 G30 z 50s missing or incorrect data within the program or violations of the work NGO Gi G41 X 5 490 F250 N90 G26 R2 space This simulation is supported graphically in different display e a e Vcc ace modes Nise Goa X 19732 Vel 10 1IR E N1400 G Z X 5 Y 30 N99999 G27 R2 N99999 GOO G40 X 30 Soft keys for selecting the screen layout see Program Run Full Nesesseds x36051 G71 x Sequence and Program Run Single Block page 62 s fe DIAGNOSIS 00 01 06 Celeb Fz k HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 61 Program Run Full Sequence and Program Run Program run full sequence 333I N10 G30 G17 X 0 Y 0 Z 25 N20 G31 X 150 100 Z 0 In the Program Run Full Sequence mode of operation the TNC NaS G20 2100 G40 GEO Hox executes a part program continuously to its end or to a manual or NS 2 5 N70 G 1 X 15 15 G41 F350 O programmed stop You can resume program run after an interruption Nee se vse Nite 625 ROK _ _ In the Program Run Single Block mode of operation you execute e
3. Go to end of log file END Current log file GuRBeNT ETLE Previous log file E FILE Up down one line Return to main menu HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 4 6 H messages il 4 6 a messages Informational texts After a faulty operation such as pressing a key without function or entering a value outside of the valid range the TNC displays a green text in the header informing you that the operation was not correct The TNC clears this note upon the next valid input Saving service files If necessary you can save the Current status of the TNC and make it available to a service technician for evaluation A group of service files is saved error and keystroke log files as well as other files that contain information about the current status of the machine and the machining If you repeat the Save service data function the previously saved group of service data files is overwritten Saving service files Open the error window m Press the LOG FILES soft key sawe To save service files press the SAVE SERVICE FILES ier soft key Calling the TNCguide help system You can call the TNC s help system via soft key Immediately the help system shows you the same error explanation that you receive by pressing the HELP soft key system the TNC shows an additional MACHINE MANUFACTURER soft key with which you can call this separate help system There you will find further more detailed in
4. Configuring network access to other devices mount Connect the TNC port X26 with a network or a PC In the file manager PGM MGT select the Network soft key Press the MOD key Then enter the keyword NET123 Press the DEFINE NETWORK CONNECTN soft key It opens the dialog window for the network configuration Mount device Connection over NFS Directory name to be mounted This is formed from the network address of the device a colon a slash and the name of the directory Entry of the network address as four decimal numbers separated by points dotted decimal notation e g 160 1 180 4 PC When entering the path name pay attention to capitalization To connect individual Windows computers via SMB Enter the network name and the share name of the computer e g PC1791NT PC Make sure that the person configuring your TNC is a network specialist Not all Windows operating systems require entry of the username workgroup and password parameters Device name The device name entered here is displayed on the control in the program management for the mounted network e g WORLD The name must end with a colon Mount point File system File system type NFS Network File System SMB Windows network 394 Manual operation Programming n E COPY FIELD Pat h Go TNC N Mount Auto Mount point Mount device BO nc _prog M 25X 1 PC NN de 1pc5323 transfer j Auto_T
5. HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 37 1 3 Programming the First a Define a workpiece blank Immediately after you have created a new program the TNC starts the dialog for entering the workpiece blank definition Always define the workpiece blank as a cuboid by entering the MIN and MAX points each with reference to the selected reference point After you have created a new program the TNC automatically initiates the workpiece blank definition and asks for the required data Spindle axis Z Plane XY Enter the active spindle axis G17 is saved as default setting Accept with the ENT key Workpiece blank def Minimum X Smallest X coordinate of the workpiece blank with respect to the reference point e g 0 Confirm with the ENT key Workpiece blank def Minimum Y Smallest Y coordinate of the workpiece blank with respect to the reference point e g 0 Confirm with the ENT key Workpiece blank def Minimum Z Smallest Z coordinate of the workpiece blank with respect to the reference point e g 40 Confirm with the ENT key gt Workpiece blank def Maximum X Largest X coordinate of the workpiece blank with respect to the reference point e g 100 Confirm with the ENT key Workpiece blank def Maximum Y Largest Y coordinate of the workpiece blank with respect to the reference point e g 100 Confirm with the ENT key Workpiece blank def Maximum Z Largest Z coordinate of the workpiece blank with respect to the
6. 76 Programming 172 Positioning With a tilted working plane 264 with manual data input MDI 352 Preset table 324 Confirming probed values 333 Principal axes 75 Probe cycles See User s Manual for Touch Probe Cycles Probing cycles Program Editing 84 Open new 80 Structure 79 Structuring 113 Program call Any desired program as subroutine 185 Program defaults 279 Program management see File management Program name See File management File name Program Run Resuming after an interruption 373 P Program run Executing 370 Interrupting 371 Mid program startup 374 Optional block skip 378 Overview 369 Program sections copying 87 Programming tool movements 82 Program section repeat 184 Projection in three planes 360 Q Q parameter programming 198 237 Additional functions 208 Basic arithmetic assign add subtract multiply divide square root 202 If then decisions 206 Programming notes 199 239 240 241 243 245 Trigonometric functions 204 Q parameters Checking 207 Local OL parameters 198 Nonvolatile OR parameters 198 Preassigned 246 Transferring values to the PLC 221 R Radius compensation 145 Input 147 Outside corners inside corners 148 Rapid traverse 130 Reference points crossing over 314 Reference system 75 Replacing texts 89 Retraction from t
7. N10 I 15 J 3 GOZ2 X 6 645 35 495 N110 GOG X 55 505 69 488 N12 G02 X 58 995 Y 30 025 R 20 N13 G 3 X 19 732 Y 21 191 R 75 N140 G02 X 5 Y 30 The following functions are available N99999 Z 50 M2 N99999999 3803_1 G71 Show and move the frame overlay Press and hold the desired soft key to move the frame overlay Reduce the frame overlay press and hold the soft key to reduce the detail Enlarge the frame overlay press and hold the soft key to magnify the detail Confirm the selected area with the WINDOW DETAIL DETAR soft key With the WINDOW BLK FORM soft key you can restore the original section HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 117 il ICS 4 6 a messages 4 6 Error messages Display of errors The TNC generates error messages when it detects problems such as Incorrect data input Logical errors in the program Contour elements that are impossible to machine Incorrect use of touch probes When an error occurs it is displayed in red type in the header Long and multi line error messages are displayed in abbreviated form If an error occurs In the background mode the word Error is displayed in red type Complete information on all pending errors is shown in the error window If a rare processor check error should occur the TNC automatically opens the error window You cannot remove such an error Shut down the system and restart the
8. 0 t dud When you program a circle the control assigns It to one of the main planes This plane is defined automatically when you set the spindle axis during a TOOL CALL z _Spindle axis Main plane G17 XY also UV XV UY LL G18 ZX also N WU ZU WX Te G19 YZ also VW YW VZ plane by using the function for tilting the working plane see User s Manual for Cycles Cycle 19 WWORKING PLANE or Q parameters see Principle and Overview page 198 You can program circles that do not lie parallel to a main HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 153 il of Path Functions z x2 IL N e Direction of rotation DR for circular movements When a circular path has no tangential transition to another contour element enter the direction of rotation as follows Clockwise direction of rotation G02 G12 Counterclockwise direction of rotation G03 G13 Radius compensation The radius compensation must be in the block in which you move to the first contour element You cannot activate radius compensation in a circle block Activate it beforehand in a straight line block see Path Contours Cartesian Coordinates page 159 Pre positioning Danger of collision Before running a part program always pre position the tool to prevent the possibility of damaging it or the workpiece 154 Programming Programming Contours il 6 3 Contour Approach and Departure Starting point and e
9. 1 5 Tool Setup Select the correct operating mode Tools are set up in the Manual Operation mode Manual operation Programming o Press the operating modes key The TNC goes into the Manual Operation mode Further information on this topic Operating modes of the TNC See Operating Modes on page 60 Prepare and measure tools Clamp the required tools in their chucks 10 857 108 457 E 9 749 i 0 000 E 85 860 S F Omm min Ouvr 57 8 MS When measuring with an external tool presetter Measure the tools note down the length and radius or transfer them directly to the 5 OA SSSI 28 ST T F OVR machine through a transfer program When measuring on the machine Place the tools into the tool changer see page 49 TOUCH PRESET 3D ROT TOOL M S F PROBE TABLE TABLE a S LO et The tool table TOOL T In the tool table TOOL T permanently saved under TNC TABLE save Tool table editing Prosranming the tool data such as length and radius but also further tool specific Tool name File information that the TNC needs to conduct its functions To enter tool data in the tool table TOOL T proceed as follows ee Display the tool table TAH EDIT Edit the tool table Set the EDITING soft key to ON oFF on With the upward or downward arrow keys you can select the tool number that you want to edit With the rightward or leftward arrow keys you can select the tool
10. 3 14159 Example Q15 PI Natural logarithm LN of a number Base 2 7183 Example 015 LN Q11 Bee Logarithm of a number base 10 Example Q33 LOG Q22 Exponential function 2 7183 to the power of n Example Q1 EXP Q12 Negate multiplication by 1 me Example Q2 NEG Q1 Truncate decimal places form an integer Example Q3 INT Q42 INT Absolute value of a number Example Q4 ABS Q22 Truncate places before the decimal point form a fraction Example Q5 FRAC Q23 FRAC Check algebraic sign of a number Example Q12 SGN Q50 If result for Q12 1 then Q50 gt 0 If result for Q12 1 then Q50 lt O MRL Calculate modulo value Example 012 400 360 Result Q12 40 a 234 Programming Q Parameters il Rules for formulas Mathematical formulas are programmed according to the following rules Higher level operations are performed first Ist calculation 5 3 15 2nd calculation 2 10 20 3rd calculation 15 20 35 or Ist calculation 10 squared 100 2nd calculation 3 to the power of 3 27 3rd calculation 100 27 73 Distributive law Law for calculating with parentheses a b ch a b a c HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 Sonne Formulas Directly j i s oMllltering Formulas Directly Programming example Calculate an angle with the arc tangent from the opposite side Q12 and adjacent side Q13 then store in Q25 Q To select the formula enteri
11. Auto_Tast CAD BO tnegu TNC nc_prog Cast NEUGL I TNC nc_prog Cast 333 1I TNC nc_prog Cast 113 h 1GB H TNC nc_prog Cast H e File name Bytes Status Date Time t 24 06 2009 12 41 17 1 h 173 24 06 2009 12 28 31 1110 H 951 27 34 2099 14 04 56 DELETE CANCEL 15 file s 195 5 MB vacant hh COPY PASTE DELETE CANCEL FIELD FIELD Programming Fundamentals File Management Deleting a directory Once you delete directories they cannot be undeleted Move the highlight to the directory you want to delete DELETE To select the erasing function press the DELETE soft key The TNC inquires whether you really intend to delete the directory and all its subdirectories and files To confirm press the OK soft key or To cancel deletion press the CANCEL soft key HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 th the AA iii ing wi 3 4 Work j il th the rila nager ing wi 3 4 Work Tagging files Tag a single file TAG FILE e Tag all files in the directory Tas Untag a single file UNTAG FILE a Untag all files UNTAG FILES Copy all tagged files COPY TAG gt H Some functions such as copying or erasing files can not only be used for individual files but also for several files at once To tag several files proceed as follows Move the highlight to the first file To display the tagging functions press the TAG soft key Tag a fi
12. Effect M98 is effective only in the blocks in which it is programmed M98 takes effect at the end of block Example NC blocks Move to the contour points 10 11 and 12 in succession HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 9 4 Miscellaneous ung for Contouring Behavior j i 9 4 Miscellaneous run ns for Contouring Behavior Feed rate factor for plunging movements M103 Standard behavior The TNC moves the tool at the last programmed feed rate regardless of the direction of traverse Behavior with M103 The TNC reduces the feed rate when the tool moves in the negative direction of the tool axis The feed rate for plunging FZMAX is calculated from the last programmed feed rate FPROG and a factor F FZMAX FPROG x F Programming M103 If you enter M103 in a positioning block the TNC continues the dialog by asking you the factor F Effect M103 becomes effective at the start of block To cancel M103 program M103 once again without a factor The feed rate reduction is then effective during traverse in M103 is also effective in an active tilted working plane the negative direction of the tilted tool axis Example NC blocks The feed rate for plunging is to be 20 of the feed rate in the plane N 68 Actual contouring feed rate mm min 500 500 100 141 500 500 Programming Miscellaneous Functions il Feed rate in millimeters per spindle revolution M136 Standard behavior The TNC moves the tool
13. Example Programming fundamental operations DO6 SINE Example D06 Q20 P01 Q5 Calculates and assigns the sine of an angle in degrees D07 COSINE Example D07 Q21 P01 Q5 cos x Calculates and assigns the cosine of an angle in degrees D08 ROOT SUM OF SQUARES Example D08 Q10 P01 5 P02 4 Ay Calculates and assigns length from two values D13 ANGLE D13 Example D13 Q20 P01 10 P02 Q1 i Calculates the angle from the arc tangent of two sides or from the sine and cosine of the angle 0 lt angle lt 360 and assigns it to a parameter oO o HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 i onomenne Functions j il th Q Parameters Ions WI 8 5 lf Then 5 8 5 If Then Decisions with Q Parameters Application The TNC can make logical If Then decisions by comparing a Q parameter with another Q parameter or with a numerical value If the condition is fulfilled the TNC continues the program at the label that is programmed after the condition for information on labels see Labeling Subprograms and Program Section Repeats page 182 If it is not fulfilled the TNC continues with the next block To call another program as a Subprogram enter a program call after the block with the target label Unconditional jumps An unconditional jump is programmed by entering a conditional jump whose condition is always true Example DO9 P01 10 P02 10 P03 1 Programming If Then decisions Press the JUMP sof
14. HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 thout a 3 D Touch Probe ing wi E T Y 12 4 f il 12 5 Using 3 D Touch Probes 12 5 Using 3 D Touch Probes Overview The following touch probe cycles are available in the Manual Operation mode Calibrate the effective length a Page 334 LS Calibrate the effective radius LR Page 335 Measure a basic rotation using a line PROBING Page 337 Set the datum in any axis PROBING Page 339 oe Set a corner as datum PROBING Page 340 E Set a circle center as datum PROBING Page 341 Touch probe system data TCH PROBE See User s management Manual for Cycles active for coordinate transformation Cycle 7 DATUM Cycle 8 MIRROR IMAGE Cycle 10 ROTATION Cycles 11 and 26 SCALING and Cycle 19 WORKING PLANE When running touch probe cycles no cycles must be For more information about the touch probe table refer to the User s Manual tor Cycle Programming 330 Manual Operation and Setup il Selecting probe cycles To select the Manual Operation or El Handwheel mode of operation Touch Select the touch probe functions by pressing the ae TOUCH PROBE soft key The TNC displays additional soft keys see table above To select the probe cycle press the appropriate soft key for example PROBING ROT and the TNC displays the associated menu HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 12 5 Using 3 D Touch Probes k il 12 5 Using 3 D Touch Probes Writing the measured values from touch probe
15. Memory media for NC PLC programs and system files Program memory for NC programs Block processing time HeROS operating system Windows XP operating system Interpolation Straight line Circle Helix Spline Hardware HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 6 maximum 1 um 0 01 um with option 23 0 001 0 00001 with option 23 With option 49 15 1 inch TFT color flat panel display CompactFlash memory card 300 MB 6 ms with option 9 1 5 ms Yes No 5 axes option 9 3 axes option 9 Yes No Compact in operating panel 18 maximum 0 1 um 0 0001 With CC 424 B 15 1 inch TFT color flat panel display optional 19 inch TFT Hard disk 25 GB 3 6 ms MC 420 0 5 ms MC 422 C Yes Option 5 axes 3 axes Yes Yes option with MC 420 Modular in electrical cabinet 429 Functions of the TNC 620 and the ITNC 530 Comparison Functions of the TNC 620 and the ITNC 530 Comparison Comparison Data interfaces 100Basel Fast Ethernet X RS 232 C V 24 serial interface X RS 422 V 11 serial interface USB interface USB 1 1 X Comparison Accessories Machine operating panel MB 420 MB 620 HSCI X Electronic handwheels HR 410 X HR 420 HR 520 530 550 HR 130 X HR 150 via HRA 110 E Touch probes TS 220 X option 17 TS 440 E X option 17 TS 444 X option 17 TS 449 TT 449 TS 640 X option 17 TS 740 X option 17 TT 130 TT 140 X option 17 Ind
16. Select the directory in which you wish to create the new file NEW Mmm Enter the new file name with the file extension and confirm with ENT Open the dialog box for creating a new file Enter the new file name with the file extension and NEW ENT confirm with ENT HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 ing wi 3 4 Work th the rila nager ing wi 3 4 Work Copying a single file Move the highlight to the file you wish to copy COPY acl era Ea 98 Press the COPY soft key to select the copy function The TNC opens a pop up window Enter the name of the destination file and confirm your entry with the ENT key or OK soft key the TNC copies the file to the active directory or to the selected destination directory The original file is retained or Programming Fundamentals File Management il Copying files into another directory Select a screen layout with two equally sized windows To display directories in both windows press the PATH soft key In the right window Move the highlight to the directory into which you wish to copy the files and display the files in this directory with the ENT key In the left window Select the directory with the Tiles that you wish to copy and press ENT to display the files in this directory Call the file tagging functions TAG EAs Move the highlight to the file you want to copy and tag FILE it You can tag several files in this way if desired COPY TAG Copy
17. a cd 7 l Signal GND DSR RTS Do not assign a Hsg Ext shield Hsg CO CO NI MD ol By WY NMI gt NO Violet When using the 9 pin adapter block 1 Donotassin Pea Tt ft i s on fe Ween s fe e e Wieren N Hsg Ext shield Hsg Ext shield Hsg Hsg Hsg Hsg Ext shield Hsg 410 Tables and Overviews il Non HEIDENHAIN devices The connector pin layout of a non HEIDENHAIN device may differ considerably from that of a HEIDENHAIN device It depends on the unit and the type of data transfer The table below shows the connector pin layout on the adapter block Yellow White Brown Black Violet Gray White Green Green CO NI co AIJ O1 MD NM W gt CO 0 N OD O1 BY WY N gt Hsg Hsg Hsg External Hsg shield Ethernet interface RJ45 socket Maximum cable length Unshielded 100 m Shielded 400 m 1 TX Transmit Data 2 TX Transmit Data 3 REC Receive Data 4 Vacant 5 Vacant 6 REC Receive Data 7 Vacant 8 Vacant HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 16 2 Pin hi and Connecting Cables for the Data Interfaces A _ 16 3 Technical Information Explanation of symbols Standard Axis option Software option 1s Short description Program entry Position data Tool compensation Tool tables Constant cutting speed Parallel operation Contour elements Approaching and departing the contour FK free contour programming Program jumps
18. 412 16 3 Technical Information Basic version 3 axes plus closed loop spindle 1st additional axis for 4 axes and closed loop spindle 2nd additional axis for 5 axes and closed loop spindle HEIDENHAIN conversational Nominal positions for lines and arcs in Cartesian coordinates or polar coordinates Incremental or absolute dimensions Display and entry in mm or inches Tool radius in the working plane and tool length Radius compensated contour look ahead for up to 99 blocks M120 Multiple tool tables with any number of tools With respect to the path of the tool center With respect to the cutting edge Creating a program with graphical support while another program is being run Straight line Chamfer Circular path Circle center point Circle radius Tangentially connected arc Corner rounding Via straight line tangential or perpendicular Via circular arc FK free contour programming in HEIDENHAIN conversational format with graphic support for workpiece drawings not dimensioned for NC Subroutines Program section repeat Any desired program as subroutine Tables and Overviews il Fixed cycles Coordinate transformation Q parameters Programming with variables Programming aids Actual position capture Program verification graphics Display modes Programming graphics Program Run graphics Display modes Machining time Returning to the contour HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 Cycles for drilling and conventional
19. Close the parenthetical expression with the ENT key and confirm your entry with the END key The TNC returns the following results 0 The compared OS parameters are identical 1 The first QS parameter precedes the second QS parameter alphabetically 1 The first OS parameter follows the second OS parameter alphabetically Example QS12 and QS14 are compared for alphabetic priority HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 8 10 String Parameters o il 8 assigned Q Parameters 8 11 Preassigned Q Parameters The Q parameters Q100 to Q199 are assigned values by the TNC The following are assigned to Q parameters Values from the PLC Tool and spindle data Data on operating status Results of measurements from touch probe cycles etc The TNC saves the preassigned Q parameters Q108 Q114 and Q115 Q117 in the unit of measure used by the active program between Q100 and 0199 QS100 and QS199 as calculation parameters in NC programs Otherwise you might receive undesired results Do not use preassigned O parameters or OS parameters Values from the PLC Q100 to Q107 The TNC uses the parameters Q100 to Q107 to transfer values from the PLC to an NC program Active tool radius 0108 The active value of the tool radius is assigned to Q108 Q108 is calculated from Tool radius R tool table or G99 block Delta value DR from the tool table Delta value DR from the T block The TNC remembers the current tool radius even if the
20. First Steps with the TNC 620 il 54 2 1 The e20 2 1 The TNC 620 HEIDENHAIN TNC controls are workshop oriented contouring controls that enable you to program conventional machining operations right at the machine in an easy to use conversational programming language They are designed for milling and drilling machine tools as well as machining centers with up to five axes You can also change the angular position of the spindle under program control Keyboard and screen layout are clearly arranged in such a way that the functions are fast and easy to use Programming HEIDENHAIN conversational and ISO formats The HEIDENHAIN conversational programming format is an especially easy method of writing programs Interactive graphics illustrate the individual machining steps for programming the contour If a production drawing is not dimensioned for NC the HEIDENHAIN FK free contour programming performs the necessary calculations automatically Workpiece machining can be graphically simulated either during or before actual machining It is also possible to program the TNCs in ISO format or DNC mode You can also enter and test one program while the control is running another Compatibility The scope of functions of the TNC 620 does not correspond to that of the TNC 4xx and ITNC 530 series of controls Therefore machining programs created on HEIDENHAIN contouring controls starting from the TNC 150 B may not alwa
21. HEIDENHAIN HEIDENHAIN Manual operation 15 000 User s Manual 30 000 ISO Programming 2 000 0 000 0 000 TNC 620 NC Software 340 560 02 340 561 02 340 564 02 English en 7 2009 Controls of the TNC Keys on visual display unit Split screen layout Toggle display between machining and programming modes Soft keys for selecting functions on screen Shift between soft key rows Machine operating modes Manual Operation Electronic Handwheel Positioning with Manual Data Input Program Run Single Block Program Run Full Sequence Programming modes Programming and Editing Test Run Program file management TNC functions Select or delete programs and Tiles external data transfer PGM MGT Define program call select datum and point tables PGM CALL Select MOD functions Display help text for NC error messages call TNCguide HELP Display all current error messages Show pocket calculator Navigation keys Move highlight GOTO LO Potentiometer for feed rate and spindle speed Go directly to blocks cycles and parameter functions Cycles subprograms and program section repeats Define touch probe cycles TOUCH PROBE CYCL 0 0 E DEF CALL LBL LBL SET CALL STOP Define and call cycles Enter and call labels for subprogramming and program section repeats Program stop In a program i Tool functions Coor
22. N140 G01 X 30 Y 30 G40 N150 T3 G17 51500 N160 GOO Z 200 G40 M3 N15 G20 DRILLING Q200 2 SET UP CLEARANCE Q201 20 DEPTH Q206 150 FEED RATE FOR PLNGNG Q202 5 gt PLUNGING DEPTH Q210 0 DWELL TIME AT TOP Q203 0 SURFACE COORDINATE Q204 50 2ND SET UP CLEARANCE Q211 0 DWELL TIME AT DEPTH N160 GOO X 55 Y 80 G40 M99 N15 G01 Z 100 G40 M30 N99999999 333 G71 Program run full sequence 333 1 Programming ES EE MODE MODE a mm r oe oe 333 G71 N10 G30 G17 X Y 0 Z 25 N2 G31 X 15 Y 100 Z 0 comment N30 TS G17 53500x Ngo GOO Z 100 G40 G90 MIke N50 X 30 Y 30 N60 Z 5 N70 G 1 X 15 Y 15 G41 F350 N15 G200 DRILLING Q200 2 SET UP CLEARANCE Q201 20 gt DEPTH Q206 150 FEED RATE FOR PLNGNG Q202 5 3 PLUNGING DEPTH Q210 0 DWELL TIME AT TOP Q203 0 SURFACE COORDINATE Q204 50 2ND SET UP CLEARANCE Q211 0 DWELL TIME AT DEPTH N160 GOO X 55 80 G40 M99 N150 G01 Z 100 G40 M30 N99999999 333 G71 DECLARE SEL CONTOUR SEL CONTOUR CONTOUR FORMULA PATTERN MODE MODE a a al n oam oo r aw 279 e 2 oa Q 5 IL C Q Q V t O gt as T gt O pa Overview of Special Functions Menu of various DIN ISO functions Select the menu for defining various DIN I
23. amp 3 co 1 3 Programming the First j 1 3 Programming the First Program a simple contour The contour shown to the right is to be milled once to a depth of 5mm You have already defined the workpiece blank After you have initiated a dialog through a function key enter all the data requested by the TNC in the screen header TOOL CALL BGR GOO D 40 Call the tool Enter the tool data Confirm each of your entries with the ENT key Do not forget the tool axis Press the L key to open a program block for a linear movement Press the left arrow key to switch to the input range for G codes Press the GO soft key if you want to enter a rapid traverse motion Retract the tool Press the orange axis key Z in order to get clear in the tool axis and enter the value for the position to be approached e g 250 Confirm with the ENT key Confirm Radius comp RL RR no comp by pressing the ENT key Activate the radius compensation Confirm Miscellaneous function M with the END key The TNC saves the entered positioning block Press the L key to open a program block for a linear movement Press the left arrow key to switch to the input range for G codes Press the GO soft key if you want to enter a rapid traverse motion Preposition the tool in the working plane Press the orange X axis key and enter the value for the position to be approached e g 20 Press the orange Y axis key and enter the value for
24. exception calibration function with mechanical probes or by simply touching the workpiece with the tool In place of the electronic signal generated automatically by a 3 D touch probe during probing you can manually initiate the trigger signal for capturing the probing position by pressing a key Proceed as follows PROBING POS QZZ Select any touch probe function by soft key Move the mechanical probe to the first position to be captured by the TNC Confirm the position Press the actual position capture soft key for the TNC to save the current position Move the mechanical probe to the next position to be captured by the TNC Confirm the position Press the actual position capture soft key for the TNC to save the current position If required move to additional positions and capture as described previously Datum In the menu window enter the coordinates of the new datum confirm with the SET DATUM soft key or write the values to a table see Writing the measured values from touch probe cycles in datum tables page 332 or see Writing the measured values from touch probe cycles in the preset table page 333 To terminate the probe function press the END key HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 th 3 D Touch Probe ing wi i Datum Sett j il 12 9 ritin Working Plane Software Option 1 12 9 Tilting the Working Plane Software Option 1 Application function the TNC and the machine tool by the
25. 270 Programming Miscellaneous Functions il Effect M120 must be located in an NC block that also contains radius compensation G41 or G42 M120 is then effective from this block until radius compensation is canceled with G40 M120 LAO is programmed or M120 is programmed without LA or another program is called with the working plane is tilted with Cycle G80 or the PLANE function M120 becomes effective at the start of block Restrictions After an external or internal stop you can only re enter the contour with the function RESTORE POS AT N Before you start the block scan you must cancel M120 otherwise the TNC will output an error message When using the path functions G25 and G24 the blocks before and after G25 or G24 must contain only coordinates in the working plane Before using the functions listed below you have to cancel M120 and the radius compensation Cycle G60 Tolerance Cycle G80 Working plane PLANE function M114 M128 HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 9 4 Miscellaneous ung for Contouring Behavior i il 9 4 Miscellaneous run ns for Contouring Behavior Superimposing handwheel positioning during program run M118 Standard behavior In the program run modes the TNC moves the tool as defined in the part program Behavior with M118 M118 permits manual corrections by handwheel during program run Just program M118 and enter an axis specific value linear or rotary axis in millimeters Input If you en
26. BEGIN END PAGE PAGE START RESET t ii FIND START SINGLE i 4 START pe O O pe an LO vr Generating a graphic for an existing program Use the arrow keys to select the block up to which you want the graphic to be generated or press GOTO and enter the desired block number To generate graphics press the RESET START soft eet key Additional functions Generate a complete graphic Generate programming graphic blockwise arar Ee Generate a complete graphic or complete it after aa RESET START Stop the programming graphics This soft key ee only appears while the TNC is generating the interactive graphics 116 Programming Programming Aids il Graph Block number display ON OFF Shift the soft key row see figure a To show block numbers Set the SHOW OMIT BLOCK NR soft key to SHOW To omit block numbers Set the SHOW OMIT BLOCK NR soft key to OMIT E Erasing the graphic G Shift the soft key row see figure Erase graphic Press CLEAR GRAPHICS soft key Programming Magnifying or reducing a detail 4 5 Program You can select the graphics display by selecting a detail with the frame overlay You can now magnify or reduce the selected detail ot Ss Er a p DIAGNOSIS LT 2 t ii eS RESET MEREEN BEA eet DETAIL re i N80 G01 G41 X 5 Y 30 F250 Select the soft key row for detail magnification reduction second ae row see figure
27. By hard key X X Comparison Touch probe cycles for automatic workpiece inspection 0 Reference plane 1 Polar datum 2 Calibrate TS 3 Measuring 4 Measuring in 3 D 9 Calibrate TS length 30 Calibrate TT 31 Measure tool length 32 Measure tool radius 33 Measure tool length and radius 400 401 402 403 404 405 408 409 410 A11 412 413 414 415 416 417 418 Basic rotation Basic rotation from two holes Basic rotation from two studs Compensate a basic rotation via a rotary axis Set basic rotation Compensating workpiece misalignment by rotating the C axis Slot center datum Ridge center datum Datum from inside of rectangle Datum from outside of rectangle Datum from inside of circle Datum from outside of circle Datum at outside corner Datum at inside corner Datum at circle center Datum in touch probe axis Datum at center of 4 holes HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 Option 17 Option 17 Option 17 Option 17 Option 17 Option 17 Option 17 Option 17 Option 17 Option 17 Option 17 Option 17 Option 17 Option 17 Option 17 Option 17 Option 17 Option 17 Option 17 Option 17 Option 17 Option 17 Option 17 Option 17 X X XI XI X X XI X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X XJ X Functions of the TNC 620 and the ITNC 530 Comparison o il Functions of the TNC 620 and the ITNC 530 Comparison 419 420 421 422
28. Center in Y axis Center in Z axis Starting angle in space Z X plane End angle in space Z X plane Cylinder radius Length of the cylinder Rotational position in the X Y plane Allowance for cylinder radius Feed rate for plunging Feed rate for milling Number of cuts Definition of workpiece blank Tool call Retract the tool Call machining operation Reset allowance Call machining operation 54 Programming Q Parameters il HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 Retract in the tool axis end program Subprogram 10 Machining operation Account for allowance and tool based on the cylinder radius Set counter Copy starting angle in space Z X plane Calculate angle increment Shift datum to center of cylinder X axis Account for rotational position in the plane Pre position in the plane to the cylinder center Pre position in the tool axis Set pole in the Z X plane Move to starting position on cylinder plunge cutting obliquely into the material Longitudinal cut in Y direction Update the counter Update solid angle Finished If finished jump to end Move in an approximated arc for the next longitudinal cut Longitudinal cut in Y direction Update the counter Update solid angle Unfinished If not finished return to LBL 1 Reset the rotation Reset the datum shift End of subprogram Programming Examples j i Program sequence This program requires an end mill E The contour of the sphere is approx
29. Enter the number of the string parameter in which the second substring is saved Confirm with the ENT key Repeat the process until you have selected all the required substrings Conclude with the END key Example QS10 is to include the complete text of QS12 QS13 and QS14 Parameter contents QS12 Workpiece QS13 Status QS14 Scrap QS10 Workpiece Status Scrap HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 8 10 String Parameters j il 8 10 String Parameters Converting a numerical value to a string parameter With the TOCHAR function the TNC converts a numerical value to a string parameter This enables you to chain numerical values with string variables O Select Q parameter functions STRING Select the STRING FORMULA function TN Select the function for converting a numerical value to a string parameter Enter the number or the desired Q parameter to be converted and confirm with the ENT key If desired enter the number of decimal places that the TNC should convert and confirm with the ENT key Close the parenthetical expression with the ENT key and confirm your entry with the END key Example Convert parameter Q50 to string parameter QS11 use 3 decimal places 240 Programming Q Parameters il Copying a substring from a string parameter With the SUBSTR function you can copy a definable range from a string parameter O Select Q parameter functions Select the STRING FORMULA function Enter the number of the stri
30. Entering values Spindle speed S miscellaneous function M Ea To enter the spindle speed press the S soft key 1000 Enter the desired spindle speed and confirm your G entry with the machine START button The spindle speed S with the entered rom is started with a miscellaneous function M Proceed in the same way to enter a miscellaneous function M Feed rate F After entering a feed rate F you must confirm your entry with the ENT key instead of the machine START button The following is valid for feed rate F If you enter F 0 then the lowest feed rate from the machine parameter manualFeed is effective If the feed rate entered exceeds the value defined in the machine parameter maxFeed then the parameter value is effective F is not lost during a power interruption Manual Operation and Setup il Changing the spindle speed and feed rate With the override knobs you can vary the spindle speed S and feed rate F trom 0 to 150 of the set value ate F and Miscellaneous Functions M LL n oO Q Y O S Q Y a N HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 321 il thout a 3 D Touch Probe ing wi 5 T V z 12 4 12 4 Datum Setting without a 3 D Touch Probe Note Datum setting with a 3 D touch probe see Datum Setting with 3 D Touch Probe on page 339 You fix a datum by setting the TNC position display to the coordinates of a known position on the workpiece Preparatio
31. Inclined machining with noncontrolled rotary axes If you have noncontrolled rotary axes counting axes on your machine then in combination with M128 you can also perform inclined machining operations with these axes Proceed as follows 1 Manually traverse the rotary axes to the desired positions M128 must not be active 2 Activate M128 The TNC reads the actual values of all rotary axes present calculates from this the new position of the tool center point and updates the position display 3 The TNC performs the necessary compensating movement in the next positioning block 4 Carry out the machining operation 5 At the end of program reset M128 with M129 and return the rotary axes to the Initial positions positions of the noncontrolled rotary axes If the actual position deviates from the nominal position by a value greater than that defined by the machine manufacturer the TNC outputs an error message and interrupts program run mp As long as M128 is active the TNC monitors the actual HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 11 4 b an Functions for Rotary Axes i il ion tat lece orien 11 5 Peripheral milling 3 D radius compensation with workpiece orientation Application With peripheral milling the TNC displaces the tool perpendicular to the direction of movement and perpendicular to the tool direction by the sum of the delta values DR tool table and T block Determine the compensation direction with radius comp
32. Left handed Z G13 G41 Right handed Z G13 G42 Left handed Z G12 G41 Right handed Z G12 G41 Left handed Z G13 G42 176 Programming Programming Contours il Programming a helix rotation and the incremental total angle G91 H The tool may otherwise move in a wrong path and damage the contour Always enter the same algebraic sign for the direction of For the total angle G91 H you can enter a value of 182 Gis SESS i eS SEE Ieee Polar coordinates angle Enter the total angle of tool traverse along the helix in incremental dimensions After entering the angle specify the tool axis with an axis selection key olar Coordinates gt Coordinate Enter the coordinate for the height of the helix in incremental dimensions gt radius compensation according to the table above Example NC blocks Thread M6 x 1 mm with 5 revolutions 6 5 Path Contours HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 177 il olar Coordinates 6 5 Path Contour Definition of workpiece blank Tool call Define the datum for polar coordinates Retract the tool Pre position the tool Move to working depth Approach the contour at point 1 Approach the contour at point 1 Move to point 2 Move to point 3 Move to point 4 Move to point 5 Move to point 6 Move to point 1 Tangential exit Retract tool in the working plane cancel radius compensation Retract in the spindle axis end of program Programming Programming
33. O O1 Call the Q parameter functions by pressing the Q key paste To select the mathematical functions press the acai BASIC ARITHMETIC soft key To select the Q parameter function MULTIPLICATION press the D3 X Y soft key 12 Enter the number of the O parameter e g 12 O Sz mi ot 49 s O O1 h O s ot 2 49 h Ss Yn ot lt aul Cc 49 7 ENT m ct 49 N O 5 s 49 Yn 99 Q O J Q lt eb a HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 Example Program blocks in the TNC Call the Q parameter functions by pressing the Q key N17 D03 Q12 POL 05 PO2 7 O00 i i 2 8 4 Trigonometric Functions 2 Definitions Sine cosine and tangent are terms designating the ratios of sides of LL right triangles In this case Sine sina a c yw Cosine cosa b c eb Tangent tana a b sina cosa E where 2 c is the side opposite the right angle O a is the side opposite the angle o pan b is the third side The TNC can find the angle from the tangent arc tan a b arc tan sin cos o Example a 25 mm b 50 mm arctan a b arctan 0 5 26 57 Furthermore a2 b c where a2 a x a c J a2 b 204 Programming Q Parameters il Programming trigonometric functions Press the ANGLE FUNCTION soft key to call the angle functions The TNC then displays the following soft keys Programming Compare
34. Press the TABLE FILTER soft key fourth soft key row Select the tool type by pressing a soft key The TNC only shows tools of the type selected Cancel filter Press the tool type selected before again or select another tool type the filter function to the requirements of your machine D The machine tool builder adapts the functional range of The machine tool manual provides further information HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 tttttttttttt tt ttt t t Ssssesveesgegggsg0gsgggsgsgs0gggsgsgggsg 137 on 5 2 Tool Data 5 2 Tool Data To open any other tool table Select the Programming and Editing mode of operation Call the file manager G Press the SELECT TYPE soft key to select the file type To show type T files press the SHOW T soft key Select a file or enter a new file name Conclude your entry with the ENT key or the SELECT soft key When you have opened the tool table you can edit the tool data by moving the cursor to the desired position in the table with the arrow keys or the soft keys You can overwrite the stored values or enter new values at any position The available editing functions are illustrated in the table below If the TNC cannot show all positions in the tool table in one screen page the highlight bar at the top of the table will display the gt gt or lt lt symbols Select beginning of table BEGIN Select end of table Select previous page in table Select ne
35. The TNC numbers the blocks of a part program automatically depending on machine parameter blockIncrement 105409 The machine parameter blockIncrement 105409 defines the block number increment The first block of a program is identified by the program name and the active unit of measure The subsequent blocks contain information on Path function The workpiece blank Tool calls Approaching a safe position Feed rates and spindle speeds as well as Path contours cycles and other functions Block number The last block of a program is identified by N99999999 the program name and the active unit of measure After each tool call HEIDENHAIN recommends always traversing to a safe position from which the TNC can position the tool for machining without causing a collision Define the blank G30 G31 Immediately after initiating a new program you define a cuboid workpiece blank If you wish to define the blank at a later stage press the SPEC FCT key the PROGRAM DEFAULTS soft key and then the BLK FORM soft key This definition is needed for the TNC s graphic simulation feature The sides of the workpiece blank lie parallel to the X Y and Z axes and can be up to 100 000 mm long The blank form is defined by two of its corner points MIN point G30 the smallest X Y and Z coordinates of the blank form entered as absolute values MAX point G31 the largest X Y and Z coordinates of the blank form entered as absolute or incr
36. Y axis Q186 Z axis Q187 Markers for cycles Q188 Reserved Q190 Reserved Q191 Reserved Q192 Reserved Q193 Markers for cycles 0195 Markers for cycles 0196 Markers for cycles machining patterns 0197 Number of the last active measuring cycle 0198 Tool within tolerance Q199 0 0 Tool is worn LTOL RTOL is exceeded Q199 1 0 Tool is broken LBREAK RBREAK is 0199 2 0 exceeded HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 i i Counterclockwise machining direction starting angle lt end angle The tool radius is not taken into account 9 8 12 Programming Examples 2 x LLJ D Program sequence e The contour of the ellipse is approximated by many short lines defined in Q7 The more calculation steps you define for the lines the smoother the curve becomes The machining direction can be altered by Soe changing the entries for the starting and end O angles in the plane O Clockwise machining direction A starting angle gt end angle y N 52 Center in X axis Center in Y axis Semiaxis in X Semiaxis in Y Starting angle in the plane End angle in the plane Number of calculation steps Rotational position of the ellipse Milling depth Feed rate for plunging Feed rate for milling Set up clearance for pre positioning Definition of workpiece blank Tool call Retract the tool Call machining operation Programming Q Parameters il HEIDEN
37. a OVERVIEW STATUS rene Q PARAM HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 67 Active miscellaneous functions M M tab STAT h No direct List of the active M functions with fixed meaning r eae selection 20 CYcL DEF 11 1 ack 0 8805 possible 22 CALL LBL 15 REPS 23 PLANE RESET STAY 24 LBL 25 END PGM STAT1 MM lays List of the active M functions that are adapted by your machine manufacturer S IST 12 44 57 F OVR elie END PGM 33 747 72 578 Z 9 754 S Ic 0 000 S 94 680 acr A ok T 3 2 mm min Our 57 8 M5 STATUS STATUS TOOL STATUS STATUS OF COORD OVERVIEW STATUS SER Q PARAM 5 e ad ad Y T N 68 Introduction Positions and coordinates POS tab STAT h N gt amp END PGM _Soft key Meaning 9 a Ce a e C 0 000 S 94 680 am T Tool number and name E a n oroe we EEEP STATUS 2 RT Number and name of a replacement tool m a a a Vcoieece UUO OVERVIEW STATUS is Q PARAM Tool axis STATUS Type of position display Q actual position Rs EA ee Overview PGM LBL cyc M Pos r Pos 19 CYCL DEF 11 SCALING RFNOML x 129 508 A 2 CYCL DEF 11 1 SCL 0 9995 150 7 500 22 CALL LBL 15 REPS c 0 000 Tilt angle of the working plane e ue M p 25 END PGM STAT1 MM iel E T 25 00000 ad Angle of a basic rotation a eesic rotat 1 647
38. rename and erase Tiles With the TNC you can manage and save Tiles up to a total size of 300 MB bak after editing and saving of NC programs This can Depending on the setting the TNC generates a backup file reduce the memory space available to you 90 Programming Fundamentals File Management il File names When you store programs tables and texts as files the TNC adds an extension to the Tile name separated by a point This extension indicates the Tile type Poco File name File type File names should not exceed 25 characters otherwise the TNC cannot display the entire file name The following characters are not permitted in file names DERT ice Oe ae cs Oe a E Enter the file name using the screen keyboard see Screen keyboard on page 110 The space HEX 20 and delete HEX 7F characters are not permitted in file names either The maximum limit for the path and file name together is 256 characters see Paths on page 92 Data backup We recommend saving newly written programs and files on a PC at regular intervals The TNCremoNT data transmission freeware from HEIDENHAIN is a simple and convenient method for backing up data stored on the TNC You additionally need a data medium on which all machine specific data such as the PLC program machine parameters etc are stored Ask your machine manufacturer for assistance If necessary that the TNC always has enough memo
39. repeat Miscellaneous function Block number Tool call Polar coordinate angle Z coordinate of the circle center pole Polar coordinate radius Spindle speed SEF EB Eee 6 eee HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 281 il E Defining DIN ISO Functions 282 Programming Special Functions il Programming Multiple Axis Machining il 11 1 M tions for Multiple Axis Machining 11 1 Functions for Multiple Axis Machining The TNC functions for multiple axis machining are described in this chapter PLANE Define machining in the tilted working plane Page 285 PLANE M128 Inclined tool machining Page 306 M116 Feed rate of rotary axes Page 307 M126 Shortest path traverse of rotary axes Page 308 M94 Reduce display value of rotary axes Page 309 M128 Define the behavior of the TNC when positioning the rotary axes Page 309 284 Programming Multiple Axis Machining il 11 2 The PLANE Function Tilting the Working Plane Software Option 1 Introduction The machine manufacturer must enable the functions for F tilting the working plane You can only use the PLANE function in its entirety on machines which have at least two rotary axes head and or table Exception PLANE AXIAL can also be used if only a single rotary axis is present or active on your machine The PLANE function is a powerful function for defining tilted working planes in various manners All PLANE functions available on the TNC describe
40. then the TNC selects the shortest possible solution 3 If only one solution is within the traverse range the TNC selects this solution 4 lf neither solution is within the traverse range the TNC displays the Entered angle not permitted error message 304 y SEQ Programming Multiple Axis Machining il Example for a machine with a rotary table C and a tilting table A Programmed function PLANE SPATIAL SPA 0 SPB 45 SPC 0 None None None None None None 90 lt A lt 10 AGO 90 lt A lt 10 A 0 None A 0 A 0 A 0 A 0 A 0 A 0 A 0 C 0 C 0 C 0 C 105 C 105 C 105 C 0 C 0 C 135 not prog not prog not prog A 45 C 90 A 45 C 90 A 45 C 90 A 45 C 90 A 45 C 90 A 45 C 90 A 45 C 90 Error message A 45 C 90 Selecting the type of transformation entry optional On machines with C rotary tables a function is available for specifying the type of transformation COORD ROT specifies that the PLANE function should only rotate the coordinate system to the defined tilting angle The rotary table is not moved the compensation is purely mathematical TABLE ROT specifies that the PLANE function should position the rotary table to the defined tilting angle Compensation results from rotating the workpiece ROT lee ROT When the PLANE AXIAL function is used COORD ROT and TABLE ROT are nonfunctional If you use the TABLE ROT function in conjunction with a
41. 204 It then conditions jumps a Page 206 Other functions eee Page 208 Entering formulas directly ae Page 233 Function for machining complex aaa See User s contours as Manual for Cycles 200 Programming Q Parameters il 8 2 Part Families Q Parameters in Place of Numerical Values Function The Q parameter function D0 ASSIGN assigns numerical values to Q parameters This enables you to use variables in the program instead of fixed numerical values Example NC blocks Assign Q10 is assigned the value 25 Corresponds to GOO X 25 You need write only one program for a whole family of parts entering the characteristic dimensions as Q parameters To program a particular part you then assign the appropriate values to the individual Q parameters Example Cylinder with Q parameters Cylinder radius R Q1 Cylinder height H Q2 Qi Cylinder Z1 Q1 30 Q2 10 Cylinder Z2 Q1 10 Q2 50 Q1 Q2 8 2 Part Families Q Parameters j i of Numerical Values HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 201 il 8 3 Describing Contours throualfiiitathematical Operations 8 3 Describing Contours through Mathematical Operations Application The Q parameters listed below enable you to program basic mathematical functions in a part program Select a O parameter function Press the O key in the numerical keypad at right The Q parameter functions are displayed in a soft key row To select the mathematical functions press the BASIC ARITHMETIC so
42. 30 G40 N150 T3 G17 51500 N160 GOO Z 200 G40 M3 N15 G20 DRILLING Q200 2 SET UP CLEARANCE Q201 20 7DEPTH Q206 150 FEED RATE FOR PLNGNG Q202 5 gt PLUNGING DEPTH Q210 0 DWELL TIME AT TOP Q203 0 SURFACE COORDINATE Q204 50 72ND SET UP CLEARANCE Q211 0 DWELL TIME AT DEPTH N160 GOO X 55 Y 80 G40 M99 N15 G01 Z 100 G40 M30 N99999999 x333 G71 MODE MODE a cs _ a SEES Eo no ooo oE 2j FER CONTOUR TILT EEREN INSERT POINT MACHINING SECTION DEFAULTS MACHINING PLANE FUNCTIONS Programming Special Functions Program defaults menu ean Select the program defaults menu DEFAULTS Define the workpiece blank Select datum table BLK FORM DATUM TABLE Page 79 See User s Manual for Cycles Functions for contour and point machining menu CONTOUR Select the menu for functions for contour and point MACHINING machining Assign contour description Select a contour definition Define a complex contour formula HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 DECLARE CONTOUR SEL CONTOUR CONTOUR FORMULA See User s Manual for Cycles See User s Manual for Cycles See User s Manual for Cycles Program run full sequence ES eC HS pe I Programming 333 G71 N10 G30 G17 X Y 0 Z 25 N2 G31 X 15 Y 100 Z 0 comment N30 TS G17 53500x N40_ GOO Z 100 G40 G90 M3 N50 X 30 Y 30 N60 Z 5 N70 G01 X 15 Y 15 G41 F350
43. 367 il 14 4 Test Run Running a program test If the central tool file is active a tool table must be active status S to run a program test Select a tool table via the file manager PGM MGT in the Test Run mode of operation With the BLANK IN WORK SPACE function you activate work space monitoring for the test run see Show the Workpiece in the Working Space page 365 Select the Test Run operating mode Call the file manager with the PGM MGT key and select the file you wish to test or Go to the program beginning Select line O with the GOTO key and confirm your entry with the ENT key The TNC then displays the following soft keys Reset the blank form and test the entire program RESET Test the entire program fee Test each program block individually START Halt program test soft key only appears once you have me started the program test You can interrupt the program test and continue it again at any point even within a machining cycle In order to continue the test the following actions must not be performed Selecting another block with the arrow keys or the GOTO key Making changes to the program Switching the operating mode Selecting a new program 368 Test Run and Program Run il 14 5 Program Run ce Application Program run full sequence 333 1 M333 G71 In the Program Run Full Sequence mode of operation the TNC N10 638 G17 X 8 V10 2 25 executes a part program continuous
44. 4380 TCHPR43 TXT 32437 DIAGNOSIS 28 file s 195 5 MB vacant 2j WINDOW Select the screen layout for data transfer press the WINDOW soft key In the left half of the screen the TNC shows all files in the current directory In the right half of the screen it shows all files saved in the root directory TNC Use the arrow keys to highlight the file s that you want to transfer Moves the highlight up and down within a window Moves the highlight from the left to the right window and vice versa If you wish to copy from the TNC to the external data medium move the highlight in the left window to the Tile to be transferred HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 105 ing wi 3 4 Work th the iManager ing wi 3 4 Work If you wish to copy from the external data medium to the TNC move the highlight in the right window to the file to be transferred To select another drive or directory press the soft key EO for choosing the directory The TNC opens a pop up window Select the desired directory in the pop up window by using the arrow keys and the ENT key Transfer several files Press the TAG soft key in the second soft key row see Tagging files page 102 Confirm with the OK soft key or with the ENT key A status window appears on the TNC informing about the copying progress or uENDOU To end data transfer move the highlight into the left window and then press the WINDOW soft key The Standard file ma
45. 45 HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 orking Plane Software Option 1 re Tilting Position at clearance height Define and activate the PLANE function Position the rotary axis with the values calculated by the TNC Define machining in the tilted working plane 11 2 The PLANE Function j i orking Plane Software Option 1 re Tilting 11 2 The PLANE Function Selection of alternate tilting possibilities SEQ entry optional The position you define for the machining plane is used by the TNC to calculate the appropriate positioning of the rotary axes present on the machine In general there are always two solution possibilities Use the SEQ switch to specify which possibility the TNC should use SEQ positions the master axis so that it assumes a positive angle The master axis is the 1st rotary axis from the tool or the last rotary axis from the table depending on the machine configuration see figure at top right SEQ positions the master axis so that it assumes a negative angle If the solution you chose with SEQ is not within the machine s range of traverse the TNC displays the Entered angle not permitted error message When the PLANE AXIAL function is used the PLANE RESET switch is nonfunctional If you do not define SEQ the TNC determines the solution as follows 1 The TNC first checks whether both solution possibilities are within the traverse range of the rotary axes 2 fthey are
46. 54500 Z7eaakLa MEA 5 CYCL DEF 262 THREAD MILLING Finishing Q335 108 sNOMINAL DIAMETER Drill hole pattern ere tk SeeeTI Oc ARAD eh haa Enter the file name using the screen keyboard see dec pe leg e USES Se ea a Screen keyboard on page 110 a200 2 7SET UP CLEARANCE Q203 0 sSURFACE COORDINATE Q204 58 32ND SET UP CLEARANCE Q207 500 FEED RATE FOR MILLNG L Z 100 R FMAX TOOL CALL 1 Z 54500 L Z 100 R FMAX CYCL DEF 203 UNIVERSL DRILLNG Q200 2 7SET UP CLEARANCE Q201 50 DEPTH Q206 250 FEED RATE FOR PLNGNG If the TNC cannot show the entire comment on the screen the gt gt sign is displayed oonuo Th h bl k h Q202 0 3 PLUNGING DEPTH e last character in a comment plock must not have any aes D EN a UL z Q203 0 3SURFACE COORDINATE tilde Q204 100 2ND SET UP CLEARANCE Q212 0 DECREMENT Q213 0 3NR OF BREAKS Q2 5 0 MIN PLUNGING DEPTH Q211 0 DWELL TIME AT DEPTH Q208 500 RETRACTION FEED RATE Entering a comment in a separate block Select the block after which the comment is to be inserted Press the SPEC FCT key to select the special functions To select the program functions press the PROGRAM FUNCTIONS soft key Shift soft key row to the left Press the INSERT COMMENT soft key Enter your comment using the screen keyboard see Screen keyboard on page 110 and conclude the block by pressing the END key interface you can insert a co
47. As soon as a PLANE function is active the TNC shows the calculated space angle in the additional status display see figure As a rule the TNC internally always calculates with space angles independent of which PLANE function is active HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 Program run full sequence Programming Plane from spatial angle 333 G71 N10 G30 G17 X 0 Z 25 MODE N20 G31 X 150 Y 100 Z 0 comment an N30 TS G1 S3500 N4 GOG Z 100 G40 G90 M3 N50 X 30 Y 30 MoDE N70 G01 X 15 15 G41 F350 N110 G25 R5 N160 GOO Z 200 G40 M3 N150 G20 DRILLING Q200 2 SET UP CLEARANCE Q201 20 7DEPTH Q206 15 FEED RATE FOR PLNGNG Q202 5 3PLUNGING DEPTH Q210 0 DWELL TIME AT TOP Q203 0 SURFACE COORDINATE Q204 50 72ND SET UP CLEARANCE Q211 0 DWELL TIME AT DEPTH al N160 GOO X 55 Y 80 G40 M99 N15 G01 Z 100 G40 M30 N99999999 x333 G71 Ai RA ys 15 ve K gron NS wV a ca E Programming Manual operation Overview PGM LBL cyc M POS gt RFNOML X 139 600 c 0 000 y 150 000 108 452 z 7 500 l D 9 749 e R 2 8 000 o rcn DR_PGH pe no N lt 85 860 o LBL REP ACTL tik T 33 2 6 o PGM CALL Active PGM F mm min Our 57 5 M5 0 S IST 12 38 TOUCH PRESET Ps ROT TOOL ce Er eae Seen Se cg DS Ria 287 orking Plane Software Option 1 re Tilting 11 2 The PLANE
48. Contours il HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 a x Sf gt Definition of workpiece blank Tool call Retract the tool Pre position the tool Transfer the last programmed position as the pole Move to working depth Approach first contour point Connection Helical interpolation Tangential exit Retract in the tool axis end program 179 N oe oO os Oo Oo Q os Bi O 6 5 Path Contours 6 5 Path ContourdiliPolar Coordinates 180 Programming Programming Contours il air 7 1 Labeling Subprograms and n Section Repeats 7 1 Labeling Subprograms and Program Section Repeats Subprograms and program section repeats enable you to program a machining sequence once and then run it as often as desired Labels The beginnings of subprograms and program section repeats are marked in a part program by labels G98 L A LABEL is identified by a number between 1 and 999 or by a name you define Each LABEL number or LABEL name can be set only once in the program with the LABEL SET key or by entering G98 The number of label names you can enter is only limited by the internal memory p Do not use a label number or label name more than once Label O G98 LO is used exclusively to mark the end of a subprogram and can therefore be used as often as desired 182 Programming Subprograms and Program Section Repeats il 72 Subprograms Operating sequence 1 The TNC executes the part progra
49. END 88 Select the search function The TNC superimposes the search window and displays the available search functions in the soft key row see table of search functions Enter the text to be searched for Please note that the search is case sensitive Start the search process The TNC moves to the next block containing the text you are searching for Repeat the search process The TNC moves to the next block containing the text you are searching for End the search function Program run full sequence Programming BEGIN PGM 14 MM 1 BLK FORM 1 Z X Y Z 20 2 BLK FORM 2 X 10 Y 100 2Z 0 3 TOOL CALL 9 Z 53500 4 Lt 2 108 RO FMAX M13 5 L X 5 5 R FMAX on 7 L 2 6 R F2000 3 8 APPR LOT X 12 V5 RS RL F250 a 10 RND R7 5 a oe Find text CURRENT WORD 7 z ee FIND 4 amp fate i Replace with REPLACE zi e re e Eo e REPLACE ALL 2o END pen 14 MM Search foruerd END CANCEL DIAGNOSIS 2j E D CURRENT REPLACE paste nea WORD FIND REPLACE ALL END CANCEL FIELD FIEL Programming Fundamentals File Management Find Replace any text The find replace function is not possible if a program is protected the program is currently being run by the TNC When using the REPLACE ALL function ensure that you do not accidentally replace text that you do not want to change Once replaced such text cannot be restored If required select th
50. ENT key to call the information on the coe a a2 z BACK FORWARD PAGE PAGE DIRECTORY WINDOW selected keyword lt gt I a z WE ca eae You can enter the search word only with a keyboard using uds l Setting datum points using holes cylindrical stud indrical stud connected via USB Full text search In the Find tab you can search the entire TNCguide for a specific word The left side is active Select the Find tab Activate the Find input field Enter the desired word and confirm with the ENT key the TNC lists all sources containing the word Use the arrow key to highlight the desired source Press the ENT key to go to the selected source You can enter the search word only with a keyboard connected via USB The full text search only works for single words If you activate the Search only in titles function by mouse or by using the cursor and the space key the TNC searches only through headings and ignores the body text HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 127 4 7 Context Sensi vous System elp System 2 O eb ad x vb ad Q Q N a Downloading current help files You ll find the help files for your TNC software on the HEIDENHAIN home page www heidenhain de under Services and Documentation Software TNC 620 help system NC software number of your TNC for example 34056x 02 Select the desired language for example English You will se
51. EXECUTE am Program a Select command EXECUTE SQL BIND Bind a Q parameter to a table column BIND SOL FETCH rs Read table rows from the result set and save them In Q FETCH parameters SQL UPDATE a Save data from the O parameters in an existing table UPDATE row in the result set SQL INSERT Save data from the Q parameters in a new table row in INSERT the result set SOL COMMIT Transfer table rows from the result set into the table COMMIT and conclude the transaction SQL ROLLBACK If INDEX is not programmed Discard any changes insertions and conclude the transaction If INDEX is programmed The indexed row remains in the result set All other rows are deleted from the result set The transaction is not concluded SAL ROLLBACK EA a ee ee HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 8 8 Accessing T with SQL Commands f il T L e Q O V gt T 8 8 Accessing SQL BIND SQL BIND binds a Q parameter to a table column The SQL commands Fetch Update and Insert evaluate this binding assignment during data transfer between the result set and the NC program An SQL BIND command without a table or column name cancels the binding Binding remains effective at most until the end of the NC program or subprogram write processes only take into account the columns that were entered in the Select command SQL BIND must be programmed before Fetch Update or Insert comm
52. Ee Export local Q parameters or OS EXPORT parameters into a calling program 208 Programming Q Parameters il D14 ERROR Displaying error messages With the function D14 you can call messages under program control The messages are predefined by the machine tool builder or by HEIDENHAIN Whenever the TNC comes to a block with D14 in the Program Run or Test Run mode it interrupts the program run and displays a message The program must then be restarted The error numbers are listed in the table below m Additional Functions 0 299 FN 14 Error code 0 299 300 999 Machine dependent dialog 1000 1099 Internal error messages see table at right Example NC block The TNC is to display the text stored under error number 254 Error message predefined by HEIDENHAIN 1000 Spindle 1001 Tool axis is missing 1002 Tool radius too small 1003 Tool radius too large 1004 Range exceeded 1005 Start position incorrect 1006 ROTATION not permitted 1007 SCALING FACTOR not permitted 1008 MIRROR IMAGE not permitted 1009 Datum shift not permitted 1010 Feed rate is missing 1011 Inout value Incorrect 1012 Incorrect sign 1013 Entered angle not permitted 1014 Touch point inaccessible 1015 Too many points HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 i il EE Additional Functions 1016 1017 1018 1019 1020 1021 1022 1023 1024 1025 1026 1027 1028 1029 1030 1031 1032 1033 1034 1035 1036 1037 1038 1039 1040 1041
53. G71 N10 G30 G17 X Y 0 Z 25 MODE N20 G31 X 150 Y 100 Z 0 comment N30 T5 G17 S2500 e N40 GOO Z 100 G40 G90 M3 N50 X 30 30 N60 Z 5 mone N7 G 1 X 15 Y 15 G41 F350 a N8 G1 Y 85 N90 G25 R5 Standard x The TNC features an integrated pocket calculator with the basic mathematical functions S Oo Pw amp 2 Q Use the CALC key to show and hide the on line pocket calculator The calculator is operated with short commands through the Q alohabetic keyboard The commands are shown in a special color in B e cea taeee 3 the calculator window Nise Gee 21208 640 Mae alts Par 2002k CSET UP CLEARt _arc sin cos Tan Beal Mathematical function Command key st LEE 2 Addition woe N9899999999 x333 G71 i Subtraction MMM D Multiplication Division lt Parenthetic calculations Arc cosine ARC Sine SIN Cosine COS Tangent TAN Powers of values KAY Square root SORT Inversion 1 x pi 3 14159265359 P Add value to buffer memory M Save the value to buffer MS memory Recall from buffer memory MR Delete buffer memory contents MC Natural logarithm LN Logarithm LOG Exponential function e x Check the algebraic sign SGN Form the absolute value ABS 114 Programming Programming Aids Truncate decimal places INT Truncate integers FRAC Modulus operator MOD Select view View Delete value GE Unit of measure
54. GO7 lengthening G44 Paraxial compensation for GO7 shortening Blank form definition for graphics G30 G17 G18 G19 min point G31 G90 G91 max point Cycles for drilling tapping and thread milling G240 Centering G200 Drilling G201 Reaming G202 Boring G203 Universal drilling G204 Back boring G205 Universal pecking G206 Tapping with a floating tap holder G207 Rigid tapping G208 Bore milling G209 Tapping with chip breaking G241 Single lip deep hole drilling Cycles for drilling tapping and thread milling G262 Thread milling G263 Thread milling countersinking G264 Thread drilling milling G265 Helical thread drilling milling G267 External thread milling Cycles for milling pockets studs and slots G251 Rectangular pocket complete G252 Circular pocket complete G253 Slot complete G254 Circular slot complete G256 Rectangular stud G257 Circular stud Cycles for creating point patterns G220 Circular point pattern G77 Point patterns on lines SL cycles group 2 G37 Contour geometry list of subcontour program numbers G120 Contour data applies to G121 to G124 G121 Pilot drilling G122 Rough out G123 Floor finishing G124 Side finishing G125 Contour train machining open contour G127 Cylinder surface G128 Cylindrical surface slot Coordinate transformation G53 Datum shift in datum table G54 Datum shift in program G28 Mirror image G73 Rotation of the coordinate system G72 Scali
55. MM or INCH Display mode for angle values DEG degree or RAD radian measure Display mode of the numerical DEC decimal or HEX value hexadecimal To transfer the calculated value into the program Use the arrow keys to select the word into which the calculated value is to be transferred Superimpose the on line calculator by pressing the CALC key and perform the desired calculation Press the actual position capture key for the TNC to superimpose a soft key row Press the CALC soft key for the TNC to transfer the value into the active input box and to close the calculator HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 4 4 Integrated s sloulator j il 4 5 Programming Graphics Generating Not generating graphics during programming Graphics 3803 1 1I While you are writing the part program you can have the TNC generate a 2 D pencil trace graphic of the programmed contour To switch the screen layout to displaying program blocks to the left and graphics to the right press the SPLIT SCREEN key and PROGRAM GRAPHICS soft key Set the AUTO DRAW soft key to ON While you are entering the program lines the TNC generates each path contour you program in the graphics window in the right screen half N99999999 x38031 G71 If you do not wish to have the TNC generate graphics during programming set the AUTO DRAW soft key to OFF Even when AUTO DRAW ON is active graphics are not generated for program section repeats 2j
56. POCKET MILLING 2 the Test Run mode Siok DEF 4 2 DEPO no 4 X 30 Further information on this topic Operating modes of the TNC See Operating Modes on page 60 Testing programs See Test Run on page 367 1 4 Graphically Testing the First E Select the tool table for the test run 3s orasnoszs 29 L X 10 Y e You only need to execute this step is you have not activated a tool wa s table in the Test Run mode Ai Press the PGM MGT key the TNC displays the file cci management Press the SELECT TYPE soft key The TNC shows a TYPE soft key menu for selection of the file type to be displayed Press the SHOW ALL soft key The TNC shows all saved files in the right window uw ae oO D r r Move the highlight to the left onto the directories Move the highlight to the TNC directory Move the highlight to the right onto the files Move the highlight to the file TOOL T active tool table and load with the ENT key TOOL T receives that status S and is therefore active for the Test Run Press the END key Leave the file manager Sage Further information on this topic Tool management See Entering tool data in the table on page 134 Testing programs See Test Run on page 367 HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 45 il 1 4 Graphically Testing the First _ tag Choose the program you want to test Press the PGM MGT key the TNC displays the file Mar management Press
57. Plunging type is not possible Plunge angle incorrectly defined Angular length is undefined Slot width is too large Scaling factors not equal Tool data inconsistent D18 Read system data With the function D18 you can read system data and store them in Q parameters You select the system data through a group name ID number and additionally through a number and an index if required Program information 10 3 103 Q parameter number System jump addresses 13 1 2 3 2 Machine status 20 HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 Number of the active fixed cycle Relevant within NC cycles for inquiry as to whether the Q parameter given under IDX was explicitly stated in the associated CYCLE DEF Label jumped to during M2 M30 instead of ending the current program Value 0 M2 M30 has the normal effect Label jumped to if FN14 ERROR after the NC CANCEL reaction instead of aborting the program with an error The error number programmed in the FN14 command can be read under ID992 NR14 Value 0 FN14 has the normal effect Label jumped to in the event of an internal server error SOL PLC CFG instead of aborting the program with an error Value 0 Server error has the normal effect Active tool number Prepared tool number Active tool axis O xX 1 Y 2 Z 6 U 7 V 8 W m Additional Functions i il N Additional Functions Channel data 25 Cycle parameter 30 Modal condition 35 Data for SOL tables 40 2
58. Q parameter SQL FETCH takes into account all columns entered in the Select O command 12 SQL BIND Q882 TAB_EXAMPLE MEAS X gt Parameter no for result O parameterinwhichthe 28 SQL BIND Q883 TAB EXAMPLE MEAS NT SOL server reports the result 14 SQL BIND Q884 TAB_EXAMPLE MEAS Z g 0 No error occurred V 1 Error occurred incorrect handle or index too large E en A lt gt Data bank SQL access 1D Q parameter with the ee eee be handle for identifying the result set also see SQL z SELECT D f gt Data bank Index for SQL result Row number GO SQL FETCH Qi HANDLE SNE within the result set The table entries of this row are read and are transferred into the bound Q Example Row number is programmed directly parameters If you do not enter an index the first row is read n 0 Either enter the row number directly or program the Q parameter containing the index 8 8 Accessing 230 Programming Q Parameters il SOL UPDATE SQL UPDATE transfers the data prepared in the Q parameters into the row of the result set addressed with INDEX The existing row in the result set is completely overwritten SQL UPDATE takes into account all columns entered in the Select command a Parameter no for result O parameter in which the SOL server reports the result 0 No error occurred 1 Error occurred incorrect handle index too large value outside of value range or incorrect data format Data ba
59. RS 232 C V 24 interface for HEIDENHAIN devices 410 Non HEIDENHAIN devices 411 Ethernet interface RJ45 socket 411 16 3 Technical Information 412 16 4 Exchanging the Buffer Battery 419 32 1 1 Overview This chapter is intended to help TNC beginners quickly learn to handle the most important procedures For more information on a respective topic see the section referred to in the text The following topics are included in this chapter Machine Switch On Programming the First Part Graphically Testing the Program Setting Up Tools Workpiece Setup Running the First Program 34 First Steps with the TNC 620 il 1 2 Machine Switch On Acknowledge the power interruption and move to the reference points Switch on the power supply for control and machine The TNC starts the operating system This process may take several minutes Then the TNC will display the message Power interruption Press the CE key The TNC converts the PLC program The TNC is now ready for operation in the Manual Operation mode Switch on and crossing the reference points can vary depending on the machine tool Your machine manual provides more detailed information Switch on the control voltage The TNC checks operation of the emergency stop circuit and goes into the reference run mode Cross the reference points manually in the displayed sequence For each axis press the machine START b
60. ST eT e SSeS 2 Active coordinate transformations status status a status starus or a OVERVIEW POS STATUS eS Q PARAM Active subprogram Active program section repeat Program called with PGM CALL Current machining time Name of the active main program General program information PGM tab STAT h No direct Name of the active main program a ae ee overview Pen Lal cve m Pos e gt Ful Active PGM STAT selection 19 veh oer 11 Some a possible 22 aL LBL 15 REPS Y maaa 2500 5 00 00 33 23 PLANE RESET STAY TN 24 LBL Oo isll Circle center CC pole AS EEN cae ae Current time 12 44 23 _ A poses eaea l Seppe ne S Prog Cast STATIH Dwell time counter pon a PGM 4 XYZ PGM 5 a f S IST 12 44 Machining time when the program was See a ee simulated in the Test Run operating EZY V TAFE F 9 754 Mode C 000 S 94 680 a ser sues Ar A A actL M ok rT 3 26 o F mm min Our 57 8 M 5 COT Current machining time in percent a L SS STATUS STATUS TOOL STATUS STATUS OF gt OVERVIEW PoS STATUS rene Q PARAM TRANSF Current time i a a E ee ee EEEE ee Active programs 66 Introduction Program section repeat Subprograms LBL tab DSSS sani feo run tar sequence N gt amp STAT h No direct Acti
61. The TNC saves the ball tip center misalignment in the touch probe table in the CAL_OF1 principal axis and CAL_OF2 minor axis columns You can display the values on the screen by pressing the TOUCH PROBE TABLE soft key 336 File tne tableNtchprobe tp Line Ino TYPE CAL_OF 1 CAL_OF2 CAL_ANG F 0 0 0 Table editing Programming Selection of the touch probe E ND Manual Operation and Setup il 12 7 Compensating Workpiece Misalignment with 3 D Touch Probe Introduction The TNC electronically compensates workpiece misalignment by computing a basic rotation For this purpose the TNC sets the rotation angle to the desired angle with respect to the reference axis in the working plane See figure at right The TNC saves the basic rotation depending on the tool axis in the columns SPA SPB or SPC of the preset table Select the probe direction perpendicular to the angle reference axis when measuring workpiece misalignment To ensure that the basic rotation is calculated correctly during program run program both coordinates of the working plane in the first positioning block You can also use a basic rotation in conjunction with the PLANE function In this case first activate the basic rotation and then the PLANE function Measuring the basic rotation Select the probe function by pressing the PROBING ROT soft key Position the touch probe at a position near the first touch point Selec
62. The positions are entered correctly if only one operating mode is set to inactive The jog increment can be defined separately for linear and rotary axes Basic transformation translation and rotation of machine table system to workpiece system via the columns X Y and Z as well as spatial angles SPA SPB and SPC In addition the columns X_OFFS to W OFFS can be used to define the axis offset of each individual axis The function of the axis offsets can be configured Presetting In a rotary axis has the same effect as an axis offset The offset is also effective for kinematics calculations and for tilting the working plane The machine parameter CfgAxisPropKin gt presetToAl ignAxis is used to define whether the axis offset is to be taken into account internally after zero setting Independently of this an axis offset has always the following effects An axis offset always influences the nominal position display of the affected axis the axis offset is subtracted from the current axis value If a rotary axis coordinate is programmed in an L block then the axis offset is added to the programmed coordinate The programmed values are displayed in the 3 D ROT dialog even if the Tilt working plane function is set to inactive for both operating modes The jog increment applies for both linear and rotary axes Basic transformation translation of machine table system to workpiece system via the columns X
63. Time Enter the text with the screen keyboard caT o EET oc 2005 12 50 01 CYCLES 111 ABC H 04 2009 14 04 56 re 1a Ge ze0a 12 20 58 4 Press the GOTO key if you want to enter a text for example a ome ie Ba oe 20o 20 23 18 program name or directory name using the screen keyboard BO screens err a a B The TNC opens a window in which the numeric entry field of the od tapie a a 5 TNC is displayed with the corresponding letters assigned STA ae a na __ cancer You can move the cursor to the desired character by repeatedly u E pressing the respective key ok CANCEL Wait until the selected character is transferred to the entry field m before you enter the next character Io iei ta a uean Use the OK soft key to load the text into the open dialog field je P el Use the abc ABC soft key to select upper or lower case If your machine tool builder has defined additional special characters you can call them with the SPECIAL CHARACTER soft key and insert them To delete individual characters use the BACKSPACE soft key 110 Programming Programming Aids 4 2 Adding Comments Program run full sequence Function Programming 1GB H BEGIN PGM 1GB MM BEGIN PGM 168 HM BLK FORM 1 Z X 0 Z 40 Machine hole pattern ID 27943KL1 You can add comments to a part program to explain program steps or matte 2 BLK FORM 2 X 100 Y 100 Z 0 Parameter definition make general notes a TOOL CALL 12
64. all parameters for the plane definition you must specify how the rotary axes will be positioned to the calculated axis values The PLANE function is to automatically position the rotary axes to the calculated position values The position of the tool relative to the workpiece is to remain the same The TNC carries out a compensation movement in the linear axes The PLANE function is to automatically position the rotary axes to the calculated position values but only the rotary axes are positioned The TNC does not carry out a compensation movement in the linear axes You will position the rotary axes later in a separate positioning block If you have selected the MOVE PLANE function is to position the axes automatically the following two parameters must still be defined Dist tool tip center of rot and Feed rate F If you have selected the TURN option PLANE function is to position the axes automatically without any compensating movement the following parameter must still be defined Feed rate F F As an alternative to defining a feed rate F directly by numerical value you can also position with FMAX rapid traverse or FAUTO feed rate from the T block position the rotary axes in a separated block after the If you use PLANE AXIAL together with STAY you have to PLANE function 302 MOVE TURN Ap STAY Programming Multiple Axis Machining il gt Dist tool tip center of rot increment
65. and rigid tapping Roughing of rectangular and circular pockets Cycles for pecking reaming boring and counterboring Cycles for milling internal and external threads Finishing of rectangular and circular pockets Cycles for clearing level and inclined surfaces Cycles for milling linear and circular slots Linear and circular point patterns Contour parallel contour pocket Contour train OEM cycles special cycles developed by the machine tool builder can also be integrated Datum shift rotation mirroring Scaling factor axis specific Tilting the working plane software option Mathematical functions sin cos root calculation Logical comparisons lt gt Calculating with parentheses tan a arc sine arc cosine arc tangent a e In log absolute value of a number the constant m negation truncation of digits before or after the decimal point Functions for calculation of circles String parameters Online calculator Complete list of all current error messages Context sensitive help function for error messages Graphic support for the programming of cycles Comment blocks in the NC program Actual positions can be transferred directly into the NC program Graphic simulation before program run even while another program is being run Plan view projection in 3 planes 3 D view Magnification of details In the Programming mode the contour of the NC blocks is drawn on screen while they
66. at the programmed feed rate F in mm min Behavior with M136 In inch programs M136 is not permitted in combination with the new alternate feed rate FU The spindle is not permitted to be controlled when M136 is active With M136 the TNC does not move the tool in mm min but rather at the programmed feed rate F in millimeters per spindle revolution If you change the spindle speed by using the spindle override the TNC changes the feed rate accordingly Effect M136 becomes effective at the start of block You can cancel M136 by programming M137 Feed rate for circular arcs M109 M110 M111 Standard behavior The TNC applies the programmed feed rate to the path of the tool center Behavior at circular arcs with M109 The TNC adjusts the feed rate for circular arcs at inside and outside contours so that the feed rate at the tool cutting edge remains constant Behavior at circular arcs with M110 The TNC keeps the feed rate constant for circular arcs at inside contours only At outside contours the feed rate is not adjusted cycle with a number greater than 200 the adjusted feed rate is also effective for circular arcs within these machining cycles The initial state is restored after finishing or aborting a machining cycle If you define M109 or M110 before calling a machining Effect M109 and M110 become effective at the start of block To cancel M109 and M110 enter M111 HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 9 4 Miscellane
67. axis is the minor axis of the active machining plane Y for tool axis Z ROT angle of the tilted plane Rotation of the tilted coordinate system around the tilted tool axis corresponds to a rotation with Cycle 10 ROTATION The rotation angle is used to simply specify the direction of the principal axis of the machining plane X for tool axis Z Z for tool axis Y see figure at bottom right Inout range 360 to 360 Continue with the positioning properties see Specifying the positioning behavior of the PLANE function on page 302 Abbreviations used PROJECTED PROPR PROMIN PROROT Projected Principal plane Minor plane Rotation PROMIN we Programming Multiple Axis Machining il Defining the machining plane with Euler angles EULER PLANE Application Euler angles define a machining plane through up to three rotations about the respectively tilted coordinate system The Swiss mathematician Leonhard Euler defined these angles When applied to the machine coordinate system they have the following meanings Precession angle Rotation of the coordinate system around the Z EULPR axis Nutation angle Rotation of the coordinate system around the X EULNU axis already shifted by the precession angle Rotation angle Rotation of the tilted machining plane around the EULROT tilted Z axis Before programming note the following The sequence of the rotations described above is independent of the active to
68. basic rotation anda tilting angle of 0 then the TNC tilts the table to the angle defined in the basic rotation HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 COORD ROT 305 orking Plane Software Option 1 re Tilting 11 2 The PLANE Function a 11 3 Inclined Tool Machining a Tilted Plane Software Option 2 11 3 Inclined Tool Machining in a Tilted Plane Software Option 2 Function In combination with M128 and the new PLANE functions inclined tool machining in a tilted machining plane is now possible Two possibilities are available for definition E Inclined tool machining via incremental traverse of a rotary axis E nclined tool machining via normal vectors Inclined tool machining in a tilted machining plane only functions with spherical cutters Inclined tool machining via incremental traverse of a rotary axis Retract the tool Activate M128 Define any PLANE function consider the positioning behavior Via a straight line block traverse to the desired incline angle in the appropriate axis incrementally Example NC blocks Position at clearance height activate M128 Define and activate the PLANE function Set the incline angle Define machining in the tilted working plane 306 Programming Multiple Axis Machining il 11 4 Miscellaneous Functions for Rotary Axes Feed rate in mm min on rotary axes A B C M116 software option 1 Standard behavior The TNC interprets the pr
69. card NET123 Enable special functions for 555343 Q parameter programming HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 15 3 Entering Code Numbers j il 15 4 Setting the Data Interfaces 15 4 Setting the Data Interfaces Serial interfaces on the TNC 620 The TNC 620 automatically uses the LSV2 transmission protocol for serial data transfer The LSV2 protocol is permanent and cannot be changed except for setting the baud rate machine parameter baudRateLsv2 You can also specify another type of transmission interface The settings described below are therefore effective only for the respective newly defined interface Application To set up a data interface select the file management PGM MGT and press the MOD key Press the MOD key again and enter the code number 123 The TNC shows the user parameter GfgSerialInterface in which you can enter the following settings Setting the RS 232 interface Open the RS232 folder The TNC then displays the following settings Setting the baud rate baudRate You can set the BAUD RATE data transfer speed from 110 to 115 200 baud Set the protocol protocol The data communication protocol controls the data flow of a serial transmission comparable to MP5030 of the iITNC 530 Here the BLOCKWISE setting designates a form of data transfer where data is transmitted in blocks This is not to be confused with the blockwise data reception and simultaneous blockwise processing by older TNC contour
70. compensation e Working Plane Software Option 1 j de N q HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 347 il 12 9 ritin Working Plane Software Option 1 Traversing the reference points in tilted axes The TNC automatically activates the tilted working plane if this function was enabled when the control was switched off Then the TNC moves the axes in the tilted coordinate system when an axis direction key is pressed Position the tool in such a way that a collision is excluded during the subsequent crossing of the reference points To cross the reference points you have to deactivate the Tilt Working Plane function see Activating manual tilting page 349 Danger of collision Be sure that the function for tilting the working plane Is active in the Manual Operation mode and that the angle values entered in the menu match the actual angles of the tilted axis Deactivate the Tilt Working Plane function before you cross the reference points Take care that there is no collision Retract the tool from the current position first if necessary Position display in a tilted system The positions displayed in the status window ACTL and NOML are referenced to the tilted coordinate system Limitations on working with the tilting function The probing function for basic rotation is not available if you have activated the working plane function in the Manual Operation mode The actual position capture function is not allowed if th
71. contour point 1 Depart the contour on a circular arc with tangential connection Retract tool in the working plane cancel radius compensation Retract tool in the tool axis end of program 170 Programming Programming Contours il HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 Definition of workpiece blank Tool call Retract the tool Define the circle center Pre position the tool Move to working depth Approach starting point radius compensation G41 Tangential approach Move to the circle end point circle starting point Tangential exit Retract tool in the working plane cancel radius compensation Retract tool in the tool axis end of program 171 6 4 Path vontours caagsien Coordinates 6 5 Path Contours Polar Coordinates Overview With polar coordinates you can define a position in terms of its angle H and its distance R relative to a previously defined pole I J Polar coordinates are useful with Positions on circular arcs Workpiece drawing dimensions in degrees e g bolt hole circles N Pw O d o Q Q a ay Oo Overview of path functions with polar coordinates S function Path function key Tool movement Required input Page o Straight line G10 P Straight line Polar radius polar angle of Page 173 G11 the straight line end point c 8 Circular arc G12 P Circular path around circle Polar angle of the arc end Page 174 G13 center pole to arc end point point mn Circular arc G15 CR
72. cycles in datum tables the workpiece coordinate system If you want to save measured values in the machine based coordinate system REF coordinates press the ENTER IN PRESET TABLE soft key see Writing the measured values from touch probe cycles in the preset table on page 333 Use this function if you want to save measured values in With the ENTER INDATUM TABLE soft key the TNC can write the values measured during a touch probe cycle in a datum table Select any probe function Enter the desired coordinates of the datum in the appropriate input boxes depends on the touch probe cycle being run Enter the datum number in the Number in table input box Press the ENTER IN DATUM TABLE soft key The TNC saves the datum in the indicated datum table under the entered number 332 Manual Operation and Setup il Writing the measured values from touch probe cycles in the preset table the machine based coordinate system REF coordinates If you want to save measured values in the workpiece coordinate system press the ENTER IN DATUM TABLE soft key see Writing the measured values from touch probe cycles in datum tables on page 332 Use this function if you want to save measured values In With the ENTER IN PRESET TABLE soft key the TNC can write the values measured during a probe cycle in the preset table The measured values are then stored referenced to the machine based coordinate system REF coordinates The
73. data that you want to edit To leave the tool table press the END key Further information on this topic Operating modes of the TNC See Operating Modes on page 60 Working with the tool table See Entering tool data in the table on page 134 48 tne tableNtool t t t t t t t tttrtrrtrt tt tt t tttt t t SBSseseese se gsgsgsggssgss0gs0cs0g0gg0gsgsg First Steps with the TNC 620 The pocket table TOOL_P TCH Pocket table editing Tool number The function of the pocket table depends on the machine Ci Your machine manual provides more detailed information File tne table tool_p tch v WKZ 20 WKZ 30 In the pocket table TOOL_P TCH permanently saved under TNC TABLE you specify which tools your tool magazine contains To enter data in the pocket table TOOL_P TCH proceed as follows Too Display the tool table TH ae Display the pocket table Edit the pocket table Set the EDITING soft key to ON WKZ 1 PROBE PPPOOVOUDUNPS S9eSeseoesoeooeoogqa8 e UBUNRPS PR With the upward or downward arrow keys you can select the pocket number that you want to edit With the rightward or leftward arrow keys you can select the data that you want to edit To leave the pocket table press the END key Further information on this topic Operating modes of the TNC See Operating Modes on page 60 Working with the pocket table See Pocket tabl
74. define whether the uncompensated or compensated contour is to be combined With MP7420 you can define whether individual pockets are roughed out completely or on the same plane With MP7420 you can define whether the end position is above the last programmed position or whether the tool moves only to clearance height Circular arcs are generated between the starting point of the outermost path of the roughing tool and the center of the first contour element of the path of the finishing tool Max width of the arc tool moves backward on tangential arc from starting point of the path to shortly before next edge contour max arc height finishing allowance safety clearance SLII Cycles 20 to 24 Handling of coordinates and axis values outside the working plane Handling of islands which are not contained in pockets Set operations for SL cycles with complex contour formulas Radius compensation is active during CYCL CALL Paraxial positioning blocks in contour subprogram Miscellaneous functions M in contour subprogram Infeed movements in contour subprogram M110 feed rate reduction for inside corner SLII Contour Train Cycle 25 APPR DEP blocks in contour definition General cylinder surface machining Contour definition Offset definition on cylinder surface Offset definition for basic rotation Circle programming with C CC APPR DEP blocks in contour definition Cylinder surface machining with Cyc
75. define a blank form cancel the dialog key The TNC can display the graphics only if the shortest side is at least 50 um long and the longest side is no longer ela 2S SSS SSIS Aaa HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 3 2 Creating and Writing ee 3 2 Creating and Wri ng Mibarams Programming tool movements in DIN ISO Press the SPEC FCT key to program a block Press the PROGRAM FUNCTIONS soft key and then the DIN ISO soft key You can also use the gray contouring keys to get the corresponding G code If you enter DIN ISO functions via a connected USB keyboard make sure that capitalization is active Example of a positioning block 1 ES Start block ENT x 10 Enter the target coordinate for the X axis 20 Enter the target coordinate for the Y axis and go to the next question with ENT 40 Select tool movement without radius compensation Confirm with the ENT key or To move the tool to the left or to the right of the contour select function G41 to the left or G42 to the right by soft key Enter a feed rate of 100 mm min for this path contour go to the next question with ENT pa 00 m Z Enter the miscellaneous function M3 spindle ON Pressing the ENT key terminates this dialog 2S The program block window displays the following line 00 2 Programming Fundamentals File Management il Actual position capture The TNC enables you to transfer the current tool position into the pro
76. describes functions and features provided by TNCs as of the following NC software numbers TNC 620 340 560 02 TNC 620 E 340 561 02 TNC 620 Programming Station 340 564 02 The suffix E indicates the export version of the TNC The export version of the TNC has the following limitations Simultaneous linear movement in up to 4 axes The machine tool builder adapts the usable features of the TNC to his machine by setting machine parameters Some of the functions described in this manual may therefore not be among the features provided by the TNC on your machine tool TNC functions that may not be available on your machine include Tool measurement with the TT Please contact your machine tool builder to become familiar with the features of your machine Many machine manufacturers as well as HEIDENHAIN offer programming courses for the TNCs We recommend these courses as an effective way of improving your programming skill and sharing information and ideas with other TNC users User s Manual for Cycle Programming All of the cycle functions touch probe cycles and fixed cycles are described in a separate manual Please contact HEIDENHAIN if you require a copy of this User s Manual ID 679 295 xx Software options The TNC 620 features various software options that can be enabled by your machine tool builder Each option is to be enabled separately and contains the following respective functions TNC Model Software a
77. ee END message This information is only required if servicing is needed O BNS Open the error window ees Detailed information about the error message INFO Position the highlight on the error message and press the INTERNAL INFO soft key The TNC opens a window with internal information about the error To leave Details press the INTERNAL INFO soft key again HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 119 4 6 a messages Clearing errors Clearing errors outside of the error window To clear the error message in the header Press the CE button In some operating modes such as the Editing mode the CE button cannot be used to clear the error since the button is reserved for other functions Clearing more than one error Open the error window DELETE DELETE ALL Clear individual errors Position the highlight on the error message and press the DELETE soft key Clear all errors Press the DELETE ALL soft key If the cause of the error has not been removed the error message cannot be deleted In this case the error message remains in the window Error log The TNC stores errors and important events e g system startup in an error log The capacity of the error log is limited If the log is full the TNC uses a second file If this is also full the first error log is deleted and written to again and so on To view the error history switch between CURRENT FILE and PREVIOUS FILE Open the error wind
78. functions with mechanical probes or dial gauges 345 12 9 Tilting the Working Plane Software Option 1 346 Application function 346 Traversing the reference points in tilted axes 348 Position display in a tilted system 348 Limitations on working with the tilting function 348 Activating manual tilting 349 13 1 Programming and Executing Simple Machining Operations 352 Positioning with Manual Data Input MDI 352 Protecting and erasing programs in MDI 355 HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 29 il 30 14 1 Graphics 358 Application 358 Overview of display modes 359 Plan view 399 Projection in 3 planes 360 3 D view 361 Magnifying details 362 Repeating graphic simulation 363 Measuring the machining time 364 14 2 Show the Workpiece in the Working Space 365 Application 365 14 3 Functions for Program Display 366 Overview 366 14 4 Test Run 367 Application 367 14 5 Program Run 369 Application 369 Running a part program 370 Interrupting machining 371 Moving the machine axes during an interruption 372 Resuming program run after an interruption 3 3 Mid program startup block scan 374 Returning to the contour 3 6 14 6 Automatic Program Start 377 Application S77 14 7 Optional Block Skip 378 Application 378 Insert the character 378
79. key row See the table below for a description of the entry possibilities E T V z Select the line in the preset table that you want to change the line number is the preset number If needed select the column axis in the preset table wv that you want to change N q CORRECT Use the soft keys to select one of the available entry PRESET possibilities see the following table 326 Manual Operation and Setup il Directly transfer the actual position of the tool a the measuring dial as the new datum This i function only saves the datum in the axis which is currently highlighted Assign any value to the actual position of the tool ENTER the measuring dial This function only saves the PRESET datum in the axis which is currently highlighted Enter the desired value in the pop up window Incrementally shift a datum already stored in the CORRECT table This function only saves the datum in the PRESET axis which is currently highlighted Enter the desired corrective value with the correct sign in the pop up window If inch display is active enter the value in inches and the TNC will internally convert the entered values to mm thout a 3 D Touch Probe Directly enter the new datum without calculation EDIT of the kinematics axis specific Only use this FIELD function if your machine has a rotary table and you want to set the datum to the center of the rotary table by entering O
80. management The Tile management of the TNC is 16B H arranged much like the file management on a PC with TBa ne pros i See the Windows Explorer The file management enables aie Tost swe eee eek CAD t 24 06 2009 12 41 17 you to manipulate data on the TNC hard disk ate P LA te eo j l l Sz an t418 24 e6 2009 12 39 34 wD Use the arrow keys to select the folder in which you Retest KH 288 2204 2009 08 01 46 want to open the new file a ae St eeaeee 08 11 r e l l i HEBEL H 519 24 08 2008 09 29 04 5 Enter a file name with the extension I The TNC then ete STATH a72 22 05 209 13 35 20 STAT1 H 601 22 06 2009 13 38 34 tch h 1320 24 06 2009 12 27 53 DIAGNOSIS 15 file s 195 5 MB vacant 2j PAGE PAGE SELECT COPY SELECT WINDOW LAST N N FILES END t kaa G22 E ee automatically opens a program and asks for the unit of measure for the new program To select the unit of measure press the MM or INCH soft key The TNC automatically starts the workpiece blank definition see Define a workpiece blank on page38s The TNC automatically generates the first and last blocks of the program Afterwards you can no longer change these blocks Further information on this topic File management See Working with the File Manager on page 92 Creating a new program See Creating and Writing Programs on page 9 N t LL eb K re O S Oo k 0
81. milling Ruled surface HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 Option 08 Option 08 Option 08 Option 09 HSC MODE has no function X Option 19 Option 19 Option 19 Option 19 Option 19 X X Option 19 Option 19 Option 19 Option 19 Option 19 Option 19 Option 19 Option 19 Option 19 Option 19 Option 19 Option 19 X option 08 with MC 420 X option 08 with MC 420 X option 08 with MC 420 X X option 09 with MC 420 X option 08 with Functions of the TNC 620 and the iITNC 530 MC 420 Xx Xx Xx Xx Xx Xx xX X E G X 7 X p X Q 7 X QO Xx xX xX Xx Xx Xx Xx S il Functions of the TNC 620 and the ITNC 530 Comparison 232 240 241 247 251 252 253 254 256 257 262 263 264 265 267 270 440 Face milling Centering Single lio deep hole drilling Datum setting Rectangular pocket complete Circular pocket complete Slot complete Circular slot complete Rectangular stud complete Circular stud complete Thread milling Thread milling countersinking Thread drilling milling Helical thread drilling milling Outside thread milling Contour train data for defining the behavior of Cycle 25 Option 19 Option 19 Option 19 Option 19 Option 19 Option 19 Option 19 Option 19 Option 19 Option 19 Option 19 Option 19 Option 19 Option 19 Option 19 XI KX KL XI X X X X X X
82. power Is interrupted 246 Programming Q Parameters il Tool axis 0109 The value of Q109 depends on the current tool axis No tool axis defined Q109 1 X axis Q109 0 Y axis 0109 1 Z axis Q9109 2 U axis Q109 6 V axis Q109 7 W axis Q109 8 Spindle status Q110 The value of the parameter Q110 depends on the M function last programmed for the spindle No spindle status defined Q110 1 M3 Spindle ON clockwise Q110 0 M4 Spindle ON counterclockwise Q110 1 M5 after M3 Q110 2 M5 after M4 0110 3 Coolant on off Q111 M8 Coolant ON O111 1 M9 Coolant OFF Olt 0 Overlap factor Q112 The overlap factor for pocket milling pocketOverlap is assigned to Q112 HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 a idi Q Parameters C il ee Q Parameters Unit of measurement for dimensions in the program Q113 During nesting the PGM CALL the value of the parameter Q113 depends on the dimensional data of the program from which the other programs are called Metric system mm OT1s 0 Inch system inches 0113 1 Tool length Q114 The current value for the tool length is assigned to Q114 The TNC remembers the current tool length even if the power is interrupted Coordinates after probing during program run The parameters Q115 to Q119 contain the coordinates of the spindle position at the moment of contact during programmed measurement with the 3 D touch probe The coordinates refer to the datum point that is
83. reference point e g 0 Confirm with the ENT key The TNC concludes the dialog Example NC blocks Further information on this topic Defining the workpiece blank See page 80 First Steps with the TNC 620 il Program layout NC programs should be arranged consistently in a similar manner This makes it easier to find your place and reduces errors Recommended program layout for simple conventional contour machining 1 Call tool define tool axis 2 Retract the tool 3 Pre position the tool in the working plane near the contour starting point 4 Inthe tool axis position the tool above the workpiece or pre position immediately to workpiece depth If required switch on the spindle coolant 5 Move to the contour 6 Machine the contour 7 Leave the contour 8 Retract the tool end the program Further information on this topic Contour programming See Tool Movements on page 150 Recommended program layout for simple cycle programs ooh WN Call tool define tool axis Retract the tool Define the fixed cycle Move to the machining position Call the cycle switch on the spindle coolant Retract the tool end the program Further information on this topic E Cycle programming See User s Manual for Cycles HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 3 m m gt lt gt lt 3 3 ac TS D D p D amp s D 3 fe h O lt O 2 z O o z 3 z D F o gt O 8 5 3 8 3 D 5
84. soft key Restore machine status if required To move the axes in the sequence that the TNC suggests on the screen press the machine START button To move the axes in any sequence press the soft keys RESTORE X RESTORE Z etc and activate each axis with the machine START key To resume machining press the machine START key 14 5 Program Run 376 Mid program startup in se ce Pues Cenc oe si EEE 150 Sie 0 94 YON lt Eg 608 008 500 000 680 80 000 0x 57 S IST 12 44 F OVR x 33 63 1Y C 0 000 S tiz 94 actL H o kR T 3 z 5 a F 542 Z 680 mm min 9 999 Ouvr 57 8 M_5 END PGM mO EA 2 RESTORE MANUAL INTERNAL POSITION TRAVERSE STOP Test Run and Program Run il 14 6 Automatic Program Start a Application P f 1 l Programming The TNC must be specially prepared by the machine tool bee he oe ene eo ee ace gt F builder for use of the automatic program start function PE a T O 18 L IX 1 R FMAX MODE Refer to your machine manual E a T A RFNomL x 139 700 10 000 ad DEF 11 1 SCL 0 9995 z 7 500 A 22 CALL LBL 15 REPS is a TTE Sa TTT MODE 23 PLANE RESET SIou i 24 LBL B 0 0000 Caution Danger for the operator 25 END PGM STAT Current date a E BO 22 1000 1 AN Current time mA a ez q The autostart function must not be used on machines that o aa i do not have an enclos
85. structure window select the SECTS screen display PROGRAM SECTS To change the active window press the Change window soft key Inserting a structuring block in the left program window Select the block after which the structuring block is to be inserted Press the INSERT SECTION soft key or the key on SECTION the ASCII keyboard Enter the structuring text with the alphabetic keyboard If necessary change the structure depth with the soft key Selecting blocks in the program structure window If you are scrolling through the program structure window block by block the TNC at the same time automatically moves the corresponding NC blocks in the program window This way you can quickly skip large program sections HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 Program run full sequence VAN G71 Program WESC HH HK HH HK HE EE K K K K K K K N10 G30 G17 X 0 Y 0 Z 40 N20 G31 G90 X 100 Y 100 Z 0 Tool 1 Endmill ITLL gt 3 5 3 3 3 3 EE 5 EE EEE EE EEK Pocket left cket right S 1G HE EE EE EE EE KKK KKK K Po LCS 3 2 HE HE EE EE EEE EK EEE BM IK N16 Z 100 M2 N99999999 NEUGL G71 EIAKKKKKKKKEEKKEKEKKKKKEKK TOOl 1 Endmill 12mm H H HH KK RH HK COME OUT K K H K H A E K AE A K K AE A K K KEK K ot Ss oe a 113 4 3 Structuri Programs 4 4 Integrated Pocket Calculator Program run full sequence Programming Operation 333
86. the position to be approached e g 20 Confirm with the ENT key Confirm Radius comp RL RR no comp by pressing the ENT key Do not activate the radius compensation Contirm Miscellaneous function M with the END key The TNC saves the entered positioning block First Steps with the TNC 620 il 26 x 27 Move the tool to workpiece depth Press the orange Y axis key and enter the value for the position to be approached e g 5 Confirm with the ENT key Confirm Radius comp RL RR no comp by pressing the ENT key Do not activate the radius compensation Feed rate F Enter the positioning feed rate e g 3000 mm min and confirm with the ENT key Miscellaneous function M Switch on the spindle and coolant e g M13 Confirm with the END key The TNC saves the entered positioning block Move to the contour Define the rounding radius of the approaching arc Machine the contour and move to contour point 2 You only need to enter the information that changes In other words enter only the Y coordinate 95 and save your entry with the END key Move to contour point 3 Enter the X coordinate 95 and save your entry with the END key Define the chamfer at contour point 3 Enter the chamfer width 10 mm and save with the END key Move to contour point 4 Enter the Y coordinate 5 and save your entry with the END key Define the chamfer at contour point 4 Enter the chamfer width 20 mm and save with the EN
87. the LAST FILES soft key The TNC opens a pop up window with the most recently selected files Use the arrow keys to select the program that you want to test Load with the ENT key Further information on this topic Selecting a program See Working with the File Manager on page 92 Select the screen layout and the view Press the key for selecting the screen layout The TNC shows all available alternatives in the soft key row Press the PROGRAM GRAPHICS soft key In the GRAPHICS left half of the screen the TNC shows the program in the right half it shows the workpiece blank Select the desired view via soft key Plan view Projection in three planes 3 D view Further information on this topic Graphic functions See Graphics on page 358 Running a test run See Test Run on page 367 46 First Steps with the TNC 620 il Start the program test Press the RESET START soft key The TNC START simulates the active program up to a programmed break or to the program end While the simulation is running you can use the soft keys to change views Press the STOP soft key The TNC interrupts the test run STOP Press the START soft key The TNC resumes the test run after a break START il Further information on this topic Running a test run See Test Run on page 367 Graphic functions See Graphics on page 358 HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 1 4 Graphically Testing the First E 1 5 Tool Se
88. the connection is established automatically Use the PING function to test your network connection If you press the NETWORK INFO soft key the NETWORK TNC displays the current network settings INFO HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 Manual operation Programming EHS TNC N GO nc_prog HA 25x 25X TEST Auto_Tast CAD Man_Tast PLANE screens SHOW SLTEST test table HO tnceguide Mount Auto Mount point Mount device 1 i PC de01pc5323 transfer MOUNT UNMOUNT DEVICE DEVICE AUTO CONNECT 7 DISCONN NETWORK PING INFO DEFINE NETWORK CONNECTN EDIT NETWORK CONNECTN ie oe 107 th the nese ing wi 3 4 Work th the iManager ing wi 3 4 Work USB devices on the TNC FCL 2 function Backing up data from or loading onto the TNC is especially easy with USB devices The TNC supports the following USB block devices Floppy disk drives with FAT VFAT file system Memory sticks with the FAT VFAT file system Hard disks with the FAT VFAT file system CD ROM drives with the Joliet ISO 9660 Tile system The TNC automatically detects these types of USB devices when connected The TNC does not support USB devices with other file systems such as NTFS The TNC displays the USB TNC does not support device error message when such a device is connected device error message If you connect a USB hub In this The TNC also displays th
89. the contents of all existing chm files As an option your machine tool builder can embed O machine specific documentation in the TNCguide These documents then appear as a separate book in the main chm file HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 1 t Index Suchen gt Path Contours 4 b Contour Moveme gt Processing DX gt Programming Mi gt Programming Cy gt Programming Sp gt Programming S gt Programming Q gt MOD Functions gt Test Run and Pr gt Tables and Over b iTNC 530 with W gt Overview tables b Pilot smarT NC y Touch Probe Cycli gt Basics 3 gt Working With To f Touch probe cyc vy Introduction Selecting pr Recording me Writing the Writing the vy Calibrating a Introduction Calibrating Calibrating Displaying c Managing mor gt Compensating Setting the Dix I 2 BACK FORWARD PAGE PAGE aE TNCguide The following touch probe cycles are available in the manual modet Calibrate the effective length CAL L Calibrating the effective length uy Calibrate the effective radius PROBING Calibrating the effective radius and compensating I center misalignment Me bi rotat gal Set le center as dat Set ter 1 datu PROBING aim using two PROBING Measure a basic rotation holes cylindrical studs Set the datum using four holes cylindrical PROBING studs ig_2J Set a circle center using
90. the desired working plane independently of the rotary axes actually present on your machine The following possibilities are available SPATIAL Three space angles SPA SPATIAL Page 289 SPB and SPC ES PROJECTED Two projection angles PROJECTED Page 291 PROPR and PROMIN and a Was rotation angle ROT EULER Three Euler angles EULER Page 293 precession EULPR nutation EULNU and rotation EULROT VECTOR Norm vector for defining VECTOR Page 295 the plane and base vector a for defining the direction of the tilted X axis POINTS Coordinates of any three POINTS Page 297 points in the plane to be tilted RELATIVE Single incrementally REL _ SPA Page 299 effective spatial angle SA AXIAL Up to three absolute or Page 300 incremental axis angles A B C RESET Reset the PLANE function Page 288 Is HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 orking Plane Software Option 1 re Tilting 11 2 The PLANE Function j il L uodo a1eMOS uejd HUO Buji uon9uny INW1d YL Z LL Programming Multiple Axis Machining il 286 Define the PLANE function SPEC FCT TILT MACHINING PLANE Show the soft key row with special functions Select the PLANE function Press the TILT MACHINING PLANE soft key The TNC displays the available definition possibilities in the soft key row Selecting functions Select the desired function by soft key The TNC continues the dialog and requests the required parameters Position display
91. the tagged files into the target director 2 e py gg g y Additional marking functions see Tagging files page 102 If you have tagged files in both the left and right windows the TNC copies from the directory in which the highlight is located Copying a directory Move the highlight in the right window onto the directory you want to copy Press the COPY soft key the TNC opens the window for selecting the target directory Select the target directory and confirm with ENT or the OK soft key The TNC copies the selected directory and all its subdirectories to the selected target directory HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 th the AA iii ing wi 3 4 Work th the rila nager ing wi 3 4 Work Choosing one of the last files selected ay Call the file manager iene Last Display the last 10 files selected Press the LAST FILES soft key Use the arrow keys to move the highlight to the file you wish to select Moves the highlight up and down within a window To select the file press the OK soft key or Press the ENT key Deleting a file Once you delete files they cannot be undeleted Move the highlight to the file you want to delete DELETE To select the erasing function press the DELETE soft key The TNC inquires whether you really intend to delete the Tile To confirm press the OK soft key or To cancel deletion press the CANCEL soft key 100 full sequence Program run Programming
92. through QS10 for the text saved in parameter QS13 Begin the search at the third place HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 8 10 String Parameters i il m 8 10 String Parameters Finding the length of a string parameter The STRLEN function returns the length of the text saved in a selectable string parameter FORMULA STRLEN Select Q parameter functions Select the FORMULA function Enter the number of the Q parameter in which the TNC is to save the ascertained string length Confirm with the ENT key Shift the soft key row Select the function for finding the text length of a string parameter Enter the number of the OS parameter whose length the TNC is to ascertain and confirm with the ENT key Close the parenthetical expression with the ENT key and confirm your entry with the END key Example Find the length of QS15 244 Programming Q Parameters il Comparing alphabetic priority With the STRCOMP function you can compare string parameters for alphabetic priority FORMULA STRCOMP Select Q parameter functions Select the FORMULA function Enter the number of the Q parameter in which the TNC is to save the result of comparison Confirm with the ENT key Shift the soft key row Select the function for comparing string parameters Enter the number of the first OS parameter to be compared and confirm with the ENT key Enter the number of the second QS parameter to be compared and confirm with the ENT key
93. to continue the block scan After a block scan return the tool to the calculated position with RESTORE POSITION Tool length compensation does not take effect until after the tool call and a following positioning block This also applies if you have only changed the tool length The TNC skips all touch probe cycles in a mid program startup Result parameters that are written to from these cycles might therefore remain empty You may not use mid program startup if the following occurs after a tool change in the machining program The program is started in an FK sequence The stretch filter is active Pallet management is used The program is started in a threading cycle Cycles 17 18 19 206 207 and 209 or the subsequent program block Touch probe cycles 0 1 and 3 are used before program start Program run full sequence 333I A N10 G30 G17 X 0 Y 0 Z 25 N20 G31 X 150 100 Z 0 N30 T5 G17 53500 N40 GOO Z 100 G40 G90 M3 N50 X 30 N60 Z 5 eS a lt 2 phl CANCEL Xx 33 631 Y 72 542 Z 9 749 C 8 008 S 85 860 See N70 G 1 X 15 15 G41 F350 N1 G 1 X 85 Main program 333 I a N12 G01 Y 1E Program TNC nc_prog Cast 333 1I N14 G01 X 3 ACTL f1 eke Fr 3 2 6 a F Omm min Ovr 57 9 M 5 Test Run and Program Run il To go to the first block of the current program to start a block scan enter GOTO 0 BLOCK To select block scan press
94. tool radius compensation NC blocks with M91 Tool shape compensation Paraxial positioning blocks Mid program startup in a point table Empty CC block pole of last tool position is used in NC program Axis specitic scaling of RND block Reaction if a contour element with length O is defined before or after a RND or CHF block Circle programming with polar coordinates Roundings and chamfers between 5 axis movements 456 Block with RO DEP block END PGM No consideration of tool radius compensation Tool shape compensation is not supported because this type of programming Is considered to be axis value programming and the basic assumption is that axes do not form a Cartesian coordinate system Radius compensation as in L blocks The tool is positioned above the next position to be machined Last positioning block in the working plane must contain both coordinates of the working plane RND block is scaled the result is an ellipse Error message is issued The incremental rotation angle IPA and the direction of rotation DR must have the same sign Otherwise an error message will be issued Error message is issued Block with RO DEP block PGM CALL Programming of Cycle 10 ROTATION Program selection Consideration of tool radius compensation Tool shape compensation is supported The tool approaches from the current position of the previous block to the programmed coordinate value If the nex
95. tool table is active you can also simulate the machining operation with a spherical cutter For this purpose enter R2 R in the tool table The TNC will not show a graphic if the current program has no valid blank form definition no program is selected the advanced graphic features software option is not active The TNC graphic does not show a radius oversize DR that has been programmed in the T block A graphic simulation is only possible under certain conditions for program sections or programs in which rotary axis movements are defined The graphic may not be displayed correctly by the TNC 358 Test Run and Program Run il Overview of display modes 5 The TNC displays the following soft keys in the program run and Test E Run modes of operation with the Advanced graphic features software Q option Plan view S Lj S a Projection in three planes mi 3 D view Say Limitations during program run possible if the microprocessor of the TNC is already occupied with complicated machining tasks or if large areas are being machined Example Multipass milling over the entire blank form with a large tool The TNC interrupts the graphics and displays the text ERROR in the graphics window The machining process is continued however A graphical representation of a running program is not Plan view This is the fastest of the graphic display modes Press the soft key for plan view Regarding dept
96. uration of controlled opera g A a a ae put INtO service F mm min Our 57 8 M5 O7 S LSied2 Se 57 F OVR time displays The machine tool manual provides further A The machine tool builder can provide further operating information HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 sT 4 x qv E DIAGNOSIS a POSITION MACHINE oK CANCEL INPUT PGM TIME 6 3 399 15 8 Displaying Operating Times soul Huizes ado HbulAeldsig g SL MOD Functions il 400 ae 12 100 4 100 ZO 26 70 g 020 g 7016 g 16 55 9 020 g 200 130 97252 o 025 a5 g 030 g o15 55 g 020 9 7202 4130 g 250 g 0156 55 CYA 9 016 55 g2 9 200 430 are 016 55 g0 9 016 55 Q 72 9 222 130 B77 g 242 45 g 242 35 D g 042 100 g 040 35 Q Or T ables and Overviews 16 1 Machine Specific User Parameters 16 1 Machine Specific User Parameters Application To enable you to set machine specific functions your machine tool builder can define which machine parameters are available as user parameters Furthermore your machine tool builder can integrate additional machine parameters which are not described in the following into the TNC A Refer to your machine manual If you are in the configuration editor for the user parameters you can change the display of the existing parameters In the default setting the parameters are displayed with short explanatory texts To display the actual system names of the parame
97. which stores the current position of the stylus as an actual value HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 HEIDENHAIN 3 D Touch Probes and Electronic an 2 5 Accessories HEIDENHAIN 3 D Touch Probes and Electronic Hand cis 2 5 Accessories TT 140 tool touch probe for tool measurement The TT 140 is a triggering 3 D touch probe for tool measurement and inspection Your TNC provides three cycles for this touch probe with which you can measure the tool length and radius automatically either with the spindle rotating or stopped The TT 140 features a particularly rugged design and a high degree of protection which make it insensitive to coolants and swarf The triggering signal is generated by a wear resistant and highly reliable optical switch HR electronic handwheels Electronic handwheels facilitate moving the axis slides precisely by hand A wide range of traverses per handwheel revolution is available Apart from the HR 130 and HR 150 integral handwheels HEIDENHAIN also offers the HR 410 portable handwheel 72 Introduction il entals C LL E 3 1 Fundamentals Position encoders and reference marks The machine axes are equipped with position encoders that register the positions of the machine table or tool Linear axes are usually equipped with linear encoders rotary tables and tilting axes with angle encoders When a machine axis moves the corresponding position encoder generates a
98. you wish to use indexed tools such as stepped drills with more than one length compensation value your machine tool has an automatic tool changer you want to rough mill the contour with Cycle G122 see User s Manual for Cycle Programming ROUGH OUT you want to work with Cycles 251 to 254 see User s Manual for Cycle Programming Cycles 251 to 254 Tool table Standard tool data R2 DL DR DR2 LCUTS ANGLE TL RT TIME1 134 Number by which the tool is called in the program e g 5 indexed 5 2 Name by which the tool is called in the program no more than 16 characters all capitals no spaces Compensation value for tool length L Compensation value for the tool radius R Tool radius R2 for toroid cutters only for 3 D radius compensation or graphical representation of a machining operation with spherical or toroid cutters Delta value for tool length L Delta value for tool radius R Delta value for tool radius R2 Tooth length of the tool for Cycle 22 Maximum plunge angle of the tool for reciprocating plunge cut In Cycles 22 and 208 Set tool lock TL for Tool Locked Number of a replacement tool if available RT for Replacement Tool see also TIME2 Maximum tool life in minutes This function can vary depending on the Individual machine tool Your machine manual provides more information Tool name Tool length Tool radius R Tool radius R2 Tool length oversize Tool r
99. 0 Programming example 236 22 8 10 String Parameters 237 String processing functions 237 Assigning string parameters 238 Chain linking string parameters 239 Converting a numerical value to a string parameter 240 Copying a substring from a string parameter 241 Converting a string parameter to a numerical value 242 Checking a string parameter 243 Finding the length of a string parameter 244 Comparing alphabetic priority 245 8 11 Preassigned Q Parameters 246 Values from the PLC Q100 to Q107 246 Active tool radius Q108 246 Tool axis Q109 247 Spindle status Q110 247 Coolant on off Q111 247 Overlap factor Q112 247 Unit of measurement for dimensions in the program Q113 248 Tool length Q114 248 Coordinates after probing during program run 248 Deviation between actual value and nominal value during automatic tool measurement with the TT 130 Tilting the working plane with mathematical angles rotary axis coordinates calculated by the TNC 249 Measurement results from touch probe cycles see also User s Manual for Touch Probe Cycles 250 8 12 Programming Examples 252 HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 249 9 1 Entering Miscellaneous Functions M and STOP 260 Fundamentals 260 9 2 Miscellaneous Functions for Program Run Control Spindle and Coolant 261 Overview 261 9 3 Miscellane
100. 0 rom and a feed rate of 350 mm min The tool length is to be programmed with an oversize of 0 2 mm the tool radius 2 with an oversize of 0 05 mm and the tool radius with an undersize of 1 mm The character D preceding L and R designates a delta value Tool preselection with tool tables If you are working with tool tables use G51 to preselect the next tool Simply enter the tool number or a corresponding O parameter or type the tool name in quotation marks HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 on 5 2 Tool Data b il 5 3 Tolftompensation 5 3 Tool Compensation Introduction The TNC adjusts the spindle path in the spindle axis by the compensation value for the tool length In the working plane it compensates the tool radius If you are writing the part program directly on the TNC the tool radius compensation is effective only in the working plane The TNC accounts for the compensation value in up to five axes including the rotary axes surface normal vectors the TNC can perform three dimensional tool compensation see Three Dimensional Tool Compensation Software Option 2 page HIDDEN If a part program generated by a CAM system contains Tool length compensation Length compensation becomes effective automatically as soon as a tool is called and the spindle axis moves To cancel length compensation call a tool with the length L 0 Danger of collision If you cancel a positive length compensation with T 0 the distance be
101. 14 AJ W Programmed spindle speed Active spindle status 1 undefined 0 M3 active 1 M4 active 2 Mb after M3 3 Mb5 after M4 Gear range Coolant status O off 1 0n Active feed rate Index of prepared tool Index of active tool Channel number Set up clearance of active fixed cycle Drilling depth milling depth of active fixed cycle Plunging depth of active fixed cycle Feed rate for pecking in active fixed cycle 1st side length for rectangular pocket cycle 2nd side length for rectangular pocket cycle 1st side length for slot cycle 2nd side length for slot cycle Radius for circular pocket cycle Feed rate for milling in active fixed cycle Direction of rotation for active fixed cycle Dwell time for active fixed cycle Thread pitch for Cycles 17 18 Milling allowance for active fixed cycle Direction angle for rough out In active fixed cycle Probing angle Probing path Probing feed rate Dimensioning 0 absolute G90 1 incremental G91 Result code for the last SQL command Programming Q Parameters il Data from the tool table 50 Pocket table data 51 HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 or A O 19 20 Z 22 23 24 25 26 2I 28 Tool no Tool no Tool no Tool no Tool no Tool no Tool no Tool no Tool no Tool no Tool no Tool no Tool no Tool no Tool no Tool no Tool no Tool no Tool no Tool no Tool no Tool no Tool no Tool no Tool no Tool no Tool no Tool
102. 210 Contradictory input CYCL incomplete Plane wrongly defined Wrong axis programmed Wrong rom Radius comp undefined Rounding off undefined Rounding radius too large Program start undefined Excessive nesting Angle reference missing No fixed cycle defined Slot width too small Pocket too small Q202 not defined Q205 not defined Q218 must be greater than Q219 CYCL 210 not permitted CYCL 211 not permitted Q220 too large Q222 must be greater than Q223 Q244 must be greater than 0 Q245 must not equal Q246 Angle range must be lt 360 Q223 must be greater than Q222 Q214 0 not permitted Programming Q Parameters il 1042 1043 1044 1045 1046 1047 1048 1049 1050 1051 1052 1053 1054 1055 1056 1057 1058 1059 1060 1061 1062 1063 1064 1065 1066 1067 1068 1069 1070 Traverse direction not defined No datum table active Position error center in axis 1 Position error center in axis 2 Hole diameter too small Hole diameter too large Stud diameter too small Stud diameter too large Pocket too small rework axis 1 Pocket too small rework axis 2 Pocket too large scrap axis 1 Pocket too large scrap axis 2 Stud too small scrap axis 1 Stud too small scrap axis 2 Stud too large rework axis 1 Stud too large rework axis 2 TCHPROBE 425 length exceeds max TCHPROBE 425 length below min TCHPROBE 426 length exceeds max TCHPROBE 426 length below min TCHPROBE 430 diameter too large TCHPR
103. 423 424 425 426 427 430 431 440 441 450 451 452 480 481 482 483 484 446 Datum in one axis Measure angle Measure hole Measure circle outside Measure rectangle from inside Measure rectangle outside Measure inside width Measure ridge outside Boring Measure bolt hole circle Measure plane Measure axis shift Fast probing Save kinematics Measure kinematics Preset compensation Calibrate TT Measure Inspect the tool length Measure Inspect the tool radius Measure Inspect the tool length and the tool radius Calibrate infrared TT Option 17 Option 17 Option 17 Option 17 Option 17 Option 17 Option 17 Option 17 Option 17 Option 17 Option 17 Option 17 Option 17 Option 17 Option 17 X KX KL X X XIXI X X X X X X X X X XI X X X X Comparison Differences in programming Input of texts comments program names structure items network addresses etc Switching the operating mode while a block is being edited PGM CALL SEL TABLE SEL PATTERN SEL CONTOUR Selection of file in a pop up window File handling Save file function Save file as function Discard changes File management Mouse operation Sorting function Entry of name Support of short cuts Favorites management Configuration of column structure Soft key arrangement Skip block function Selecting a tool from the table Using the cursor in tables Programming special func
104. 50 i J Information on tools TOOL tab ox 5 157 12 44 Y 57 F OVUR qf ieee es Program run full sequence Programming Tool lengths and radii pepe ie eee RE roo e Oversizes delta values from the tool table TAB and 19 CYCL DEF 11 0 SCALING T a2 wz 3 E 2 CYCL DEF 11 1 SCL 0 9995 boc 50 tne TOOL CARE CM ae a E 23 PLANE RESET STAY R2 0 3000 fall 3 i 24 LBL Tool life maximum tool life TIME 1 and maximum 25 END PGM STATI MM ECC Ee E tool life for TOOL CALL TIME 2 SSE 0 00 0 00 0 00 Display of the active tool and the next replacement OE pte tool S IST 12 44 57 F OVR END PGM OFF x 33 7 47 Y 72 5 8 eZ 9 754 C 0 000 S 94 680 al a aciL fl ok tT 3 mm min Our 57 8 M5 STATUS STATUS TOOL STATUS STATUS OF COORD 3 xg OVERVIEW STATUS aoa Q PARAM HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 69 dp Tool measurement TT tab 3 x P s f 1 l Programming The TNC only displays the TT tab if the function is active ea ra Saas Ci on your machine 17 LBL 15 PGM LBL cyc M Pos TOOL TT o 18 L IX 1 R FMAX 19 CYCL DEF 11 SCALING Lae 3 WK2 3 m O 2 CYCL DEF 11 1 SCL 0 9995 boc BA con dp e FF RESET STAY O DYN fall ead Aaa No direct Number of the tool to be measured ad selection any V possible EPEE F Siecore 2 I Ee N Display whether the tool r
105. 7 73438 133 8237 5 76 18907 65 34493 133 5987 6 0 0 0 2 0 0 146 055 8 0 0 0 g 0 0 0 10 0 0 0 11 0 0 0 12 0 0 0 Text width 16 TNC table preset pr 07 S IST 12 38 57 F O0VR X 10 857 lY 108 452 Z C 0 009 S 85 860 TEENER ACTL 11 ek FT 3 2 Ss o F mm min Our 57 5 9M 5 BEGIN END PAGE PAGE CHANGE EEEREN f 4 t l PRESET OFFSET z 2 ACTIVATE PRESET END Manual Operation and Setup There are several methods for saving datums and or basic rotations in the preset table E Through probing cycles in the Manual Operation or Electronic Handwheel modes see Chapter 14 Through the probing cycles 400 to 402 and 410 to 419 in automatic mode see User s Manual Cycles Chapters 14 and 15 Manual entry see description below HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 thout a 3 D Touch Probe ing wi E T V 12 4 S i Manually saving the datums in the preset table 7 In order to set datums in the preset table proceed as follows Som 0 Select the Manual Operation mode lt W 2 x Y Move the tool slowly until it touches scratches the A workpiece surface or position the measuring dial correspondingly ap Displaying the preset table The TNC opens the gt preset table and sets the cursor to the active table O row aan S feg Select functions for entering the presets The TNC O ba displays the available possibilities for entry in the soft
106. 9 97 14 51 30 x Verbindung Protokoll Check whether the TNC is connected to the correct serial port on your PC or to the network EA 200 H 1596 06 04 99 15 39 42 RT 201 H 1004 06 04 99 15 39 44 Em Once you have started TNCremoNT you will see a list of all files that on a EAMES Bauckate to Detect are stored in the active directory in the upper section of the main OnE a ead a window 1 Using the menu items lt File gt and lt Change directory gt you A212 Se 06 04 99 15 38 40 ol DNC Verbindung aktiv can change the active directory or select another directory on your PC If you want to control data transfer from the PC establish the connection with your PC in the following manner Select lt File gt lt Setup connection gt TNCremoNT now receives the file and directory structure from the TNC and displays this at the bottom left of the main window 2 To transfer a file from the TNC to the PC select the file in the TNC window with a mouse click and drag and drop the highlighted file into the PC window 1 To transfer a file from the PC to the TNC select the file in the PC window with a mouse click and drag and drop the highlighted file into the TNC window 2 15 4 Setting the Data Interfaces If you want to control data transfer from the TNC establish the connection with your PC in the following manner Select lt Extras gt lt TNCserver gt TNCremoNT is now in server mode It can receive d
107. AIN TNC 620 th 3 D Touch Probe ing wi i Datum Sett il th 3 D Touch Probe ing wi i Datum Sett Measuring Workpieces with a 3 D Touch Probe You can also use the touch probe in the Manual Operation and El Handwheel operating modes to make simple measurements on the workpiece Numerous programmable probe cycles are available for complex measuring tasks see User s Manual Cycles Chapter 16 Checking workpieces automatically With a 3 D touch probe you can determine position coordinates and from them dimensions and angles on the workpiece To find the coordinate of a position on an aligned workpiece Select the probe function by pressing the PROBING 25 POS soft key Move the touch probe to a position near the touch point Select the probe direction and axis of the coordinate Use the corresponding soft keys for selection To probe the workpiece press the machine START button The TNC shows the coordinates of the touch point as reference point Finding the coordinates of a corner in the working plane Find the coordinates of the corner point See Corner as datum on page 340 The TNC displays the coordinates of the probed corner as reference point 342 Manual Operation and Setup il Measuring workpiece dimensions Select the probe function by pressing the PROBING 25 POS soft key Position the touch probe at a position near the first touch point A Select the probing direction by so
108. ART SINGLE TI a z DIAGNOSIS K RESET START 3 D view The workpiece is displayed in three dimensions You can rotate the 3 D display about the vertical and horizontal axes The shape of the workpiece blank can be depicted by a frame overlay at the beginning of the graphic simulation The shape of the workpiece blank can be depicted by a frame overlay at the beginning of the graphic simulation 14 1 Graphics In the Test Run mode of operation you can isolate details for magnification see Magnitying details page 362 Press the soft key for 3 D view Rotating and magnifying reducing the 3 D view Shift the soft key row until the soft key for the rotating and magnification reduction appears Select functions for rotating and magnitying reducing Rotate in 15 steps about the vertical axis a S Rotate in 15 steps about the horizontal axis om HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 361 il 14 1 Graphics Magnifying details You can magnify details in all display modes in the Test Run mode and a Program Run mode The graphic simulation or the program run respectively must first have been stopped A detail magnification is always effective in all display modes Changing the detail magnification The soft keys are listed in the table Interrupt the graphic simulation if necessary Shift the soft key row in the Test Run mode or in a Program Run mode respectively un
109. Block or the Full Sequence mode Press the operating mode key The TNC goes into the N7 Get x 15 v 15 641 Fass Program Run Single Block mode and the TNC executes the program block by block You have to confirm each block with the NC key N140 G01 X 30 Y 30 G40 0 S IST 12 40 58 F OUR S x 33 631 Y 72 542 Z 9 749 C 0 000 S 85 860 Press the operating mode key The TNC goes into the Program Run Full Sequence mode and the TNC executes the program after NC start up to a program break or to the end of the program AcTL 11 oke r 3 z 5 o F mm min Our 58 1 M 5 Further information on this topic Operating modes of the TNC See Operating Modes on page 60 Running programs See Program Run on page 369 1 7 Running the First Program Choose the program you want to run Press the PGM MGT key the TNC displays the file el management Last Press the LAST FILES soft key The TNC opens a pop Se up window with the most recently selected files If desired use the arrow keys to select the program that you want to run Load with the ENT key Further information on this topic File management See Working with the File Manager on page 92 Start the program Press the NC start button The TNC executes the G active program Further information on this topic Running programs See Program Run on page 369 HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 53 il i S41 94 Huluuny z L
110. C registers an error during program run it automatically interrupts the machining process Programmed interruptions You can program interruptions directly in the part program The TNC interrupts the program run at a block containing one of the following entries 14 5 Program Run G38 with and without miscellaneous function Miscellaneous functions MO M2 or M30 Miscellaneous function M6 defined by the machine tool builder Interruption through the machine STOP button Press the machine STOP button The block that the TNC is currently executing Is not completed The NC stop signal in the status display blinks see table If you do not wish to continue the machining process you can reset the TNC with the INTERNAL STOP soft key The NC stop signal in the status display goes out In this case the program must be restarted from the program beginning aa Program run stopped icine B Interrupting the machining process by switching to the Program Run Single Block mode of operation You can interrupt a program that is being run in the Program Run Full Sequence mode of operation by switching to the Program Run Single Block mode The TNC interrupts the machining process at the end of the current block HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 371 il 14 5 Program Run Moving the machine axes during an interruption You can move the machine axes during an Interruption in the same way as in the Manual Operation mode Application example Retra
111. Cartesian Coordinates 159 Overview of path functions 159 Programming path functions 160 Straight line at rapid traverse GOO Straight line with feed rate G01 F 160 Inserting a chamfer between two straight lines 161 Corner rounding G25 162 Circle center J 163 Circular path C around circle center CC 164 Circular path GO2 G03 G05 with defined radius 165 Circular path GO6 with tangential connection 167 6 5 Path Contours Polar Coordinates 172 Overview 172 Zero point for polar coordinates pole J 173 Straight line at rapid traverse G10 Straight line with feed rate G11 F 173 Circular path G12 G13 G15 around pole J 174 Circular path G16 with tangential connection 175 Helical interpolation 176 20 7 1 Labeling Subprograms and Program Section Repeats 182 Labels 182 7 2 Subprograms 183 Operating sequence 183 Programming notes 183 Programming a Subprogram 183 Calling a subprogram 183 7 3 Program Section Repeats 184 Label G98 184 Operating sequence 184 Programming notes 184 Programming a program section repeat 184 Calling a program section repeat 184 7 4 Separate Program as Subprogram 185 Operating sequence 185 Programming notes 185 Calling any program as a subprogram 186 7 5 Nesting 187 Types of nesting 187 Ne
112. D key Move to contour point 1 Enter the X coordinate 5 and save your entry with the END key Depart the contour Define the rounding radius of the departing arc Retract the tool Press the orange axis key Z in order to get clear in the tool axis and enter the value for the position to be approached e g 250 Confirm with the ENT key Confirm Radius comp RL RR no comp by pressing the ENT key Do not activate the radius compensation Confirm Miscellaneous function M Enter M2 to end the program and confirm with the END key The TNC saves the entered positioning block HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 1 3 Programming the First T 1 3 Programming the First Further information on this topic 42 Complete example with NC blocks See Example Linear movements and chamfers with Cartesian coordinates on page 168 Creating a new program See Creating and Writing Programs on page 9 Approaching departing contours See Contour Approach and Departure on page 155 Programming contours See Overview of path functions on page 159 Tool radius compensation See Tool radius compensation on page 145 Miscellaneous functions M See Miscellaneous Functions for Program Run Control Spindle and Coolant on page 261 First Steps with the TNC 620 il Create a cycle program The holes depth of 20 mm shown in the figure at right are to be drilled with a standard drilling cycle You have already defined the work
113. Definition of traverse range limits Restricting external access Switching the kinematics X X KKK KK RK 436 oe Calling fixed cycles LO With M99 or M89 X xX Q With CYCL CALL X X With CYCL CALL PAT X X n m With CYC CALL POS X K Special functions sa Creating backward programs X Datum shift with TRANS DATUM X Adaptive Feed Control AFC X option 45 Global definition of cycle parameters GLOBAL DEF X gt Pattern definition with PATTERN DEF X X Definition and execution of point tables X X a Simple contour formula CONTOUR DEF X X Functions for large molds and dies 2 Global program settings GS X option 44 Expanded M128 FUNCTION TCPM 7 X Status displays i Positions spindle speed feed rate X X O Larger depiction of position display Manual Operation X pe Additional status display form view X X z Display of handwheel traverse when machining with handwheel X gt superimposition LL Display of distance to go in a tilted system X Dynamic display of O parameter contents definable number X ranges N OEM specific additional status display via Python X Graphic display of residual run time X O Individual color settings of user interface X E Q HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 437 il Functions of the TNC 620 and the ITNC 530 Comparison Comparison Cycles 1 Pecking 2 Tapping 3 Slot milling 4 Pocket milling 5 Circular p
114. E Application Projection angles define a machining plane through the entry of two angles that you determine by projecting the first coordinate plane Z X plane with tool axis Z and the second coordinate plane Y Z with tool axis Z onto the machining plane to be defined Before programming note the following You can only use projection angles if the angle definitions are given with respect to a rectangular cuboid Otherwise distortions could occur on the workpiece Parameter description for the positioning behavior See Specifying the positioning behavior of the PLANE function on page 302 HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 PROMIN orking Plane Software Option 1 re Tilting 11 2 The PLANE Function i il orking Plane Software Option 1 re Tilting 11 2 The PLANE Function Input parameters PROJECTED NC block Proj angle 1st coordinate plane Projected angle of the tilted machining plane in the 1st coordinate plane of the fixed machine coordinate system Z X for tool axis Z see figure at top right Input range from 89 9999 to 89 9999 The 0 axis is the principal axis of the active machining plane X for tool axis Z See figure at top right for positive direction Proj angle 2nd coordinate plane Projected angle in the 2nd coordinate plane of the fixed machine coordinate system Y Z for tool axis Z see figure at top right Inout range from 89 9999 to 89 9999 The 0
115. E2 Current tool age CUR TIME PLC status Maximum tooth length LCUTS Maximum plunge angle ANGLE TT Number of teeth CUT TT Wear tolerance in length LTOL Programming Q Parameters il 17 18 z 19 20 21 22 23 24 27 32 34 Touch probe cycles 990 1 Execution status 992 10 14 16 D19 PLC Transfer values to the PLC The function D19 transfers up to two numerical values or Q parameters to the PLC Increments and units 0 1 um or 0 0001 Example Transfer the numerical value 10 which means 1 um or 0 001 to the PLC HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 TT Wear tolerance in radius RTOL TT Direction of rotation DIRECT 0 positive 1 negative TT Offset in plane R OFFS TT Offset in length L OFFS TT Break tolerance for length LBREAK TT Break tolerance in radius RBREAK PLC value Tool type TYPE 0 milling cutter 21 touch probe Corresponding row in the touch probe table Point angle Lift off Approach behavior 0 standard behavior effective radius set up clearance is zero _ probe monitoring off 0 1 probe monitoring on Block scan active 1 yes 0 no Search phase Number of the last FN14 error Real execution active 1 execution 2 simulation i Additional Functions i il N O Q O Y gt T 8 8 Accessing 8 8 Accessing Tables with SQL Commands Introduction Accessing of tables is programme
116. EL SELECTION soft key appears Move the highlight to the last first block of the program section you wish to copy or delete The TNC shows the marked blocks in a different color You can end the marking function at any time by pressing the CANCEL SELECTION soft key To copy the selected program section press the COPY BLOCK soft key To delete the selected section press the DELETE BLOCK soft key The TNC stores the selected block Using the arrow keys select the block after which you wish to insert the copied deleted program section corresponding program using the file manager and then mark the block after which you wish to insert the copied block O O J Sem Q N ap p To insert the section into another program select the To insert the block press the INSERT BLOCK soft key To end the marking function press the CANCEL SELECTION soft key Function Sf Key Switch marking function on ew Switch marking function off ES Delete marked block Es Insert block that is stored in the buffer memory Ped Copy marked block Fa HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 87 il 3 2 Creating and Writing Pe grams The TNC search function With the search function of the TNC you can search for any text within a program and replace it by a new text if required Searching for texts If required select the block containing the word you wish to find X 40 FIND FIND ih
117. Erase the character 378 14 8 Optional Program Run Interruption 379 Application 379 15 1 Selecting MOD Functions 382 Selecting the MOD functions 382 Changing the settings 382 Exiting the MOD functions 382 Overview of MOD functions 383 15 2 Software Numbers 384 Function 384 15 3 Entering Code Numbers 385 Application 385 15 4 Setting the Data Interfaces 386 Serial interfaces on the TNC 620 386 Application 386 Setting the RS 232 interface 386 Setting the baud rate baudRate 386 Set the protocol protocol 386 Set the data bits dataBits 387 Parity check parity 387 Setting the stop bits StopBits 387 Setting the handshake flowControl 387 Settings for data transfer with the TNCserver PC software 388 Setting the operating mode of the external device fileSystem 388 Software for data transfer 389 15 5 Ethernet Interface 391 Introduction 391 Connection possibilities 391 Connecting the control to the network 391 15 6 Position Display Types 397 Application 397 15 7 Unit of Measurement 398 Application 398 15 8 Displaying Operating Times 399 Application 399 HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 31 il 16 1 Machine Specitic User Parameters 402 Application 402 16 2 Pin Layouts and Connecting Cables for the Data Interfaces 410
118. Examples D c j i Examples D z 92 Set label for program section repeat Infeed depth in incremental values in space First contour point Contour approach Contour departure Retract tool Return jump to label 1 section is repeated a total of 4 times Retract in the tool axis end program Programming Subprograms and Program Section Repeats il Examples Program sequence E Approach the groups of holes in the main program E Call the group of holes Subprogram 1 E Program the group of holes only once in subprogram 1 D c 7 6 Tool call Retract the tool Cycle definition drilling HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 193 il Move to starting point for group 1 Call the subprogram for the group Move to starting point for group 2 Call the subprogram for the group Examples Move to starting point for group 3 Call the subprogram for the group End of main program D z Beginning of subprogram 1 Group of holes Call cycle for 1st hole Move to 2nd hole call cycle Move to 3rd hole call cycle Move to 4th hole call cycle End of subprogram 1 94 Programming Subprograms and Program Section Repeats il Examples Program sequence E Program the fixed cycles in the main program E Call the entire hole pattern subprogram 1 E Approach the groups of holes in subprogram 1 ca
119. External data transfer 105 File Creating 97 File name 91 File selection 95 File type 90 File renaming 103 Overview of functions 93 Protecting a file 104 Renaming a file 103 Tagging Tiles 102 File status 94 FN14 ERROR Displaying error messages 209 FN19 PLC Transfer values to the PLG oa 22l Full circle 164 Fundamentals 74 G Graphic simulation 363 Graphics Display modes 359 During programming 116 Detail enlargement 117 Magnification of details 362 S i Index H Hard disk 90 Helical interpolation 176 Helix 176 Help files downloading 128 Help system 123 Help with error messages 118 I Inclined tool machining in a tilted plane 306 Indexed tools 138 Information on formats 418 Interrupt machining 371 ITNC 530 56 K Keyboard 59 L Local Q parameters defining 200 Look ahead 270 M M functions See Miscellaneous functions M91 M92 262 Machine axes moving the 317 In increments 318 With the electronic handwheel 319 With the machine axis direction buttons 317 Machine parameters For 3 D touch probes 404 Machining time measuring the 364 Mid program startup 374 After power failure 374 Miscellaneous Functions for Rotary Axes 307 Miscellaneous functions Entering 260 For contouring behavior 265 For
120. FINE after entry of the MOD code number NET123 CONNEGTN Opens the dialog window for editing the data of an EDIT existing network connection Selectable only after EN eb Q jm hom vb ad 4 eb eb Z ad LLI L LO q entry of the MOD code number NET123 Configures the network address of the control SE Selectable only after entry of the MOD code number NET123 Deletes an existing network connection Selectable DELETE only after entry of the MOD code number NET123 eu 392 MOD Functions il Configuring the control s network address Connect the TNC port X26 with a network or a PC Manual operation Programm i n g Pat h In the file manager PGM MGT select the Network soft key ee ERA aan Gen ane i Press the MOD key Then enter the keyword NET123 oe z Dea p g Press the CONFIGURE NETWORK soft key to enter the network setting cast 5 a for a specific device see figure at center right Pecan D a ice m It opens the dialog window for the network configuration PLANE DHCP po a rab SHOW a ELL BEE 1501 247 208 4 t R Subnet mask z5s5 255 0 fo e Setting Meaning ee o D ere Router aah b HOSTNAME Name under which the control logs onto the CANCEL K network If you use a host name server you tu must enter the Fully Qualified Hostname pracnosrs here If you do not enter a name here the E b Te control uses the so called null aut
121. Function orking Plane Software Option 1 re Tilting 11 2 The PLANE Function Reset the PLANE function SPEC FCT SPECIAL 4 EF i to FUNCTIONS TILT MACHINING PLANE RESET MOVE y amp 288 Show the soft key row with special functions Select special TNC functions Press the SPECIAL TNC FUNCTIONS soft key Select the PLANE function Press the TILT MACHINING PLANE soft key The TNC displays the available definition possibilities in the soft key row Select the Reset function This internally resets the PLANE function but does not change the current axis positions Specify whether the TNC should automatically move the rotary axes to the default setting MOVE or TURN or not STAY see Automatic positioning MOVE TURN STAY entry is mandatory on page 302 To terminate entry press the END key The PLANE RESET function resets the current PLANE ftunction or an active GB0 completely angles 0 and function is inactive It does not need to be defined more than once Example NC block Programming Multiple Axis Machining il Defining the machining plane with space angles PLANE SPATIAL Function Spatial angles define a machining plane through up to three rotations around the fixed machine coordinate system The sequence of rotations is firmly specified first around the A axis then B and then C the function corresponds to Cycle 19 if the entries in Cycle 19 are set to spac
122. H Angular position of the arc end point Example NC blocks olar Coordinates The pole is not the center of the contour arc 6 5 Path Contours HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 175 il N Pw O d o Q Q a AY O 6 5 Path Contour Helical interpolation A helix is a combination of a circular movement in a main plane and a linear movement perpendicular to this plane You program the circular path in a main plane A helix is programmed only in polar coordinates Application Large diameter internal and external threads Lubrication grooves Calculating the helix To program a helix you must enter the total angle through which the tool is to move on the helix in incremental dimensions and the total height of the helix For calculating a helix that is to be cut In an upward direction you need the following data Thread revolutions n Thread revolutions thread overrun at thread beginning and end Total height h Thread pitch P times thread revolutions n Incremental total Number of revolutions times 360 angle for angle H beginning of thread angle for thread overrun Starting coordinate Z Pitch P times thread revolutions thread overrun at start of thread Shape of the helix The table below illustrates in which way the shape of the helix is determined by the work direction direction of rotation and radius compensation Right handed Z G13 G41 Left handed Z G12 G42 Right handed Z G12 G42
123. HAIN TNC 620 Retract in the tool axis end program Subprogram 10 Machining operation Shift datum to center of ellipse Account for rotational position in the plane Calculate angle increment Copy starting angle Set counter Calculate X coordinate for starting point Calculate Y coordinate for starting point Move to starting point in the plane Pre position in spindle axis to set up clearance Move to working depth Update the angle Update the counter Calculate the current X coordinate Calculate the current Y coordinate Move to next point Unfinished If not finished return to label 1 Reset the rotation Reset the datum shift Move to set up clearance End of subprogram Programming Examples j i Examples ing 2 Programm N Program sequence E This program functions only with a spherical cutter The tool length refers to the sphere center The contour of the cylinder is approximated by many short line segments defined in Q13 The more line segments you define the smoother the curve becomes E The cylinder is milled in longitudinal cuts here parallel to the Y axis E The machining direction can be altered by changing the entries for the starting and end angles in space Clockwise machining direction starting angle gt end angle Counterclockwise machining direction starting angle lt end angle E The tool radius is compensated automatically Center in X axis
124. HAIN TNC 620 X XJ X X XI XJ X X X gt X lt Functions of the TNC 620 and the ITNC 530 Comparison o il Functions of the TNC 620 and the ITNC 530 Comparison M109 M110 M111 M112 M113 M114 M115 M116 M117 M118 M120 M124 M126 M127 M128 M129 M130 M134 M135 M136 M137 M138 M140 M141 M142 M143 442 Constant contouring speed at tool cutting edge increase and decrease feed rate Constant contouring speed at tool cutting edge feed rate decrease only Reset M109 M110 Enter contour transition between two contour elements Reset M112 Automatic compensation of machine geometry when working with tilted axes Reset M114 Feed rate for rotary tables in mm min Reset M116 Superimpose handwheel positioning during program run Pre calculate radius compensated contour LOOK AHEAD Contour filter Shortest path traverse of rotary axes Reset M126 Retain the position of the tool tip when positioning the tilted axes TCPM Reset M126 Within the positioning block Points are referenced to the untilted coordinate system Exact stop at nontangential contour transitions when positioning with rotary axes Reset M134 Feed rate F in millimeters per spindle revolution Reset M136 Selection of tilted axes Retraction from the contour in the tool axis direction Suppress touch probe monitoring Delete modal program information Delete basic rotation Option 08 Option 21 Opt
125. J LL 2 O lt gt A Traverse range 230 2 3 5 Nominal position in the REF 1 system 240 Current position in the active 1 coordinate system 270 218 Oo o1 AJ W BR W O AJ W to 9 to 9 X axis Y axis Z axis A axis B axis C axis U axis V axis W axis Negative software limit switch in axes 1 to 9 Positive software limit switch in axes 1 to 9 Software limit switch on or off O on 1 off X axis Y axis Z axis A axis B axis C axis U axis V axis W axis X axis Y axis Z axis A axis B axis C axis U axis Programming Q Parameters il TS triggering touch probe 350 TT tool touch probe HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 7 70 71 72 75 76 77 78 V axis W axis Touch probe type Line in the touch probe table Effective length Effective ball radius Rounding radius Center offset reference axis Center offset minor axis Spindle orientation angle in degrees center offset Rapid traverse Measuring feed rate Maximum measuring range Safety clearance Line in the touch probe table Touch probe type Line in the touch probe table Center point in reference axis REF system Center point in minor axis REF system Center point in tool axis REF system Probe contact radius Rapid traverse Measuring feed rate for stationary spindle Measuring feed rate for rotating spindl
126. Manual Data Input Test Run and Program Run MOD Functions Tables and Overviews vn m ww 13 1 1 Overview 34 1 2 Machine Switch On 35 Acknowledge the power interruption and move to the reference points 35 1 3 Programming the First Part 36 Select the correct operating mode 36 The most important TNC keys 36 Create a new program Tile management 37 Define a workpiece blank 38 Program layout 39 Program a simple contour 40 Create a cycle program 43 1 4 Graphically Testing the First Part 45 Select the correct operating mode 45 Select the tool table for the test run 45 Choose the program you want to test 46 Select the screen layout and the view 46 Start the program test 47 1 5 Tool Setup cc 48 Select the correct operating mode 48 Prepare and measure tools 48 The tool table TOOL T 48 The pocket table TOOL_P TCH 49 1 6 Workpiece Setup 50 Select the correct operating mode 50 Clamp the workpiece 50 Workpiece alignment with 3 D touch probe 51 Datum setting with 3 D touch probe 52 1 7 Running the First Program 53 Select the correct operating mode 53 Choose the program you want to run 53 Start the program 53 HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 2 1 The TNC 620 56 Programming HEIDENHAIN conversational and ISO formats 56 Compatibility 56 2 2 Visual Display Un
127. Msg aneous Functions for Rotary Axes To reduce display of the C axis only To reduce display of all active rotary axes and then move the tool in the C axis to the programmed value Effect M94 is effective only in the block in which it is programmed M94 becomes effective at the start of block Maintaining the position of the tool tip when positioning with tilted axes TCPM M128 software option 2 Standard behavior The TNC moves the tool to the positions given in the part program If the position of a tilted axis changes in the program the resulting offset in the linear axes must be calculated and traversed in a positioning block HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 j il 11 4 vidihlaneous Functions for Rotary Axes Behavior with M128 TCPM Tool Center Point Management The machine geometry must be specified by the machine Ci tool builder in the description of kinematics If the position of a controlled tilted axis changes in the program the position of the tool tip to the workpiece remains the same For tilted axes with Hirth coupling Do not change the position of the tilted axis until after retracting the tool Otherwise you might damage the contour when disengaging from the coupling After M128 you can program another feed rate at which the TNC will carry out the compensation movements in the linear axes If you do not enter a feed rate the TNC uses the maximum feed rate Before positioning with M91 or M92 and before a
128. NC 530 Comparison Comparison User functions Program entry HEIDENHAIN conversational DIN ISO With smarT NC With ASCII editor Position data Nominal positions for lines and arcs in Cartesian coordinates Nominal positions for lines and arcs in polar coordinates Incremental or absolute dimensions Display and entry in mm or inches Paraxial positioning blocks Set the last tool position as pole empty CC block Surface normal vectors LN Spline blocks SPL Tool compensation In the working plane and tool length Radius compensated contour look ahead for up to 99 blocks Three dimensional tool radius compensation Tool table Central storage of tool data Multiple tool tables with any number of tools Flexible management of tool types Filtered display of selectable tools Sorting function Column names Copy function Overwriting relevant tool data Form view Exchange of tool table between TNC 620 and iTNC 530 Touch probe table for managing different 3 D touch probes Creating tool usage file checking the availability Cutting data tables Automatic calculation of spindle speed and feed rate from saved technology tables Fr 432 eely definable tables TAB files X X soft keys X directly editable X X X X gt X lt X error message if pole transfer is ambiguous gt X lt X variable numbering X X X X Sometimes with _ Switchover with split screen layout key Not possible
129. NC 530 Comparison Programming aids Help graphics for cycle programming X can be switched oft X via config datum Animated help graphics when PLANE PATTERN DEF function is X selected Help graphics for PLANE PATTERN DEF X Context sensitive help function for error messages X X TNCguide Browser based help system X X Context sensitive call of help system X Calculator X scientific X standard Comment blocks in NC program X input via screen X input via ASCII keyboard keyboard Structure blocks in NC program X input via screen X input via ASCII keyboard keyboard Structure view in test run X Structure view for large programs X Dynamic Collision Monitoring DCM Collision monitoring in Automatic operation X option 40 Collision monitoring in Manual operation X option 40 Graphic depiction of the defined collision objects X option 40 Collision checking in the Test Run mode X option 40 Fixture monitoring X option 40 Tool carrier management X option 40 CAM support Loading of contours from DXF data X option 42 Loading of machining positions from DXF data X option 42 Offline filter for CAM files X Stretch filter X MOD functions User parameters Configuration data Numerical structure OEM help files with service functions Data medium inspection Loading of service packs Setting the system time Selection of axes for actual position capture
130. NHAIN TNC 620 HEIDENHAIN Manual operation 140 003 150 000 m E 360 000 s iF mm nin T 111 0 S IST 10 19 138 S OVR 2 2 Visual Display Unit and Keyjgara 2 3 Operating Modes Manual Operation and Electronic Handwheel Programming Manual operation The Manual Operation mode is required for setting up the machine tool In this mode of operation you can position the machine axes O 7 phar manually or by increments set the datums and tilt the working plane The Electronic Handwheel mode of operation allows you to move the 110 857 E i x RFNOML X 139 600 c 0 000 S b machine axes manually with the HR electronic handwheel Y 108 452 2 7 500 4 Soft keys for selecting the screen layout select as described 9 44 j _ r pt previously E 0 000 pL Pem DR PGM g S 85 860 PR j Window Soft ey s N 7 a z Positions ACTIL 1K T 3 2 6 o PGM CALL POSITION Sunin r EFEX HE Active PGM oz S 15 12 38 a a eee F 0VR Left positions right status display POSITION STATUS Ea Tar e a Positioning with Manual Data Input Positioning with manl data input Posemins mdi i i P Overview PGM LBL eve M Pos gt This mode of operation is used for programming simple traversing TEA RFNOML x 199 600 jc se eeo E pps y 150 8000 t 85 860 movements such as for face milling or pre positioning pp
131. OBE 430 diameter too small No measuring axis defined Tool breakage tolerance exceeded Enter Q247 unequal O Enter Q247 greater than 5 Datum table Enter Q351 unequal O Thread depth too large HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 m Additional Functions EE Additional Functions 1071 1072 1073 1074 1075 1076 1077 1078 1079 1080 1081 1082 1083 1084 1085 1086 1087 1088 1089 1090 1091 1092 1093 1094 1095 1096 1097 1098 1099 212 Missing calibration data Tolerance exceeded Block scan active ORIENTATION not permitted 3 D ROT not permitted Activate 3 D ROT Enter a negative value for the depth 0303 not defined in measuring cycle Tool axis not allowed Calculated values incorrect Contradictory measuring points Clearance height entered incorrectly Contradictory type of plunging Machining cycle not permitted Line is write protected Oversize greater than depth No point angle defined Contradictory data Slot position 0 not permitted Enter infeed unequal 0 Switchover of Q399 not allowed Tool not defined Tool number not permitted Tool name not allowed Software option not active Kinematics cannot be restored Function not permitted Contradictory workpc blank dim Measuring position not allowed Programming Q Parameters il 1100 1101 1102 1103 1104 1105 1106 1107 1108 1109 Kinematic access not possible Meas pos not in traverse range Preset compensation not possible Tool radius too large
132. PDATE is canceled The handle given in the SQL SELECT command loses its validity Parameter no for result O parameter in which the cg SOL server reports the result 0 No error occurred 1 Error occurred incorrect handle or equal entries In columns requiring unique entries Data bank SQL access ID O parameter with the handle for identifying the result set also see SQL SELECT SOL ROLLBACK The execution of SQL ROLLBACK depends on whether INDEX is programmed f INDEX is not programmed The result set is not written back to the table any changes insertions are discarded The transaction is closed and the handle given in the SQL SELECT command loses Its validity Typical application Ending a transaction solely containing read accesses f INDEX is programmed The indexed row remains All other rows are deleted from the result set The transaction is not concluded A lock set with SELECT FOR UPDATE remains for the indexed row For all other rows it Is reset gt Parameter no for result O parameter in which the TALIS SOL server reports the result 0 No error occurred 1 Error occurred incorrect handle Data bank SQL access ID O parameter with the handle for identifying the result set also see SQL SELECT Data bank Index for SQL result Row that is to remain in the result set Either enter the row number directly or program the O parameter containing the index 232 Example
133. SO FUNCTIONS functions Define string functions Define DIN ISO functions Adding comments 2380 STRING FUNCTIONS DIN ISO INSERT COMMENT Page 237 Page 281 Page 111 Program run full sequence 333 1 Programming 333 G71 N10 G30 G17 X 0 Y 0 2 25 N20 G31 X 150 Y 100 Z 0 7comment N30 TS G1 S3500 40 GOO Z 100 G40 G90 M3 N50 X 30 Y 30 N60 Zz 5 N70 G01 X 15 Y 15 G41 F350 N130 G01 X 15 N140 G01 X 30 Y 30 G40 N150 T3 G17 51500 N160 GOO Z 200 G40 M3 N15 G20 DRILLING Q200 2 SET UP CLEARANCE Q201 20 gt DEPTH Q206 150 FEED RATE FOR PLNGNG Q202 5 gt PLUNGING DEPTH Q210 0 DWELL TIME AT TOP Q203 8 SURFACE COORDINATE Q204 50 72ND SET UP CLEARANCE Q211 8 DWELL TIME AT DEPTH N16 GOO X 55 80 G40 M99 N15 G01 Z 100 G40 M30 N99999999 x333 G71 STRING pr FUNCTIONS Peere rre Programming Special Functions 10 2 Defining DIN ISO Functions Overview If a USB keyboard is connected you can also enter the DIN ISO functions by using the USB keyboard The TNC provides soft keys with the following functions for creating DIN ISO programs Select DIN ISO functions DIN ISO Feed rate Tool movements cycles and program functions X coordinate of the circle center pole Defining DIN ISO Functions Y coordinate of the circle center pole Label call for subprogram and program section
134. T block reset M128 To avoid contour gouging you must use only spherical cutters with M128 The tool length must refer to the spherical center of the tool tip If M128 is active the TNC shows the symbolTCPM in the status display M128 on tilting tables If you program a tilting table movement while M128 is active the TNC rotates the coordinate system accordingly If for example you rotate the C axis by 90 through a positioning command or datum shift and then program a movement in the X axis the TNC executes the movement in the machine axis Y The TNC also transforms the defined datum which has been shifted by the movement of the rotary table M128 with 3 D tool compensation If you carry out a 3 D tool compensation with active M128 and active radius compensation G41 G42 the TNC will automatically position the rotary axes for certain machine geometrical configurations 310 Programming Multiple Axis Machining il Effect M128 becomes effective at the start of block M129 at the end of block M128 is also effective in the manual operating modes and remains active even after a change of mode The feed rate for the compensation movement will be effective until you program a new feed rate or until you cancel M128 with M129 Enter M129 to cancel M128 The TNC also cancels M128 if you select a new program in a program run operating mode Example NC blocks Feed rate of 1000 mm min for compensation movements
135. TNC The error message is displayed in the header until it is cleared or replaced by a higher priority error An error message that contains a program block number was caused by an error in the indicated block or in the preceding block Open the error window Press the ERR key The TNC opens the error window Ea and displays all accumulated error messages Close the error window Press the END soft key or END EI Press the ERR key The TNC closes the error window 118 Programming Programming Aids il Detailed error messages The TNC displays possible causes of the error and suggestions for Programming solving the problem FK programming Illegal positioning block 402 0009 ERROR FK programming Illegal positioning block Open the error window Information on the error cause and corrective action INFO Position the highlight on the error message and press the MORE INFO soft key The TNC opens a window with information on the error cause and corrective N Q D 7 7 Q 1 Cause SA E et A en e Lu Leave Info Press the MORE INFO soft key again Bron eater lhe E on deletes tices postion ing blocks Geometry functions that are defined over the gray contouring keys and O moue Geese ae in the working plane are illegal exception RND gt CHF INTERNAL INFO soft key ___ g 2 The INTERNAL INFO soft key supplies information on the error MORE INTERNAL LoG more cymes vette
136. TO key enter the desired block number and confirm with the ENT key Or Enter any number and press the N LINES soft key to jump up or down the entered number of lines 84 Programming Fundamentals File Management il Set the selected word to zero Erase an incorrect number Clear a non blinking error message z Delete the selected word ma Delete the selected block Ti O m Erase cycles and program sections DEL 5 E Insert the block that you last edited or INSERT T d e eted NEER Som Q Inserting blocks at any desired location N Select the block after which you want to insert a new block and 0 initiate the dialog Editing and inserting words Select a word in a block and overwrite it with the new one The plain language dialog is available while the word Is highlighted To accept the change press the END key If you want to insert a word press the horizontal arrow key repeatedly until the desired dialog appears You can then enter the desired value HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 85 il 3 2 Creating and Writing Pe grams Looking for the same words in different blocks To use this function set the AUTO DRAW soft key to OFF To select a word in a block press the arrow keys repeatedly until the highlight is on the desired word Select a block with the arrow keys The word that is highlighted in the new block is the same as the one you selected previously TNC shows a progress disp
137. This function only saves the datum in the axis which is currently highlighted Enter the desired value in the pop up window If inch display is active enter the value in inches and the TNC will internally convert the entered values to mm ing wi E T Y Select the BASIC TRANSFORMATION AXIS OFFSET view The BASIC TRANSFORMATION view shows the X Y and Z columns Depending on the machine the SPA SPB and SPC columns are displayed additionally Here the TNC saves the basic rotation for the Z tool axis the TNC uses the SPC column The OFFSET view shows the offset values to the preset 12 4 Write the currently active datum to a selectable line in the table This function saves the datum in acl allaxes and then activates the appropriate row In the table automatically If inch display is active enter the value in inches and the TNC will internally convert the entered values to mm HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 327 il a Editing the preset table _Editing function in table mode Soft key hon m Select beginning of table ka c t Select end of table END O 4 j Sel in tabl elect previous page in table PAGE Q F yt Select next page in table PAGE J 5 Select the functions for preset entry lt lt PRESET gm Display Basic Transformation Axis Offset BASE S selection CRESTED O e Activate the datum of the selected line of the ACTIVATE E preset table PRESET Add the e
138. X X ASCII keys X X editable after conversion X X X X X X gt X lt X fixed numbering Sometimes with X Switchover by soft key Not possible Constant contouring speed Relative to the path of the tool center or relative to the tool s cutting edge Parallel operation Creating programs while another program is being run Programming of counter axes Tilting the working plane Cycle 19 PLANE function Machining with rotary tables Programming of cylindrical contours as if in two axes Cylinder Surface Cycle 27 Cylinder Surface Cycle 28 Cylinder Surface Ridge Cycle 29 Cylinder Surface External Contour Cycle 39 Feed rate in mm min or rev min Traverse in tool axis direction Manual operation 3 D ROT menu During program interruption With handwheel superimpositioning Approaching and departing the contour Via a straight line or arc Entry of feed rates F mm min rapid traverse FMAX FU feed per revolution mm rev FZ tooth feed rate FT time in seconds for path FMAXT only for active rapid traverse pot time in seconds for path FK free contour programming Programming for workpiece drawings not dimensioned for NC programming Conversion of FK program to conversational dialog Program jumps Maximum number of label numbers Subroutines Nesting depth for subprograms Program section repeats Any desired program as subroutine HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 X Option 08 X option 08
139. X X X X XJ X Comparison Miscellaneous functions M00 M01 M02 M03 M05 M06 M08 M09 M13 M14 M30 M89 M90 M91 M92 M94 M97 M98 M99 M101 M102 M103 M104 M105 M106 M107 M108 Stop program Spindle STOP Coolant OFF Optional program STOP STOP program run Spindle STOP Coolant OFF CLEAR status display depending on machine parameter Go to block 1 Spindle ON clockwise Spindle ON counterclockwise Spindle STOP Tool change STOP program run machine dependent function Spindle STOP Coolant ON Coolant OFF Spindle ON clockwise Coolant ON Spindle ON counterclockwise Coolant ON Same function as M02 Vacant miscellaneous function or Cycle call modally effective machine dependent function Constant contouring speed at corners Within the positioning block Coordinates are referenced to machine datum Within the positioning block Coordinates are referenced to position defined by machine tool builder such as tool change position Reduce the rotary axis display to a value below 360 Machine small contour steps Machine open contours completely Blockwise cycle call Automatic tool change with replacement tool if maximum tool life has expired Reset M101 Reduce feed rate during plunging to factor F percentage Reactivate the datum as last defined Machining with second k factor Machining with first k factor Suppress error message for replacement tools with oversize Reset M107 HEIDEN
140. X option 08 X option 08 X option 08 X X X X option 19 65535 20 X X option 08 with MC 420 X option 08 with MC 420 X option 08 with MC 420 X option 08 with MC 420 X option 08 with MC 420 X option 08 with MC 420 X FCL2 function X X option 44 Functions of the TNC 620 and the ITNC 530 X X X X X Comparison i il Functions of the TNC 620 and the ITNC 530 Comparison Q parameter programming Standard mathematical functions Formula entry String processing Local Q parameters QL Nonvolatile Q parameters QR Changing parameters during program interruption FN15 PRINT FN25 PRESET FN26 TABOPEN FN27 TABWRITE FN28 TABREAD FN29 PLC LIST FN31 RANGE SELECT FN32 PLC PRESET FN37 EXPORT FN38 SEND Saving file externally with FN16 FN16 formatting Left aligned right aligned string lengths FN16 Standard behavior while writing the file if not defined with APPEND or M CLOSE Writing to LOG file with FN16 Displaying parameter contents in the additional status display Displaying parameter contents during programming Q INFO SQL functions for writing and reading tables 434 x X X Each time F16 is called the protocol is overwritten X X X X KKK KKK KK X xX X X X X Each time F16 is called the data is appended to the existing file X Graphic support 2 D programming graphics Synchronization between block display and graphics REDRAW
141. XTAL Axis angle A Axis angle to which the A axis is to be moved If entered incrementally it is the angle by which the A axis is to be moved from Its current position Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Axis angle B Axis angle to which the B axis is to be moved If entered incrementally it is the angle by which the B axis is to be moved from its current position Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Axis angle C Axis angle to which the C axis is to be moved If entered incrementally it is the angle by which the C axis is to be moved from its current position Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Continue with the positioning properties see Specifying the positioning behavior of the PLANE function on page 302 Abbreviations used AXIAL In the axial direction Example NC block orking Plane Software Option 1 re Tilting 11 2 The PLANE Function HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 301 il orking Plane Software Option 1 re Tilting 11 2 The PLANE Function Specifying the positioning behavior of the PLANE function Overview Independently of which PLANE function you use to define the tilted machining plane the following functions are always available for the positioning behavior Automatic positioning Selection of alternate tilting possibilities Selection of the Type of Transformation Automatic positioning MOVE TURN STAY entry is mandatory After you have entered
142. Y and Z as well as a ROT basic rotation in the working plane rotation In addition the columns A to W can be used to define datums in the rotary and parallel axes Rotary axis offsets defined by machine parameters do not influence the axis positions that were defined in the Tilt working plane function MP7500 bit 3 defines whether the current rotary axis position referenced to the machine datum is taken into account or whether a position of 0 is assumed for the first rotary axis usually the C axis 451 Functions of the TNC 620 and the ITNC 530 Comparison Functions of the TNC 620 and the ITNC 530 Comparison Handling of preset table Editing the preset table in the Programming mode of operation Preset tables that depend on the range of traverse Entry of comment in DOC column Definition of feed rate limitation Possible Not available Via online keyboard Feed rate limitation can be defined separately for linear and rotary axes Comparison Differences in Manual Operation operation Character set for POSITION screen layout Capturing the position values from mechanical probes Exiting the touch probe functions menu Exiting the preset table Multiple editing of tool table TOOL T or pocket table tool_p tch 452 Small position display Actual position capture by soft key Only via the END soft key Only via the BACK END soft keys Soft key row that was last active before exiting is
143. a Make network connection HO CAD Cas Mount device de 1pc5323 transfer s HA CYCLES Sec Mount point PC 4 Fk m File system SMB gt HA FREE_cor 5 Man Tas 5 PLANE SMB option T ae screens IP 160 1 245 57 4 t mO SH SLTEST Username A13608 x test n O O a ea Workgroup JH tncguide Password KKK Further options sockopt SO_RCVTIMEO 18 sockopt SO_SNDTIMEO 10 Automatic connection NO z emes DIAGNOSIS 2 PASTE FIELD MOD Functions NFS option rsize Packet size in bytes for data reception wsize Packet size for data transmission In bytes timeO Time in tenths of a second after which the control repeats an unanswered Remote Procedure Call soft If YES is entered the Remote Procedure Call is repeated until the NFS server answers If NO is entered It is not repeated SMB option Options that concern the SMB file system type Options are given without space characters separated only by commas Pay attention to capitalization Options ip IP address of the Windows PC to which the control is to be connected username User name with which the control should log In workgroup VVorkgroup under which the control should log in password Password with which the control is to log on up to 80 characters Further SMB options Input of further options for the Windows network Automatic Automount YES or NO Here you specify connection whether the network will be automatically mounted when the control s
144. able Z 0 AL NEE 334 To select the calibration function for the touch probe length press the TOUCH PROBE and CAL L soft keys The TNC then displays a menu window with four input fields Enter the tool axis with the axis key Datum Enter the height of the ring gauge Effective ball radius and Effective length do not require input Move the touch probe to a position just above the ring gauge To change the traverse direction if necessary press a soft key or an arrow key To probe the upper surface of the ring gauge press the machine START button Manual Operation and Setup il Calibrating the effective radius and compensating center misalignment After the touch probe is inserted it normally needs to be aligned exactly with the spindle axis The calibration function determines the misalignment between touch probe axis and spindle axis and computes the compensation The calibration routine varies depending on the entry in the TRACK column of the touch probe table spindle orientation active inactive If the function for orienting the infrared touch probe to the programmed probe direction is active the calibration cycle is executed after you have pressed NC Start once If the function is not active you can decide whether you want to compensate the center misalignment by calibrating the effective radius The TNC rotates the 3 D touch probe by 180 for calibrating the center misalignment The rotation is in
145. ach Nize 61 iSe T block separately by pressing the machine START button N14 Ge1 x 30 V 30 Gos T R S IST 12 40 a Soft keys for selecting the screen layout sex F ovR ok 33 6315Y 72 542 2 CG Window Softy fc 0000 st 80 ap Program R ACTL WwW o e F mm min Our 58 1 M 5 N F 1 ry T BLOCK Left program right program structure PROGRAM SECTS Left program right status PROGRAM STATUS H Left program right graphics PROGRAM GRAPHICS Graphics GRAPHICS Soft keys for selecting the screen layout for pallet tables Pallet table mur Left program blocks right pallet table PROGRAM Left pallet table right status PALLET 62 Introduction 2 4 Status Displays full sequence Program run 333m mSSS Get N10 G30 G17 X 0 Z 25 N20 G31 X 150 Y 100 Z 0 N30 TS G1 53500 N40 GOO Z 100 G40 G90 M3 N50 X 30 Y 30 N60 Zz 5 N70 G01 X 15 Y 15 G41 F350 General status display The status display in the lower part of the screen informs you of the current state of the machine tool It is displayed automatically in the following modes of operation Program Run Single Block and Program Run Full Sequence except if the screen layout is set to display graphics only and Positioning with Manual Data Input MDI S IST 12 40 58 F OUR a XI 33 63 1Y 72 542Z 9 749 0 000 S 85 860 In the Manual mode and Electronic Handwheel mod
146. active Not possible Available Via ASCII keyboard Only one feed rate limitation can be defined for linear and rotary axes Large position display Actual position capture by hard key Via the END soft key or the END hard key Via the END hard key at any time Permanently defined soft key row soft key row 1 is displayed Comparison Differences in Program Run operation Arrangement of soft key rows and soft keys within the rows Character set for PROGRAM screen layout Editing of program after program run was interrupted by switching to the Single block mode of operation Operating mode switchover after program run was Interrupted by switching to the Single block mode of operation Operating mode switchover after program run was interrupted by switching to the Single block mode of operation and canceled by INTERNAL STOP on the TNC 620 GOTO is used to go to FK sequences after program run was Interrupted there before switching the operating mode Mid program startup Behavior after restoring the machine status Returning to the point of interruption with positioning logic Completing positioning for mid program startup Switching the screen layout for mid program startup HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 Arrangement of soft key rows and soft keys varies depending on the active screen layout Small character set The INTERNAL STOP soft key must also be pressed to cancel the program The INTERNAL STOP so
147. active in the Manual operating mode The length of the stylus and the radius of the ball tip are not compensated in these coordinates X axis Q115 Y axis Q116 Z axis Q117 4th axis Q118 Machine dependent 5th axis Q119 Machine dependent 248 Programming Q Parameters il Deviation between actual value and nominal value during automatic tool measurement with the TT 130 Tool length Q115 Tool radius Q116 Tilting the working plane with mathematical angles rotary axis coordinates calculated by the TNC A axis Q120 B axis Q121 C axis Q122 HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 aa idii Q Parameters i il nee Q Parameters Measurement results from touch probe cycles see also User s Manual for Touch Probe Cycles Angle of a straight line Center in reference axis Center in minor axis Diameter Pocket length Pocket width Length of the axis selected in the cycle Position of the centerline Angle of the A axis Angle of the B axis Coordinate of the axis selected in the cycle Center in reference axis Center in minor axis Diameter Pocket length Pocket width Measured length Position of the centerline Rotation about the A axis Rotation about the B axis Rotation about the C axis Q150 Q151 Q152 Q153 Q154 Q155 Q156 Q157 Q158 Q159 Q160 Q161 Q162 Q163 Q164 Q165 Q166 Q167 Q170 Q171 Q172 Programming Q Parameters il ai assigned Q Parameters Good Q180 Rework Q181 Scrap 0182 X axis Q185
148. adius or the tool length 33 747 Y 72 578 Z 9 754 is being measured E 000 S 94 680 g EAR A fo ma as n a a z ee actL H ok fT 3 Z 6 o F mm min Ouvr 57 8 M 5 MIN and MAX values of the individual cutting a a edges and the result of measuring the rotating E pal E A a a a tool DYN dynamic measurement Cutting edge number with the corresponding measured value If the measured value is followed by an asterisk the allowable tolerance in the tool table was exceeded Coordinate transformations TRANS tab STAT h STATUS Name of the active datum table 17 LAL 15 Le cve m Pos roo Tr Trans COORD 18 L IX 1 R FMAX TRANSF 19 CYCL DEF 11 0 SCALING Datum table TNC zeroshift d Ei 20 CYCL DEF 11 1 SCL 0 9995 1 DOC X 0 0000 EEE E eo p EE Active datum number comment from the 24 LaL z zegoe fl active line of the active datum number DOC from Tae ea ax v ee ae Cycle G53 A AE TE Active datum shift Cycle G54 The TNC displays Pars P a Ss an active datum shift in up to 8 axes AR r 33 747 Y 72 578 Z 9 754 Mirrored axes Cycle G28 c 10 000 S eo i actL H ok fT 3 z 5 o F mm min Our 57 8 M 5 OST Active basic rotation z r aaua STATUS STATUS TOOL ers STATUS OF gt Active rotation angle Cycle G73 SE a e a ae A
149. adius oversize Tool radius oversize R2 Tooth length in the tool axis Maximum plunge angle Tool locked Yes ENT No NO ENT Replacement tool Maximum tool age Programming Tools il TIME2 CUR TIME TYPE DOC PLC PTYP LIFTOFF TP_NO T_ANGLE Maximum tool life in minutes during TOOL CALL If the current tool age exceeds this value the TNC changes the tool during the next TOOL CALL see also CUR TIME Current age of the tool in minutes The TNC automatically counts the current tool life CUR_TIME A starting value can be entered for used tools Tool type Press the SELECT TYPE 8rd soft key row the TNC superimposes a window where you can select the type of tool you want You can assign tool types to specify the display filter settings such that only the selected type Is visible in the table Comment on tool up to 16 characters Information on this tool that is to be sent to the PLC Tool type for evaluation in the pocket table Definition of whether the TNC should retract the tool in the direction of the positive tool axis at an NC stop in order to avoid leaving dwell marks on the contour If is defined the TNC retracts the tool from the contour by 0 1 mm provided that this function was activated in the NC program with M148 see Automatically retract tool from the contour at an NC stop M148 on page 275 Reference to the number of the touch probe in the touch probe table Point angle of
150. al The TNC tilts the tool or table relative to the tool tip The DISTANCE parameter shifts the center of rotation of the positioning movement relative to the current position of the tool tip Note f the tool is already at the given distance to the workpiece before positioning then relatively speaking the tool is at the same position after positioning see figure at center right 1 SET UP If the tool is not at the given distance to the workpiece before positioning then relatively speaking the tool is offset from the original position after positioning see figure at bottom right 1 SET UP E gt Feed rate F Contour speed at which the tool should be positioned Positioning the rotary axes in a separate block Proceed as follows if you want to position the rotary axes in a separate positioning block option STAY selected Pre position the tool to a position where there is no danger of collision with the workpiece clamping devices during positioning gt Select any PLANE function and define automatic positioning with the STAY option During program execution the TNC calculates the position values of the rotary axes present on the machine and stores them in the system parameters Q120 A axis 0121 B axis and Q122 C axis gt Define the positioning block with the angular values calculated by the TNC NC example blocks Position a machine with a rotary table C and a tilting table A to a space angle of B
151. al NC block after the graphic was deleted by soft key True to scale display of grid Editing contour subprograms in SLII cycles with AUTO DRAW ON Moving the zoom window Programming minor axes Syntax FUNCTION PARAXCOMP Define the behavior of the display and the paths of traverse Syntax FUNCTION PARAXMODE Define the assignment of the parallel axes to be traversed HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 Call via ERR key Cause and corrective action cannot be displayed while highlight is on the block Help menu is closed when the operating mode is switched Help menu is closed when F12 Is used for switching Are collected in a list Every error message even if it is displayed more than once must be acknowledged the Delete all function is available Log and powerful filter functions errors keystrokes are available Available No service file is created when the system crashes Not available Not available Not available Works with max 9999 blocks can be set via config datum Not possible after pressing CLEAR GRAPHIC soft key all previously defined NC blocks are displayed Available If error messages occur the cursor is on the CYCL CALL block in the main program Repeat function not available Available Available Call via HELP key Pop up window shows cause and corrective action Operating mode switchover is not allowed key is non functional Help menu remains open when F12 is used for switching Are
152. amming and Editing mode of i For seo 92 OR eo operation a The TNC opens a pop up window in which you can enter the desired range for display of the Q parameters or string parameters 20 L X 0 Y 0 27 L Z 100 R FMAX M3 a 28 CYCL DEF 200 DRILLING DAK Q200 2 3SET UP CLEARANCE Q201 20 DEPTH Q206 150 FEED RATE FOR PLNGNG CEET M 2 copy PASTE oK CANCEL FIELD FIELD In the Program Run Single Block Program Run Full Sequence and Test Run modes of operation select the screen layout Program Status STATUS OF Select the STATUS OF Q PARAM soft key o Select the Q PARAMETER LIST soft key The TNC opens a pop up window in which you can enter the desired range for display of the Q parameters or string parameters a With the Q PARAMETER REQUEST soft key available REQUEST only in Manual Operation Program Run Full Sequence and Program Run Single Block you can request individual Q parameters To assign a new value overwrite the displayed value and confirm with OK HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 207 8 6 Checking a i Q Parameters EE Additional Functions 8 7 Additional Functions Overview Press the DIVERSE FUNCTION soft key to call the additional functions The TNC then displays the following soft keys D14 ERROR Ea Page 209 Output of error messages ERROR D19 PLC Ea Page 221 Send values to the PLC PLo D29 PLC Es Transfer up to eight values to the PLC PLC LIST D37 EXPORT
153. an Coordinates j il 6 4 Path Contours c Msia Coordinates Programming path functions You can program path functions conveniently by using the gray path function keys In further dialogs you are prompted by the TNC to make the required entries If you enter DIN ISO functions via a connected USB keyboard make sure that capitalization is active Straight line at rapid traverse GOO Straight line with feed rate G01 F The TNC moves the tool in a straight line from its current position to the straight line end point The starting point is the end point of the preceding block Coordinates of the end point of the straight line If necessary Radius compensation G40 G41 G42 Feed rate F Miscellaneous function M You can also use the L key to create a straight line block for a rapid traverse movement G00 block Example NC blocks Movement at rapid traverse Press the L key to open a program block for a linear movement Press the left arrow key to switch to the input range for G codes Press the GO soft key if you want to enter a rapid traverse motion Actual position capture You can also generate a straight line block G01 block by using the ACTUAL POSITION CAPTURE key In the Manual Operation mode move the tool to the position you wish to capture Switch the screen display to Programming and Editing Select the program block after which you want to insert the L block Press the ACTUAL POSITION CAPTURE key The TNC ge
154. ands are programmed You can program a Select command without a preceding Bind command f in the Select command you include columns for which no binding is programmed an error occurs during read write processes program interrupt You can program any number of bindings Read and Parameter no for result O parameter that is Ce bound assigned to the table column Database Column name Enter the table name and column name separated by a period Table name Synonym or path and file name of this table The synonym is entered directly whereas the path and file name are entered in single quotation marks Column designation Designation of the table column as given in the configuration data 226 Example Bind a Q parameter to a table column Example Cancel binding Programming Q Parameters il SOL SELECT SQL SELECT selects table rows and transfers them to the result set The SQL server places the data in the result set row by row The rows are numbered in ascending order starting from 0 This row number called the INDEX is used in the SOL commands Fetch and Update Enter the selection criteria in the SQL SELECT WHERE option This lets you restrict the number of rows to be transferred If you do not use this option all rows in the table are loaded Enter the sorting criteria in the SQL SELECT ORDER BY option Enter the column designation and the key
155. ank in positive negative Z direction Show workpiece blank referenced to the set datum Switch monitoring function on or off re monitoring HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 116 000 30 000 114 000 52 0800 33 000 0 000 100 000 0 000 100 900 20 000 0 000 49 811 107 345 27 500 the Working Space iece in i Show the Workp j il 14 3 Functions for Program Display 14 3 Functions for Program Display Overview In the program run modes of operation as well as in the Test Run mode the TNC provides the following soft keys for displaying a part program in pages Go back in the program by one screen F Go forward in the program by one screen v Qo AGE oO m 0 H Go to the beginning of the program Go to the end of the program m Z ome 366 Test Run and Program Run il 14 4 Test Run Application In the Test Run mode of operation you can simulate programs and program sections to reduce programming errors during program run The TNC checks the programs for the following 14 4 Test Run E Geometrical incompatibilities Missing data E Impossible jumps E Violation of the machine s working space The following functions are also available Blockwise test run Interrupt test at any block E Optional block skip Functions for graphic simulation Measuring the machining time E Additional status display HEIDENHAIN TNC 620
156. are being entered 2 D pencil trace graphics even while another program Is running Graphic simulation of real time machining in plan view projection in 3 planes 3 D view Calculation of the machining time in the Test Run mode of operation Display of the current machining time in the Program Run modes Mid program startup in any block in the program returning the tool to the calculated nominal position to continue machining Program interruption contour departure and return 413 16 3 Technical Information 16 3 Technical Information Datum tables Touch probe cycles Components Program memory Input resolution and display step Input range Interpolation Block processing time 3 D straight line without radius compensation Axis feedback control Range of traverse Spindle speed Error compensation Data interfaces 414 Multiple datum tables for storing workpiece related datums Calibrate touch probe Compensation of workpiece misalignment manual or automatic Datum setting manual or automatic Automatic workpiece measurement Cycles for automatic tool measurement Main computer with TNC keyboard and integrated 15 1 inch TFT color flat panel display with soft keys 300 MB on compact flash memory card CFR Up to 0 1 um for linear axes Up to 0 01 um for linear axes Up to 0 0001 for angular axes To 0 000 01 for angular axes Maximum 999 999 999 mm or 999 999 999 Linear in 4 axes Ci
157. around the Z axis Nutation angle angle describing the rotation of the coordinate system around the X axis shifted by the precession angle Rotation angle angle describing the rotation of the tilted machining plane around the tilted Z axis EULROT Programming Multiple Axis Machining il Defining the machining plane with two vectors VECTOR PLANE Application You can use the definition of a machining plane via two vectors if your CAD system can calculate the base vector and normal vector of the tilted machining plane A normalized input is not necessary The TNC calculates the normal so you can enter values between 9 999999 and 9 999999 The base vector required for the definition of the machining plane is defined by the components BX BY and BZ see figure at right The normal vector is defined by the components NX NY and NZ The base vector defines the direction of the X axis in the tilted machining plane and the normal vector determines the direction of the tool axis and at the same time is perpendicular to It Before programming note the following The TNC calculates standardized vectors from the values you enter Parameter description for the positioning behavior See Specifying the positioning behavior of the PLANE function on page 302 HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 orking Plane Software Option 1 re Tilting 11 2 The PLANE Function j il orking Plane Software Option 1 re Til
158. ast shown FORM Reset detail magnification so that the machined uzNDoN workpiece or workpiece blank is displayed as it FORM was programmed with BLK FORM With the WINDOW BLK FORM soft key you return the displayed workpiece blank to its originally programmed dimensions even after isolating a detail without TRANSFER DETAIL HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 14 1 Graphics j il 14 1 Graphics Measuring the machining time Program Run modes of operation The timer counts and displays the time from program start to program end The timer stops whenever machining is interrupted Test Run The timer displays the time that the TNC calculates for the duration of tool movements that are executed at feed rate Dwell times are included in the calculation by the TNC The time calculated by the TNC can only conditionally be used for calculating the production time because the TNC does not account for the duration of machine dependent interruptions such as tool change Activating the stopwatch function S Shift the soft key row until the soft key for the stopwatch functions appears Select the stopwatch functions STORE Select the desired function via soft key e g saving the displayed time Enable ON or disable OFF the measure the machining time function Store displayed time STORE Display the sum of stored time ADD and displayed time Or Clear displayed time ee ee During the Test Run the TNC reset
159. at effort is required to connect the TNC directly to a PC that has an Ethernet card Simply connect the TNC 10BaseT 100BaseT port X26 and the PC with an Ethernet crossover cable aac a trade names crossed patch cable or STP cable Connecting the control to the network Function overview of network configuration In the file manager PGM MGT press the Network soft key ee Programming Pat h Mount Auto Mount point Mount device 1 a PC de01pc5323 transfer Establishes the connection to the selected network ar drive Successful connection is indicated by a check mark under Mount Separates the connection to a network drive ae DEVICE tnceguide Activates or deactivates the Automount function a automatic connection of the network drive during MOUNT DIAGNOSIS Hi a 4 MOUNT UNMOUNT AUTO NETWORK DEFINE CONNECT PING NETWORK NETWORK N DEVICE DEVICE DISCONN abet CONNECTN CONNECTN Secccooo control start up The status of the function Is indicated by a check mark under Auto in the network drive table HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 391 Use the ping function to check whether a connection to a particular remote station in the network is available The address is entered as four decimal numbers separated by points dotted decimal notation The TNC displays an overview window with oes PA information on the active network connections INFO Configures access to network drives Selectable only DE
160. ata from the TNC and send data to the TNC You can now call the file management functions on the TNC by pressing the PGM MGT key see Data transfer to or from an external data medium on page 105 and transfer the desired files End TNCremoNT Select the menu items lt File gt lt Exit gt where all of the functions are explained in more detail The Refer also to the TNCremoNT context sensitive help texts help texts must be called with the F1 key 390 MOD Functions 15 5 Ethernet Interface Introduction The TNC is shipped with a standard Ethernet card to connect the control as a client in your network The TNC transmits data via the Ethernet card with the smb protocol server message block for Windows operating systems or the TCP IP protocol family Transmission Control Protocol Internet Protocol and with support from the NFS Network File System Connection possibilities 15 5 Ethernet Interface You can connect the Ethernet card in your TNC to your network through the RJ45 connection X26 100BaseTX or 10BaseT or directly to a PC The connection is metallically isolated from the control electronics For a 100BaselX or 10Basel connection you need a Twisted Pair cable to connect the TNC to your network depends on the quality grade of the cable the sheathing The maximum cable length between TNC and a node and the type of network 100BaseTX or 10BaseT No gre
161. ate M128 Activate radius compensation Position rotary axis tool orientation Programming Multiple Axis Machining il 12 1 Switch On Switch Off 12 1 Switch On Switch Off Switch on depending on the machine tool Refer to your machine D Switch on and crossing over the reference points can vary tool manual Switch on the power supply for control and machine The TNC then displays the following dialog TNC is started TNC message that the power was interrupted clear the message The PLC program of the TNC is compiled automatically Switch on external dc voltage The TNC checks the functioning of the EMERGENCY STOP circuit Cross the reference points manually in the displayed sequence For each axis press the machine START button or x Cross the reference points in any sequence Press and hold the machine axis direction button for each axis until the reference point has been traversed can leave out crossing the reference marks In such a case the TNC is ready for operation immediately after the machine control voltage is switched on D If your machine is equipped with absolute encoders you 128 14 Manual Operation and Setup il The TNC is now ready for operation in the Manual Operation mode Crossing the reference point in a tilted working plane The TNC automatically activates the tilted working plane if this function was enabled when the control was s
162. ates Example 1 Holes dimensioned in absolute coordinates Hole 1 Hole 2 Hole 3 X 10mm X 30mm X 50 mm Y 10mm Y 20 mm Y 30 mm Incremental workpiece positions Incremental coordinates are referenced to the last programmed nominal position of the tool which serves as the relative imaginary datum When you write a part program in incremental coordinates you thus program the tool to move by the distance between the previous and the subsequent nominal positions Incremental coordinates are therefore also referred to as chain dimensions To program a position in incremental coordinates enter the function G91 before the axis Example 2 Holes dimensioned in incremental coordinates Absolute coordinates of hole 4 X 10 Mmm Y 10mm Hole 5 with respect to 4 Hole 6 with respect to 5 G91 X 20 mm G91 X 20 mm G91 Y 10 mm G91 Y 10 mm Absolute and incremental polar coordinates Absolute polar coordinates always refer to the pole and the reference axis Incremental coordinates always refer to the last programmed nominal position of the tool HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 77 entals gt LL E m entals C LL E Setting the datum A production drawing identities a certain form element of the workpiece usually a corner as the absolute datum When setting the datum you first align the workpiece along the machine axes and then move the tool in each axis to a defined position relat
163. ation Function not available If possible the blocks are executed in the defined contour element plane error message for APPRLN DEPLN APPRCT DEPCT Axis specific scaling factor is allowed radius is not scaled Error message if RO is programmed for APPR DEP LN or APPR DEP CT Contour elements with length O are ignored The approach departure movements are calculated for the first or last valid contour element Q60 to Q99 or QS60 to QS99 are always local Feed rate is limited to rapid traverse feed rate Effective in the machine based coordinate system Available function If possible the blocks are executed in the defined working plane error message for APPRLN APPRLT APPRCT APPRLCT Error message Tool radius 0 and compensation direction RR are assumed An error message Is issued If a contour element with length O is programmed after the APPR block relative to the first contour point programmed in the APPR block For a contour element with length O before a DEP block the TNC does not issue an error message but uses the last valid contour element to calculate the departure movement Q60 to Q99 or QS60 to QS99 are local or global depending on MP7251 in converted cycle programs cyc Nested calls may cause problems Feed rate Is limited to MP7471 455 Functions of the TNC 620 and the ITNC 530 Comparison Functions of the TNC 620 and the ITNC 530 Comparison Automatic cancelation of
164. ay With the MOD function Position display 2 you can select the position display in the status display HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 lay Types Isp D ItTiION 15 6 Pos o il 4 am eb cab S e Q ma O nD S LO q 15 7 Unit of Measurement Application This MOD function determines whether the coordinates are displayed in millimeters metric system or inches To select the metric system e g X 15 789 mm set the Change mm inches function to mm The value is displayed to 3 decimal places To select the inch system e g X 0 6216 inches set the Change mm inches function to inches The value is displayed to 4 decimal places If you would like to activate the inch display the TNC shows the feed rate in inch min In an inch program you must enter the feed rate larger by a factor of 10 398 MOD Functions il 15 8 Displaying Operating Times Application The MACHINE TIME soft key enables you to see various types of operating times Manual operation Programming Overview PGM LBL CYC M POS r NEE Opar ating ines 0 Control on Operating time of the control since being ee aaa e 5 485 260 put into service ae te aa 16 Time warten vor 36 51 48 Satna a l C 5 0 Machine on Operating time of the machine tool since a being put into service at amp Program run Duration of controll ration since bein e j eee REP ogra
165. basic rotation 0 S IST 12 38 57 F OVR 10 857 Y 108 452 Z 9 749 E 0 000 S 85 860 RE aciL H ok T 3 Z 6 F mm min Our 57 8 M 5 b X Yt Select the probe function by pressing the PROBING ROT soft key Enter a rotation angle of zero and confirm with the SET BASIC ROTATION soft key Terminate the probe function by pressing the END soft key ENTRY IN SET Y PRESET BASIC i END TABLE ROTATION 12 7 Compensating wordl Misalignment with 3 D Touch Probe 338 Manual Operation and Setup il 12 8 Datum Setting with 3 D Touch Probe Overview The following soft key functions are available for setting the datum on an aligned workpiece th 3 D Touch Probe PROBING Datum setting In any axis Page 339 ss PROBING Set a corner as datum Page 340 E s O PROBING Set a circle center as datum Page 341 e E o Datum setting in any axis v Select the probe function by pressing the PROBING E a POS soft key _ Move the touch probe to a position near the touch A point Select the probe axis and direction in which you wish Z to set the datum such as Z in direction Z Selection is made via soft keys Y To probe the workpiece press the machine START button Datum Enter the nominal coordinate and confirm your entry with the SET DATUM soft key see Writing the measured values from touch probe cycles in datum tables page 332 To terminate the probe function press the END soft k
166. bed through two coordinates and a position in space through three coordinates Coordinates that are referenced to the datum are referred to as absolute coordinates Relative coordinates are referenced to any other known position reference point you define within the coordinate system Relative coordinate values are also referred to as Incremental coordinate values 74 lt Programming Fundamentals File Management Reference system on milling machines When using a milling machine you orient tool movements to the Cartesian coordinate system The illustration at right shows how the Cartesian coordinate system describes the machine axes The figure illustrates the right hand rule for remembering the three axis directions the middle finger points in the positive direction of the tool axis from the workpiece toward the tool the Z axis the thumb points in the positive X direction and the index finger in the positive Y direction The TNC 620 can control up to 5 axes optionally The axes U V and W are secondary linear axes parallel to the main axes X Y and Z respectively Rotary axes are designated as A B and C The illustration at lower right shows the assignment of secondary axes and rotary axes to the main axes Designation of the axes on milling machines The X Y and Z axes on your milling machine are also referred to as tool axis principal axis 1st axis and minor axis 2nd axis The assignment of the tool axis is d
167. between block 15 and block 35 Is repeated once including the program section repeat between 20 and block 27 5 Main program REPS is executed from block 36 to block 50 end of program HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 Beginning of program section repeat 1 Beginning of program section repeat 2 Program section between this block and G98 L2 block N200 is repeated twice Program section between this block and G98 L1 block N150 is repeated once 7 5 Nesting i i 7 5 Nesting Repeating a subprogram Example NC blocks Program execution 1 Main program UPGREP is executed up to block 11 2 Subprogram 2 is called and executed 3 Program section between block 10 and block 12 is repeated twice Subprogram 2 is repeated twice 4 Main program SPGREP Is executed from block 13 to block 19 End of program 1 Beginning of program section repeat 1 Subprogram call Program section between this block and G98 L1 block N100 is repeated twice Last block of the main program with M2 Beginning of subprogram End of subprogram 90 Programming Subprograms and Program Section Repeats il 76 Programming Examples Program sequence E Pre position the tool to the workpiece surface E Enter the infeed depth in incremental values E Contour milling Repeat downfeed and contour milling HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 Tool call Retract the tool Set pole Pre position in the working plane Pre position to the workpiece surface
168. cal value directly e g when determining the traverse range limit Change a setting by pressing the ENT key e g when setting program Input Change a setting via a selection window If more than one possibility is available for a particular setting you can superimpose a window listing all of the given possibilities by pressing the GOTO key Select the desired setting directly by pressing the corresponding numerical key to the left of the colon or by using the arrow keys and then confirming with ENT If you don t want to change the setting close the window again with END Exiting the MOD functions Close the MOD functions with the END key or END soft key 382 MODE MODE Code number Control model TNC320 NC software Developer Version NC kernel C_NCK_MLST4_484 PLC software Basis NCK V 2 61 Feature Content Level JL ee USER LICENSE DIAGNOSIS PARAMETER INFO MOD Functions il Overview of MOD functions The functions available depend on the momentarily selected operating mode bia ae Programming i l Display software numbers ma l Y Position display 1 ACTL i S 85 860 1 Enter code number no a z ange eE mm hol R 3 0000 T m Machine specific user parameters if applicable c hae EEE Te 0 0000 4 4 Control model TNC32 M110 z Legal information SNe settusre Developer version bu a PLC software Basis NCK V 2 01 2 Feature Content Level Test ru
169. cles 212 to 215 251 to 257 Clearing level and oblique surfaces Cycles 230 to 232 Straight slots and circular slots Cycles 210 211 253 254 Linear and circular point patterns Cycles 220 221 E Contour train contour pocket also with contour parallel machining Cycles 20 to 25 OEM cycles special cycles developed by the machine tool builder can be integrated Program verification graphics program run graphics I Plan view Projection in three planes 3 D view Tool compensation M120 Radius compensated contour look ahead for up to 99 blocks look ahead 3 D machining M118 Superimpose handwheel positioning during program run Pallet management Communication with external PC applications over COM component 00 Input resolution and display step For linear axes to 0 01 um Angular axes to 0 00001 Double speed control loops are used primarily for high speed spindles as well as for linear motors and torque motors Feature content level upgrade functions Along with software options significant further improvements of the TNC software are managed via the Feature Content Level FCL upgrade functions Functions subject to the FCL are not available simply by updating the software on your TNC All upgrade functions are available to you without surcharge when you receive a new machine Upgrade functions are identified in the manual with FCL n where n indicates the sequential number of the feature conte
170. columns by a comma O parameters must be bound to all columns entered here E Optional WHERE selection criteria A selection criterion consists of a column name condition see table and comparator Link selection criteria with logical AND or OR Program the comparator directly or with a Q parameter A Q parameter is introduced with a colon and placed in single quotation marks see example Example Selection of table rows with the WHERE option T L z e Q O V S T Example Table name defined with path and file name 8 8 Accessing E Optional ORDER BY column name ASC to sort in ascending order or ORDER BY column name DESC to sort in descending order If neither ASC nor DESC are programmed then ascending order is used as the default setting The TNC places the selected rows in the indicated column E Optional FOR UPDATE keyword The selected rows are locked against write accesses from other processes 228 Programming Q Parameters Equal to Not equal to Less than Less than or equal to Greater than Greater than or equal to Linking multiple conditions Logical AND Logical OR HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 AND OR 8 8 Accessing T with SQL Commands f il V SQL FETCH D SQL FETCH reads the row addressed with INDEX from the result set and Example Row number is transferred in a places the table entries in the bound assigned Q parameters The
171. coordinate data 262 For program run control 261 For spindle and coolant 261 MOD function Exiting 382 Overview 383 Select 382 422 N NC error messages 118 Nesting 187 Network connection 107 Nonvolatile Q parameters defining 200 Normal vector 295 O Open contour corners M98 267 Operating modes 60 Operating times 399 Option number 384 P Parametric programming See Q parameter programming Part families 201 Path 92 Path contours Cartesian coordinates Circular arc with tangential connection 167 Circular path around circle center CC 164 Circular path with defined radius 165 Overview 159 Straight line 160 Polar coordinates Circular arc with tangential connection 175 Circular path around pole CO ace 174 Overview 172 Straight line 173 Path functions Fundamentals 150 Circles and circular arcs 153 Pre position 154 P Pin layout for data interfaces 410 Plan view 359 PLANE function 285 Automatic positioning 302 Axis angle definition 300 Euler angle definition 293 Inclined tool machining 306 Incremental definition 299 Points definition 297 Positioning behavior 302 Projection angle definition 291 Reset 288 Selection of possible solutions 304 Space angle definition 289 Vector definition 295 Pocket table 140 Polar coordinates Fundamentals
172. cting the spindle after tool breakage Interrupt machining Enable the external direction keys Press the MANUAL TRAVERSE soft key Move the axes with the machine axis direction buttons START button after the MANUAL OPERATION soft key to enable the axis direction buttons Refer to your machine tool manual A On some machines you may have to press the machine 372 Test Run and Program Run il Resuming program run after an interruption program must be resumed from the beginning of the cycle This means that some machining operations will be repeated If a program run is interrupted during a fixed cycle the If you interrupt a program run during execution of a subprogram or program section repeat use the RESTORE POS AT N function to return to the position at which the program run was interrupted When a program run is interrupted the TNC stores The data of the last defined tool Active coordinate transformations e g datum shift rotation mirroring The coordinates of the circle center that was last defined Note that the stored data remain active until they are reset e g If you select a new program The stored data are used for returning the tool to the contour after manual machine axis positioning during an interruption RESTORE POSITION soft key Resuming program run with the START button You can resume program run by pressing the machine START button if the program was interrupted in one of the follow
173. ctive scaling factor factors Cycles G72 The TNC displays an active scaling factor in up to 6 axes Scaling datum For further information refer to the User s Manual for Cycles Coordinate Transformation Cycles 70 Introduction 2 5 Accessories HEIDENHAIN 3 D Touch Probes and Electronic Handwheels 3 D touch probes With the various HEIDENHAIN 3 D touch probe systems you can Automatically align workpieces Quickly and precisely set datums Measure the workpiece during program run Measure and inspect tools User s Manual for Cycle Programming Please contact HEIDENHAIN if you require a copy of this User s Manual ID 679 295 xx All of the touch probe functions are described in the TS 220 TS 640 and TS 440 touch trigger probes These touch probes are particularly effective for automatic workpiece alignment datum setting and workpiece measurement The TS 220 transmits the triggering signals to the TNC via cable and is a cost effective alternative for applications where digitizing is not frequently required The TS 640 see figure and the smaller TS 440 feature infrared transmission of the triggering signal to the TNC This makes them highly convenient for use on machines with automatic tool changers Principle of operation HEIDENHAIN triggering touch probes feature a wear resisting optical switch that generates an electrical signal as soon as the stylus is deflected This signal is transmitted to the control
174. cycles APPR DEP blocks are allowed as contour elements Machine dependent with existing rotary axes Machine dependent datum shift in rotary axes Function not available Function not available Available function Function not available Available function Circular approach to contour of ridge In limit ranges geometrical conditions of tool contour vertical plunging is used if required No restrictions in connection with coordinate transformations 459 Functions of the TNC 620 and the ITNC 530 Comparison Functions of the TNC 620 and the ITNC 530 Comparison PLANE function TABLE ROT COORD ROT not defined Machine is configured for axis angle Programming an incremental spatial angle according to PLANE AXIAL Programming an incremental axis angle according to PLANE SPATIAL if the machine is configured for spatial angle Special functions for cycle programming 460 FN17 FN18 Configured setting is used All PLANE functions can be used Error message is issued Error message is issued Function available details are different Function available details are different COORD ROT is used Only PLANE AXIAL is executed Incremental spatial angle is interpreted as an absolute value Incremental axis angle is interpreted as an absolute value Function available details are different Function available details are different Comparison Differences in MDI operation Execution of connecte
175. d convex or curving inward concave Convex Direction of rotation G02 with radius compensation G41 Concave Direction of rotation G03 with radius compensation G41 Example NC blocks The distance from the starting and end points of the arc diameter cannot be greater than the diameter of the arc The maximum radius is 99 9999 m You can also enter rotary axes A B and C 166 Programming Programming Contours il Circular path G06 with tangential connection The tool moves on an arc that starts tangentially to the previously programmed contour element A transition between two contour elements is called tangential when there is no kink or corner at the intersection between the two contours the transition is smooth The contour element to which the tangential arc connects must be programmed immediately before the G06 block This requires at least two positioning blocks cry Coordinates of the arc end point and if necessary Feed rate F Miscellaneous function M Example NC blocks 6 4 Path vontours cagsien Coordinates coordinates in the G06 block and in the contour element A tangential arc is a two dimensional operation the preceding it must be in the same plane of the arc HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 i i 6 4 Path Contours cM sian Coordinates 68 Define blank form for graphic workpiece simulation Call tool in the spindle axis and with the spindle sp
176. d oe Ankh z 7 500 T E 3 WKZ 3 a areae Sec CLEARANCE L nl ee a i Soft keys for selecting the screen layout azei 20 DEPTH DL TAB 0 0022 DR TAB 0 0008 T gt Q206 150 FEED RATE FOR PLNGNG SLAVS MRSC IEKEGENI _ 0 0000 Q202 5 gt PLUNGING DEPTH M110 Q210 0 DWELL TIME AT TOP PH y e e E a Depts 3 Program NSS999999 MDI G71 Ron S IST 12 43 PGM CALL 00 00 29 Active PGM mdi 57 F OVR 33 631 Y 72 542 Z 9 749 C 0 000 5S 85 860 EEEE ACTL f1 eke Omm min Our 57 9 M 5 b STATUS STATUS TOOL STATUS COORD OVERVIEW STATUS TRONSF Left program blocks right status display PROGRAM 60 Introduction Manual operation Programm i n g 3803 1 1 Programming and Editing 3803_1 G71 N10 G30 G17 X 0 Y 0 Z 40 In this mode of operation you can write your part programs The FK free programming feature the various cycles and the Q parameter functions help you with programming and add necessary information If desired you can have the programming graphics show the programmed paths of traverse N80 G 1 G41 X 5 Y 30 F250 N90 G26 R2 N1800 I 15 J 30 G02 X 6 645 Y 35 495 N110 GOG X 55 505 Y 69 488 N120 G02 X 58 995 Y 30 025 R 20 N130 G 3 X 19 732 Y 21 191 R 75 N140 GOZ X 5 Y 30 N99999 G27 R2 N99999 GOO G40 X 30 N99999 Z 50 M2 N99999999 3803_1 G71 Soft keys for selecting the screen layout onl EY E
177. d on the TNC with SQL commands in transactions A transaction consists of multiple SOL commands that guarantee an orderly execution of the table entries Names and designations required as parameters for SOL A Tables are configured by the machine manufacturer commands are also specified The following terms are used Table A table consists of x columns and y rows It is saved as a file in the File Manager of the TNC and is addressed with the path and file name table name Synonyms can also be used for addressing as an alternative to the path and file name Columns The number and names of the columns are specified when configuring the table In some SOL commands the column name is used for addressing Rows The number of rows is variable You can insert new rows There are no row numbers or other designators However you can select rows based on the contents of a column Rows can only be deleted in the table editor not by an NC program Cell The part of a column in a row Table entry Content of a cell Result set During a transaction the selected columns and rows are managed in the result set You can view the result set as a sort of intermediate memory which temporarily assumes the set of selected columns and rows result set Synonym This term defines a name used for a table instead of its path and file name Synonyms are specified by the machine manufacturer in the configuration data 222 Programmin
178. d sequences Saving modally effective functions Function partially available Function partially available Comparison Differences in programming station Demo version Demo version Copying NC programs Shifting the horizontal soft key row HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 Programs with more than 100 NC blocks cannot be selected an error message Is issued If nesting with PGM CALL results in more than 100 NC blocks there is no test graphic display an error message is not issued Copying to and from the directory TNC is possible with Windows Explorer Clicking the soft key bar shifts the soft key row to the right or to the left Available function Available function Programs can be selected max 100 NC blocks are displayed further blocks are truncated in the display Nested programs can be simulated TNCremo or file manager of programming station must be used for copying Clicking any soft key bar activates the respective soft key row i il Functions of the TNC 620 and the ITNC 530 Comparison OES ONL 94 pue 0Z9 ONL 947 Jo suolouNy uosuedwog 462 Overview of DIN ISO Functions of the TNC 620 M00 M01 M02 M03 M05 M06 M08 M09 M13 M14 M30 M89 M99 M91 M92 M94 M97 M98 M109 M110 M111 M116 M117 M118 M120 M126 M127 Program STOP Spindle STOP Coolant OFF Optional program STOP STOP program run Spindle STOP Coolant OFF CLEAR status display depending on machin
179. d the end point The radius for G26 and G27 must be selected so that the HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 ch and Departure 6 3 Contour Approa j il Example NC blocks Starting point First contour point Tangential approach with radius R 5mm Last contour point Tangential departure with radius R 5mm ch and Departure End point 6 3 Contour Appro 58 Programming Programming Contours il 6 4 Path Contours Cartesian Coordinates Overview of path functions Line L Chamfer CHF Circle Center CC Circle C Circular arc CR Circular arc CT Corner Rounding RND HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 O O o o o Ne a 2 oO E Straight line Chamfer between two Straight lines None Circular arc around a circle center CC to an arc end point Circular arc with a certain radius Circular arc with tangential connection to the preceding and subsequent contour elements Circular arc with tangential connection to the preceding and subsequent contour elements Coordinates of the end points of the straight line Chamfer side length Coordinates of the circle center or pole Coordinates of the arc end point direction of rotation Coordinates of the arc end point arc radius direction of rotation Coordinates of the arc end point Rounding radius R Page 160 Page 161 Page 163 Page 164 Page 165 Page 167 Page 162 6 4 Path vontours cagsi
180. de finishing 458 Cycle 24 Max 12000 blocks in up to 12 subcontours max 1000 blocks per subcontour Tool axis in TOOL CALL block defines the working plane Islands are not circumnavigated Reciprocating plunge infeed at reduced feed rate increase in machining time Rough out is always contour parallel Combinations always refer to the defined uncompensated contour At first all pockets are roughed out on the same plane End position clearance height above the last position that is defined before the cycle call Curvature of tangential arcs is derived from the curvature of the target contour To position the circular arc the target contour Is systematically searched from end to beginning until a position is found where no collision can occur If this is not possible the arc length is halved until it can be positioned The max width of the arc is three tool radii the max angular length is 0 8 rad To position the circular arc the target contour is systematically searched trom end to beginning until a position is found where no collision can occur If this is not possible the arc length is halved until it can be positioned Max 8192 contour elements in up to 12 subcontours no restrictions for subcontour The axes of the first positioning block in the first Subcontour define the working plane Islands are circumnavigated at the current machining depth Configurable via MP7420 With MP7420 you can
181. dinate axes and numbers Entering and editing Define tool data in the program Select coordinate axes or DEE ares enter them into the program Call tool data O 9 Numbers CALL e e o Programming path movements B Decimal point Reverse algebraic sign Polar coordinate input Incremental APPR Approach depart contour P f valies pee DEP Q parameter programming O parameter FK free contour programming tie Prog gap Save actual position or values from Straight line calculator SHEN 3 amp Skip dialog questions delete words z Circle center pole for polar coordinates o O E z Confirm entry and resume dialo Circle with center y g lock Grele wiitadiis Conclude block and exit entry ce e cry Circular arc with tangential connection Chamfering Corner rounding Special functions smarT NC Show special functions FCT message DEL Abort dialog delete program section Clear numerical entry or TNC error CE Select the next tab in forms Up down one dialog box or button About this Manual The symbols used in this manual are described below About this Manual Do you desire any changes or have you found any errors We are continuously striving to improve documentation for you Please help us by sending your requests to the following e mail address tnc userdoc heidenhain de HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 5 il TNC Model Software and Features TNC Model Software and Features This manual
182. direction buttons w Select the Manual Operation mode x Press the machine axis direction button and hold it as long as you wish the axis to move or x T Move the axis continuously Press and hold the machine axis direction button then press the machine START button 0 To stop the axis press the machine STOP button You can move several axes ata time with these two methods You can change the feed rate at which the axes are traversed with the F soft key see Spindle Speed S Feed Rate F and Miscellaneous Functions M page 320 HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 12 2 Moving the Machine Axes i il Incremental jog positioning With incremental jog positioning you can move a machine axis by a preset distance A Select the Manual Operation or Electronic Handwheel mode a Shift the soft key row INCRE Select incremental jog positioning Switch the MENT ony INCREMENT soft key to ON Enter the jog increment in mm and confirm with the ENT key 12 2 Moving the Machine Axes x Press the machine axis direction button as often as desired S The maximum permissible value for infeed is 10 mm 318 Manual Operation and Setup il Traversing with the HR 410 electronic handwheel The portable HR 410 handwheel is equipped with two permissive buttons The permissive buttons are located below the star grip You can only move the machine axes when a permissive button is depressed machine depend
183. direction via soft key Press NC start The touch probe moves in the defined direction until it contacts the workpiece and then automatically returns to Its starting point Use the axis direction keys to pre position the touch probe to a position near the second contact point Press NC start The touch probe moves in the defined direction until it contacts the workpiece and then automatically returns to Its starting point Then the TNC shows the measured basic rotation Press SET BASIC ROTATION soft key to select the displayed value as the active rotation Press the END soft key to exit the menu Further information on this topic MDI operating mode See Programming and Executing Simple Machining Operations on page 352 Workpiece alignment See Compensating Workpiece Misalignment with 3 D Touch Probe on page 337 HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 1 6 Workpiece i 1 6 Workpiece sei Datum setting with 3 D touch probe Insert the 3 D touch probe In the MDI mode run a TOOL CALL block containing the tool axis and then return to the Manual Operation mode DATUM TOUCH PROBE AA PROBING E SET Select the probing functions The TNC displays the available functions in the soft key row Set the datum at a workpiece corner for example Position the touch probe near the first touch point on the first workpiece edge Select the probing direction via soft key Press NC start The touch probe moves in the defined directio
184. displayed only once Error message to be acknowledged only once Complete log without filter functions available Available A service Tile is automatically created when the system crashes Available Available Available No limitation regarding program length Available Not available If error messages occur the cursor is on the error causing block in the contour subprogram Repeat function available Not available Not available 449 Functions of the TNC 620 and the ITNC 530 Comparison Functions of the TNC 620 and the ITNC 530 Comparison Programming OEM cycles Access to table data Access to machine parameters Creating interactive cycles with CYCLE QUERY e g touch probe cycles in Manual Operation mode Via SQL commands With the CFGREAD function Available Comparison Differences in Test Run functionality Display of delta values DR and DL from TOOL CALL block Test Run up to block N Calculation of machining time Are not considered Function not available Each time the simulation is repeated by pressing the START soft key the machining time is totaled Comparison Differences in Test Run operation Arrangement of soft key rows and soft keys within the rows Zoom function Character set for PROGRAM screen layout Performing a Test Run in Single block mode switching to the Programming mode of operation at any time Machine specitic miscellaneous functions M Disp
185. e Maximum measuring range Safety clearance for linear measurement Safety clearance for radial measurement Spindle speed Probing direction m Additional Functions i il N Additional Functions Reference point from touch probe cycle 360 Value from the active datum table in the active coordinate system 500 Read data of the current tool 950 220 1 Line 1 AJ O 14 15 16 1to9 X Y Z A B C U V W 1to9 X Y Z A B C U V W 1to9 X Y Z A B C U V W 1to9 X Y Z A B C U V Last reference point of a manual touch probe cycle or last touch point from Cycle O without probe length compensation but with probe radius compensation workpiece coordinate system Last reference point of a manual touch probe cycle or last touch point trom Cycle O without stylus length or stylus radius compensation machine coordinate system Result of measurement of the touch probe cycles O and 1 without probe radius or probe length compensation Last reference point of a manual touch probe cycle or last touch point from Cycle O without stylus length or stylus radius compensation workpiece coordinate system Oriented spindle stop Read values Tool length L Tool radius R Tool radius R2 Oversize in tool length DL Oversize in tool radius DR Oversize for tool radius DR2 Tool locked TL O not locked 1 locked Number of replacement tool RT Maximum tool age TIME1 Maximum tool age TIM
186. e USB TNC does not support case simply acknowledge the message with the CE key In theory you should be able to connect all USB devices with the file systems mentioned above to the TNC It may happen that a USB device is not identified correctly by the control In such cases use another USB device The USB devices appear as separate drives in the directory tree so you can use the file management functions described in the earlier chapters correspondingly In order to remove a USB device you must proceed as follows Say Press the PGM MGT soft key to call the file manager MGT Select the left window with the arrow key Use the arrow keys to select the USB device to be removed Scroll through the soft key row GO OO Select additional functions NET Select the function for removing USB devices The Exit the file manager p In order to re establish a connection with a USB device that has been removed press the following soft key Select the function for reconnection of USB devices TNC removes the USB device from the directory tree Programming Fundamentals File Management il 4 1 Screen keyboard 3 2 You can enter letters and special characters with the screen keyboard anual oreration progranning gt or if available with a PC keyboard connected over the USB port ot i ab ear R TNC nc_prog Cast H z aw Bey Ee Tt File name Bytes Status Date
187. e a ZIP file with the appropriate help files Download the ZIP file and unzip it Move the unzipped CHM files to the TNC in the TNC tncguide en directory or into the respective language subdirectory see also the following table to the TNC then in the Extras gt Configuration gt Mode gt Transfer in binary format menu item you have to enter the extension CHM If you want to use TNCremoNT to transfer the CHM files German TNC tncguide de English TNC tncguide en Czech TNC tncguide cs French TNC tncguide fr Italian TNC tncguide it Spanish TNC tncguide es Portuguese TNC tncguide pt Swedish TNC tncguide sv Danish TNC tncguide da Finnish TNC tncguide fi Dutch TNC tncguide nl Polish TNC tncguide pl Hungarian TNC tncguide hu Russian TNC tncguide ru Chinese simplified TNC tncguide zh Chinese traditional TNC tncguide zh tw 128 Programming Programming Aids il 5 1 Entering Data 5 1 Entering Tool Related Data Feed rate F The feed rate F is the speed in millimeters per minute or inches per minute at which the tool center point moves The maximum feed rates can be different for the individual axes and are set in machine parameters Input You can enter the feed rate in the T block and in every positioning block see Programming tool movements in DIN ISO on page 82 In millimeter orograms you enter the feed rate in mm min and in inch programs for reasons of r
188. e angles Before programming note the following You must always define the three space angles SPA SPB and SPC even if one of them 0 The sequence of the rotations described above is independent of the active tool axis Parameter description for the positioning behavior See Specifying the positioning behavior of the PLANE function on page 302 HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 orking Plane Software Option 1 re Tilting 11 2 The PLANE Function j il Input parameters Spatial angle A Rotational angle SPA around the BS fixed machine axis X see figure at top right Input range from 359 9999 to 359 9999 Spatial angle B Rotational angle SPB around the fixed machine axis Y see figure at top right Input range from 359 9999 to 359 9999 Spatial angle C Rotational angle SPC around the fixed machine axis Z see figure at center right Input range from 359 9999 to 359 9999 Continue with the positioning properties see Specifying the positioning behavior of the PLANE function on page 302 Abbreviations used orking Plane Software Option 1 SPATIAL Spatial in space SPA Spatial A rotation about the X axis SPB Spatial B rotation about the Y axis SPC Spatial C rotation about the Z axis re ing Tilt Example NC block 11 2 The PLANE Function 290 Programming Multiple Axis Machining il Defining the machining plane with projection angles PROJECTED PLAN
189. e block containing the word you wish to find REPLACE 10 g Select the Search function The TNC superimposes the search window and displays the available search functions in the soft key row Enter the text to be searched for Please note that the search is case sensitive Then confirm with the ENT key Enter the text to be inserted Please note that the entry is case sensitive Start the search process The TNC moves to the next occurrence of the text you are searching for To replace the text and then move to the next occurrence of the text press the REPLACE soft key To replace all text occurrences press the REPLACE ALL soft key To skip the text and move to its next occurrence press the FIND soft key End the search function HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 3 2 Creating and Writing ee cundiftentats 3 3 File Management 3 3 File Management Fundamentals Files Programs In HEIDENHAIN format H In DIN ISO format Tables for Tools T Tool changers TCH Pallets P Datums D Points PNT Presets PR Touch probes TP Backup files BAK Texts as ASCII files A Log Tiles TXT Help files CHM When you write a part program on the TNC you must first enter a file name The TNC saves the program to the hard disk as a file with the same name The TNC can also save texts and tables as files The TNC provides a special file management window in which you can easily find and manage your files Here you can call copy
190. e character is to be deleted Select the REMOVE soft key C REHovE 378 Test Run and Program Run il 14 8 Optional Program Run Interruption Application The TNC optionally interrupts program run at blocks containing M1 It you use M1 in the Program Run mode the TNC does not switch off the spindle or coolant on Do not interrupt Program Run or Test Run at blocks lt A ore containing M1 Set soft key to OFF eal Interrupt Program Run or Test Run at blocks SA orr containing M1 Set soft key to ON HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 14 8 Optional Program Run Interruption C il uoidn Uuj UNY WiesbO1g jeuoindo 8 1 Test Run and Program Run il 380 MOD Functions 15 1 Selecting MOD Functions 15 1 Selecting MOD Functions The MOD functions provide additional input possibilities and displays The available MOD functions depend on the selected operating mode Selecting the MOD functions Call the operating mode in which you wish to change the MOD functions Press the MOD key to select the MOD functions The oo figures at right show typical screen menus in Programming and Editing mode figure at upper right Test Run mode figure at lower right and in a machine operating mode see figure on next page Changing the settings Select the desired MOD function in the displayed menu with the arrow keys There are three possibilities for changing a setting depending on the function selected Enter a numeri
191. e for tool changer on page 140 HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 1 6 Workpiece seii 1 6 Workpiece Setup Select the correct operating mode Workpieces are set up in the Manual Operation or Electronic Handwheel mode g Press the operating modes key The TNC goes into the Manual Operation mode Further information on this topic Manual mode See Moving the Machine Axes on page 317 Clamp the workpiece Mount the workpiece with a fixture on the machine table If you have a 3 D touch probe on your machine then you do not need to clamp the workpiece parallel to the axes If you do not have a 3 D touch probe available you have to align the workpiece so that it is fixed with its edges parallel to the machine axes 50 First Steps with the TNC 620 il Workpiece alignment with 3 D touch probe Insert the 3 D touch probe In the Manual Data Input MDI operating mode runa TOOL CALL block containing the tool axis and then return to the Manual Operation mode in MDI mode you can run an individual NC block independently of the others TOUCH PROBE AA PROBING Select the probing functions The TNC displays the available functions in the soft key row Measure the basic rotation The NC displays the basic rotation menu To identify the basic rotation probe two points on a straight surface of the workpiece Use the axis direction keys to pre position the touch probe to a position near the first contact point Select the probing
192. e parameter Go to block 1 Spindle ON clockwise Spindle ON counterclockwise Spindle STOP Tool change STOP program run depending on machine parameter Spindle STOP Coolant ON Coolant OFF Spindle ON clockwise Coolant ON Spindle ON counterclockwise Coolant ON Same function as M02 Vacant miscellaneous function or Cycle call modally effective depending on machine parameter Blockwise cycle call Within the positioning block Coordinates are referenced to machine datum Within the positioning block Coordinates are referenced to position defined by machine tool builder such as tool change position Reduce the rotary axis display to a value below 360 Machine small contour steps Machine open contours completely Constant contouring speed at tool cutting edge increase and decrease feed rate Constant contouring speed at tool cutting edge feed rate decrease only Cancel M109 M110 Feed rate for rotary axes in mm min Cancel M116 Superimpose handwheel positioning during program run Pre calculate radius compensated contour LOOK AHEAD Shortest path traverse of rotary axes Cancel M126 M128 M129 M130 M140 M141 M143 M148 M149 Retain position of tool tip when positioning tilting axes TCPM Cancel M128 Within the positioning block Points are referenced to the untilted coordinate system Retraction from the contour in the tool axis direction Suppress touch probe monitoring Delete basic
193. e soft key row Pressing the key adds the soft key row as the last row To exit the menu press the APPR DEP key again then the TNC shows the last active soft key row Exits the respective menu 447 Functions of the TNC 620 and the ITNC 530 Comparison Functions of the TNC 620 and the ITNC 530 Comparison Calling the file manager while the CYCLE DEF and TOUCH PROBE menus are active Calling the file manager while CYCL CALL SPEC FCT PGM CALL and APPR DEP menus are active Datum table Sorting function by values within an axis Resetting the table Hiding axes that are not present Switching the list form view Inserting individual line Transfer of actual position values in individual axis to the datum table per keystroke Transfer of actual position values in all active axes to the datum table per keystroke Using a key to capture the last positions measured by TS Entry of comment in DOC column FK free contour programming Programming of parallel axes Automatic correction of relative references 448 Terminates the editing process and calls the file manager The respective soft key row remains selected when the file manager is exited Terminates the editing process and calls the file manager The respective soft key row remains selected when the file manager is exited Available Available Not available Switchover via split screen key Allowed everywhere renumbering possible after request Empt
194. e the status display appears in the large window AcTL O okk rT 3 Z 6 o F Omm min Ovr 58 1 M 5 FILT T A HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 63 2 4 Status E ii 2 4 Status obeys Information in the status display ACTL X Y Z SM zamme a o a o Actual or nominal coordinates of the current position Machine axes the TNC displays auxiliary axes in lower case letters The sequence and quantity of displayed axes is determined by the machine tool builder Refer to your machine manual for more information The displayed feed rate in inches corresponds to one tenth of the effective value Spindle speed S feed rate F and active M functions Program run started Axis is locked Axis can be moved with the handwheel Axes are moving under a basic rotation Axes are moving in a tilted working plane The function M128 TCPM is active No active program Program run started Program run stopped Program run is being aborted Introduction il Additional status displays The additional status displays contain detailed information on the program run They can be called in all operating modes except for the Programming and Editing mode of operation To switch on the additional status display Call the soft key row for screen layout 2 Screen layout with additional status display In the STATUS right half of the screen the TNC shows the O
195. e tilted working plane function is active PLC positioning determined by the machine tool builder is not possible 348 Manual Operation and Setup il Activating manual tilting To select manual tilting press the 3 D ROT soft key Use the arrow keys to move the highlight to the Manual Operation menu item To activate manual tilting press the ACTIVE soft key ACTIVE Enter the tilt angle To reset the tilting function set the desired operating modes in the menu Tilt working plane to Inactive Use the arrow keys to position the highlight on the desired rotary axis To conclude entry press the END key If the tilted working plane function Is active and the TNC moves the machine axes in accordance with the tilted axes the status display shows the symbol If you activate the Tilt working plane function for the Program Run operating mode the tilt angle entered in the menu becomes active In the first block of the part program If you use Cycle G80 or the PLANE function in the part program the angle values defined there are in effect Angle values entered in the menu will be overwritten HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 Manual operation Manual operation Inactive F4 4 9 s 000 c 25 8 6 H OA SSES 178 E SAAE ONR COPY PAST OK CANCEL FIELD FIEL jane Ss Er on 2 E D e Working Plane Software Option 1 j sd N j
196. ecisive for the assignment of the principal and minor axes X Y Z Y Z X Z X Y HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 3 1 runge s Polar coordinates If the production drawing is dimensioned in Cartesian coordinates you also write the part program using Cartesian coordinates For parts containing circular arcs or angles it is often simpler to give the dimensions in polar coordinates a er While the Cartesian coordinates X Y and Z are three dimensional and can describe points in space polar coordinates are two dimensional and describe points in a plane Polar coordinates have their datum at a circle center CC or pole A position in a plane can be clearly defined by the Polar Radius the distance from the circle center CC to the position and the Polar Angle the value of the angle between the reference axis and the line that connects the circle center CC with the position 3 1 Fun Setting the pole and the angle reference axis The pole is set by entering two Cartesian coordinates in one of the three planes These coordinates also set the reference axis for the polar angle H X Y X Y Z ra ZIX 7 76 Programming Fundamentals File Management il Absolute and incremental workpiece positions Absolute workpiece positions Absolute coordinates are position coordinates that are referenced to the datum of the coordinate system origin Each position on the workpiece is uniquely defined by its absolute coordin
197. ectories are shown to the right of and below their parent directories A triangle in front of the folder symbol indicates that there are further subdirectories which can be shown with the or ENT keys The wide window on the right shows you all files that are stored in the selected directory Each file is shown with additional information illustrated in the table below File name Name with max 25 characters Type File type of Bytes File size in bytes Status File properties E Program is selected in the Programming mode of operation 3 Program is selected in the Test Run mode of operation M Program is selected in a Program Run mode of operation File is protected against erasing and editing File is protected against erasing and edition because it is being run Date Date that the file was last edited Time Time that the file was last edited 94 Programming 1GB H TNC nc_prog CastN Tt File name Bytes Status Date Time M 20 04 2009 11 37 32 24 06 2009 12 41 17 24 06 2009 12 28 31 27 04 2009 14 04 56 24 06 2009 12 39 34 22 04 2009 08 01 46 9 4 2009 13 15 44 24 06 2009 09 11 47 24 06 2009 12 28 18 27 04 2009 14 05 32 24 06 2009 09 39 04 24 06 2009 12 39 01 22 06 2009 13 35 20 22 06 2009 13 38 34 24 06 2009 12 27 53 WINDOW 3 ot E ae 2 LAST z N D FILES Programming Fundamentals File Management Selecting drives direc
198. ed and confirm with the ENT key Close the parenthetical expression with the ENT key and confirm your entry with the END key Example Convert string parameter QS11 to a numerical parameter Q82 242 Programming Q Parameters il Checking a string parameter With the INSTR function you can check whether a string parameter is contained in another string parameter FORMULA INSTR Select Q parameter functions Select the FORMULA function Enter the number of the Q parameter in which the TNC is to save the place at which the search text begins Confirm with the ENT key Shift the soft key row Select the function for checking a string parameter Enter the number of the QS parameter in which the text to be searched for is saved Confirm with the ENT key Enter the number of the OS parameter to be searched and confirm with the ENT key Enter the number of the place starting from which the TNC is to search the substring and confirm with the ENT key Close the parenthetical expression with the ENT key and confirm your entry with the END key Remember that the first character of a text sequence starts internally with the zeroth place If the TNC cannot find the required substring it will save the total length of the string to be searched counting starts at 1 in the result parameter If the substring is found in more than one place the TNC returns the first place at which it finds the substring Example Search
199. ed working space A oa 1 Autostart active No o Sooo b 00 00 26 e In a Program Run operating mode you can use the AUTOSTART soft TE 5 key see figure at upper right to define a specific time at which the z 0 600 85 3460 x program that is currently active in this operating mode is to be started aay Sap ACTL f11 oke r Omm min Ovr 57 8 M 5 O q Show the window for entering the starting time see s ae figure at center right OK EXD CANCEL FIELD FIELD Time h min sec Time of day at which the program is to be started Date DD MM YYYY Date at which the program is to be started To activate the start press the OK soft key HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 377 14 7 Optional Block Skip 14 7 Optional Block Skip Application In atest run or program run the control can skip over blocks that begin with a slash Con To run or test the program without the blocks ii preceded by a slash set the soft key to ON oN To run or test the program with the blocks preceded lore by aslash set the soft key to OFF This function does not work for TOOL DEF blocks After a power interruption the TNC returns to the most recently selected setting Insert the character In the Programming mode you select the block in which the character is to be Inserted Z Select the INSERT soft key REMOVE Erase the character In the Programming mode you select the block in which th
200. eed S Retract tool in the spindle axis at rapid traverse Pre position the tool Move to working depth at feed rate F 1000 mm min Approach the contour at point 1 activate radius compensation G41 Tangential approach Move to point 2 Point 3 first straight line for corner 3 Program chamfer with length 10 mm Point 4 2nd straight line for corner 3 1st straight line for corner 4 Program chamfer with length 20 mm Move to last contour point 1 second straight line for corner 4 Tangential exit Retract tool in the working plane cancel radius compensation Retract in the tool axis end program Programming Programming Contours il HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 Define blank form for graphic workpiece simulation Call tool in the spindle axis and with the spindle speed S Retract tool in the spindle axis at rapid traverse Pre position the tool Move to working depth at feed rate F 1000 mm min Approach the contour at point 1 activate radius compensation G41 Tangential approach Point 2 first straight line for corner 2 Insert radius with R 10 mm feed rate 150 mm min Move to point 3 Starting point of the arc Move to point 4 end point of the arc with G02 radius 30 mm Move to point 5 Move to point 6 Move to point 7 End point of the arc circular arc with tangential connection to point 6 TNC automatically calculates the radius 169 6 4 Path vontours cagsien Coordinates 6 4 Path a sian Coordinates Move to last
201. emental values You only need to define the blank form if you wish to run a graphic test for the program HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 3 2 Creating and Writing ee 3 2 Creating and Wri ng Mibarams Creating a new part program You always enter a part program in the Programming and Editing mode of operation An example of program initiation Select the Programming and Editing operating mode Press the PGM MGT key to call the file manager MGT Select the directory in which you wish to store the new program Enter the new program name and confirm your entry with the ENT key To select the unit of measure press the MM or INCH soft key The TNC switches the screen layout and initiates the dialog for defining the BLK FORM workpiece blank z Enter spindle axis e g Z Enter in sequence the X Y and Z coordinates of the MIN point and confirm each of your entries with the ENT key Enter in sequence the X Y and Z coordinates of the MAX point and confirm each of your entries with the ENT key Programming Fundamentals File Management il Example Display the BLK form in the NC program Program begin name unit of measure Spindle axis MIN point coordinates MAX point coordinates Program end name unit of measure The TNC automatically generates the first and last blocks of the program at Working plane in graphic XY by pressing the DEL If you do not wish to
202. en MORE FUNCTIONS SELECT EDITOR To select the additional functions press the MORE FUNCTIONS soft key To select the editor with which to open the selected file press the SELECT EDITOR soft key Mark the desired editor Press the OK soft key to open the file Connecting removing a USB device Move the highlight to the left window MORE FUNCTIONS tN For more information See USB devices on the TNC FCL 2 function on page 108 104 To select the additional functions press the MORE FUNCTIONS soft key Shift the soft key row Search for a USB device In order to remove the USB device move the cursor to the USB device Remove the USB device LA Programming Fundamentals File Management il Data transfer to or from an external data medium Program run full sequence Programming 1GB H Before you can transfer data to an external data medium th the AA niii you must set up the data interface see Setting the Data ERa T Interfaces on page 386 TER PRT Qa Onc _prog Depending on the data transfer software you use a ecatiae problems can occur occasionally when you transmit data 123 h 3 over a serial interface They can be overcome by repeating cvci asi cirele sco zaa 6 b the transmission EX4 H ms feckeoe0 rec e192 t z T 152 TCHPRAZ TXT a82 pam Call the file manager cay Ge Isa TCHPRAZ _o1d TXT
203. enhain de lt Services and Documentation gt lt Software gt lt PC Software gt lt INCremoNT gt You can download the current version of TNCremo free of System requirements for TNCremo PC with 486 processor or higher Windows 95 Windows 98 Windows NT 4 0 Windows 2000 Windows XP or Windows Vista operating system 16 MB RAM 5 MB free memory space on your hard disk An available serial interface or connection to the TCP IP network Installation under Windows Start the SETUP EXE installation program with the File Manager Explorer Follow the setup program instructions Starting TNCremo under Windows Click lt Start gt lt Programs gt lt HEIDENHAIN Applications gt lt TNCremo gt When you start TNCremo for the first time TNCremo automatically tries to set up a connection with the TNC HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 15 4 Setting the Data Interfaces j il Data transfer between the TNC and TNCremoNT TNCremoNT OF x Datei Ansicht Extras Hilfe Before you transfer a program from the TNC to the PC a oj x o fn you must make absolutely sure that you have already Steueung saved the program currently selected on the TNC The pane _ arte __ _ atte Datu _ aj TNC saves changes automatically when you switch the See SE Frei B93 MByte mode of operation on the TNC or when you select the file EEH 1 373 02 08 97 14 51 30 Insgesamt B manager via the PGM MGT key ee z ae CAY11H 384 02 0
204. ensation G41 G42 see figure at upper right traverse direction Y ith workp ion WI 3 D radius somi sat 11 5 Peripheral milling Z For the TNC to be able to reach the set tool orientation you need to activate the function M128 see Maintaining the position of the tool tip when positioning with tilted axes TCPM M128 software option 2 on page 309 and subsequently the tool radius compensation The TNC then positions the rotary axes automatically so that the tool can reach the orientation defined by the coordinates of the rotary axes with the active compensation RR A X This function is possible only on machines for which you RL E can define spatial angles for the tilting axis configuration Refer to your machine tool manual The TNC is not able to automatically position the rotary axes on all machines Refer to your machine manual Note that the TNC makes a compensating movement by the defined delta values The tool radius R defined in the tool table has no effect on the compensation Danger of collision On machines whose rotary axes only allow limited traverse sometimes automatic positioning can require the table to be rotated by 180 In this case make sure that the tool head does not collide with the workpiece or the clamps You can define the tool orientation in a G01 block as described below Example Definition of the tool orientation with M128 and the coordinates of the rotary axes Pre position 312 Activ
205. ent basic rotation later write down the value that appears under Rotation angle Make a basic rotation with workpiece edge to be compared see Compensating Workpiece Misalignment with 3 D Touch Probe on page 337 Press the PROBING ROT soft key to display the angle between the angle reference axis and the workpiece edge as the rotation angle Cancel the basic rotation or restore the previous basic rotation This is done by setting the rotation angle to the value that you previously wrote down To measure the angle between two workpiece sides Select the probe function by pressing the PROBING ROT soft key Rotation angle If you need the current basic rotation later write down the displayed rotation angle Make a basic rotation with first workpiece edge see Compensating Workpiece Misalignment with 3 D Touch Probe on page 337 Probe the second edge as for a basic rotation but do not set the rotation angle to zero Press the PROBING ROT soft key to display the angle PA between the two workpiece edges as the rotation angle Cancel the basic rotation or restore the previous basic rotation by setting the rotation angle to the value that you wrote down previously 344 Manual Operation and Setup il Using the touch probe functions with mechanical probes or dial gauges If you do not have an electronic 3 D touch probe on your machine you can also use all the previously described manual touch probe functions
206. ent function The HR 410 handwheel features the following operating elements 1 EMERGENCY STOP button 2 Handwheel 3 Permissive buttons 4 Axis address keys 5 Actual position capture key 6 Keys for defining the feed rate slow medium fast the feed rates are set by the machine tool builder 7 Direction in which the TNC moves the selected axis 8 Machine function set by the machine tool builder The red indicator lights show the axis and feed rate you have selected It is also possible to move the machine axes with the handwheel during program run if M118 is active Procedure Select the Electronic Handwheel operating mode Press and hold a permissive button Select the axis x Select the feed rate z Move the active axis in the positive direction or Move the active axis in the negative direction HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 12 2 Moving the Machine Axes j il 12 3 Spindle Speed S redikate F and Miscellaneous Functions M 12 3 Spindle Speed S Feed Rate F and Miscellaneous Functions M Function In the Manual Operation and Electronic Handwheel operating modes you can enter the spindle speed S feed rate F and the miscellaneous functions M with soft keys The miscellaneous functions are described in Chapter 7 Programming Miscellaneous Functions The machine tool builder determines which O miscellaneous functions M are available on your control and what effects they have
207. enter the same point that you used for the starting point The starting and end points of the arc must lie on the circle Input tolerance up to 0 016 mm selected through the circleDeviation machine parameter Smallest possible circle that the TNC can traverse 0 0016 um Programming Programming Contours il Circular path GO2 G03 G05 with defined radius The tool moves on a circular path with the radius R Direction of rotation In clockwise direction G02 In counterclockwise direction G03 Without programmed direction G05 The TNC traverses the circular arc with the last programmed direction of rotation Coordinates of the arc end point Radius R Note The algebraic sign determines the size of the arc Miscellaneous function M Feed rate F Full circle For a full circle program two blocks in succession The end point of the first semicircle is the starting point of the second The end point of the second semicircle is the starting point of the first HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 6 4 Path vontours caagsien Coordinates j il 6 4 Path contours cM sian Coordinates Central angle CCA and arc radius R The starting and end points on the contour can be connected with four arcs of the same radius Smaller arc CCA lt 180 Enter the radius with a positive sign R gt 0 Larger arc CCA gt 180 Enter the radius with a negative sign R lt 0 The direction of rotation determines whether the arc is curving outwar
208. er surface of stylus and lower surface of tool Default O Permissible deviation from tool length L for breakage detection It the entered value is exceeded the TNC locks the tool status L Input range 0 to 0 9999 mm Permissible deviation from tool radius R for breakage detection If the entered value is exceeded the TNC locks the tool status L Input range O to 0 9999 mm Number of teeth Wear tolerance length Wear tolerance radius Wear tolerance Radius 2 Cutting direction M3 Tool offset radius Tool offset length Breakage tolerance length Breakage tolerance radius Programming Tools Editing tool tables The tool table that is active during execution of the part program is Tool table editing designated TOOL T and must be saved in the directory TNC table Tool name Programming TOOL T can only be edited in one of the machine operating modes AEG e Other tool tables that are to be archived or used for test runs are given any other names with the extension T By default for Test Run and Programming modes the TNC uses the simtool t table which is also stored in the table directory In the Test Run mode press the TOOL TABLE soft key to edit it To open the tool table TOOL T Select any machine operating mode veal Press the TOOL TABLE soft key to select the tool TEN table EDIT Set the EDIT soft key to ON OFF on Display only specific tool types filter setting
209. es are usually entered as numerical values In a T block you can also assign the values to O parameters Inout range You can enter a delta value with up to 99 999 mm representation of the tool The representation of the Delta values from the tool table influence the graphical workpiece remains the same in the simulation Delta values from the T block change the represented size of the workpiece during the simulation The simulated tool size remains the same Entering tool data into the program The number length and radius of a specific tool is defined in the G99 block of the part program To select tool definition press the TOOL DEF key E Tool number Each toolis uniquely identified by its tool DEF number Tool length Compensation value for the tool length Tool radius Compensation value for the tool radius tool length and tool radius directly into the input line by p In the programming dialog you can transfer the value for pressing the desired axis soft key Example HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 on 5 2 Tool Data k il 5 2 Tool Data Entering tool data in the table You can define and store up to 9999 tools and their tool data in a tool table Also see the Editing Functions later in this Chapter In order to be able to assign various compensation data to a tool indexing tool number insert a line and extend the tool number by a dot and a number from 1 to 9 e g T 5 2 You must use tool tables if
210. esolution in 1 10 inch min Rapid traverse If you wish to program rapid traverse enter G00 Duration of effect A feed rate entered as a numerical value remains in effect until a block with a different feed rate is reached If the new feed rate is G00 rapid traverse the last programmed feed rate is once again valid after the next block with G01 Changing during program run You can adjust the feed rate during program run with the teed rate override knob F 130 Programming Tools il Spindle speed S The spindle speed S is entered in revolutions per minute rom in a T block Instead you can also define the cutting speed Vc in m min Programmed change In the part program you can change the spindle speed in a T block by entering the spindle speed only To program the spindle speed press the SPEC FCT FCT key Press the PROGRAM FUNCTIONS soft key Press the DIN ISO soft key Press the S soft key Enter the new spindle speed Changing during program run You can adjust the spindle speed during program run with the spindle speed override knob S HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 ad O eb ad aN o 5 1 Entering Too j il 5 2 Tool Data 5 2 Tool Data Requirements for tool compensation You usually program the coordinates of path contours as they are dimensioned in the workpiece drawing To allow the TNC to calculate the tool center path i e the tool compensation you must also enter
211. ew directory 7 Creating a new file 97 Copying a single file 98 Copying files into another directory 99 Copying a directory 99 Choosing one of the last files selected 100 Deleting a file 100 Deleting a directory 101 Tagging files 102 Renaming a file 103 File sorting 103 Additional functions 104 Data transfer to or from an external data medium 105 The TNC in a network 107 USB devices on the TNC FCL 2 function 108 HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 17 il 4 1 Screen keyboard 110 Enter the text with the screen keyboard 110 4 2 Adding Comments 111 Function 111 Entering a comment in a separate block 111 Functions for editing of the comment 112 4 3 Structuring Programs 113 Definition and applications 113 Displaying the program structure window Changing the active window 113 Inserting a structuring block in the left program window 113 Selecting blocks in the program structure window 113 4 4 Integrated Pocket Calculator 114 Operation 114 4 5 Programming Graphics 116 Generating Not generating graphics during programming 116 Generating a graphic for an existing program 116 Block number display ON OFF 117 Erasing the graphic 117 Magnifying or reducing a detail 117 4 6 Error messages 118 Display of errors 118 Open the error window 118 C
212. ey HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 339 il th 3 D Touch Probe ing wi i Datum Sett Corner as datum PROBING E 340 Select the probe function by pressing the PROBING P soft key Position the touch probe near the first touch point on the first workpiece edge Select the probe direction by soft key To probe the workpiece press the machine START button Position the touch probe near the second touch point on the same workpiece edge To probe the workpiece press the machine START button Position the touch probe near the first touch point on the second workpiece edge Select the probe direction by soft key To probe the workpiece press the machine START button Position the touch probe near the second touch point on the same workpiece edge To probe the workpiece press the machine START button Datum Enter both datum coordinates into the menu window and confirm your entry with the SET DATUM soft key or see Writing the measured values from touch probe cycles in the preset table page 333 To terminate the probe function press the END soft key Manual Operation and Setup il Circle center as datum With this function you can set the datum at the center of bore holes circular pockets cylinders studs circular islands etc Inside circle The TNC automatically probes the inside wall in all four coordinate axis directions For incomplete circles circular arcs you can choose the appropriate
213. fied by Ln m Operating sequence 1 The TNC executes the part program up to the end of the program section Ln m 2 Then the program section between the called LBL Ln mis repeated the number of times entered after M 3 The TNC then resumes the part program after the last repetition NISSIS oar Programming notes You can repeat a program section up to 65 534 times in succession The total number of times the program section is executed is always one more than the programmed number of repeats Programming a program section repeat E To mark the beginning press the LBL SET key and enter a LABEL NUMBER for the program section you wish to repeat If you want to use a label name press the LBL NAME soft key to switch to text entry Enter the program section Calling a program section repeat Press the LBL CALL key CALL To call subprograms section repeats Enter the label number of the subprogram to be called then confirm with the ENT key If you want to use a label name press the key to switch to text entry Repeat REP Enter the number of repeats then confirm with the ENT key 184 Programming Subprograms and Program Section Repeats il 7 4 Separate Program as Subprogram Operating sequence 1 The TNC executes the part program up to the block in which another program Is called with 2 Then the other program is run from beginning to end 3 The TNC then resumes the first calling part program with the block a
214. figuration of probing behavior Manual operation Including basic rotation TRUE Including active basic rotation during probing FALSE Always move on paraxial path during probing Automatic mode Multiple measurements in probing functions 1 to 3 Probings per probing process Automatic mode Confidence interval of multiple measurements 0 002 to 0 999 mm Range within which the measured value must be during multiple measurements CfgloolMeasurement M function for spindle orientation 1 Spindle orientation directly by the NC 0 Function inactive 1 to 999 Number of the M function for spindle orientation Probing direction for tool radius measurement X_Positive Y_Positive X_Negative Y_Negative depending on the tool axis Distance from lower edge of tool to upper edge of stylus 0 001 to 99 9999 mm Offset of stylus to tool Rapid traverse in probing cycle 10 to 300 000 mm min Rapid traverse in probing cycle Probing teed rate for tool measurement 1 to 3 000 mm min Rapid traverse during tool measurement Calculation of the probing feed rate 16 1 Machine Specific User Parameters ConstantTolerance Calculation of the probing feed rate with constant tolerance VariableTolerance Calculation of the probing feed rate with variable tolerance ConstantFeed Constant probing feed rate Max permissible surface cutting speed at the tooth edge 1 to129 m min Permissible surface cutting speed at the circumference of the milling tool Maximu
215. formation on the error message concerned D If your machine manufacturer also provides a help Ea Call the help for HEIDENHAIN error messages MACHINE Call the help for HEIDENHAIN error messages if E available 122 Programming Programming Aids il 4 7 Context Sensitive Help System Application The TNCguide context sensitive help system includes the user documentation in HTML format The TNCguide is called with the HELP key and the TNC often immediately displays the information specific to the condition from which the help was called context sensitive call Even if you are editing an NC block and press the HELP key you are usually brought to the exact place in the documentation that describes the corresponding function Before you can use the TNCguide you need to download the help files from the HEIDENHAIN home page see Downloading current help files on page 128 The TNC always tries to start the TNCguide in the language that you have selected as the conversational language on your TNC If the files with this language are not yet available on your TNC it automatically opens the English version The following user documentation is available in the TNCguide Conversational Programming User s Manual BHBKlartext chm DIN ISO User s Manual BHBIso chm User s Manual for Cycle Programming BHBtchprobe chm List of All Error Messages errors chm In addition the main chm book file is available with
216. ft key To probe the workpiece press the machine START button If you will need the current datum later write down the value that appears in the Datum display Datum Enter 0 To terminate the dialog press the END key Select the probe function by pressing the PROBING POS soft key Position the touch probe at a position near the second touch point B Select the probe direction with the soft keys Same axis but from the opposite direction To probe the workpiece press the machine START button The value displayed as datum is the distance between the two points on the coordinate axis To return to the datum that was active before the length measurement Select the probe function by pressing the PROBING POS soft key Probe the first touch point again Set the datum to the value that you wrote down previously To terminate the dialog press the END key Measuring angles You can use the 3 D touch probe to measure angles in the working plane You can measure the angle between the angle reference axis and a workpiece edge or the angle between two sides The measured angle is displayed as a value of maximum 90 HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 th 3 D Touch Probe ing wi A Datum Sett i il th 3 D Touch Probe ing wi i Datum Sett Finding the angle between the angle reference axis and a workpiece edge Select the probe function by pressing the PROBING ROT soft key Rotation angle If you need the curr
217. ft key The TNC then displays the following soft keys Overview D00 ASSIGN De Example D00 Q5 P01 60 x y Assigns a numerical value D01 ADDITION D1 Example D01 Q1 P01 Q2 P02 5 AN Calculates and assigns the sum of two values D02 SUBTRACTION o2 Example D02 Q1 P01 10 P02 5 x Calculates and assigns the difference of two values D03 MULTIPLICATION Example D03 Q2 P01 3 P02 3 Calculates and assigns the product of two values D04 DIVISION Example D04 Q4 P01 8 P02 Q2 Pas Calculates and assigns the quotient of two values Not permitted Division by 0 x o D o lt D05 SQUARE ROOT Example D05 Q050 P01 4 An Calculates and assigns the square root of a number Not permitted Calculating the square root of a negative value e To the right of the character you can enter the following Two numbers Two Q parameters A number and a Q parameter The Q parameters and numerical values in the equations can be entered with positive or negative signs 202 Programming Q Parameters il Programming fundamental operations Example Basre To select the mathematical functions press the pases BASIC ARITHMETIC soft key To select the O parameter function ASSIGN press the DO X Y soft key 8 3 Describing Contours througje tematica Operations 5 Enter the number of the Q parameter e g 5 10 ENT gt op 2 Q ct a gt 49 lt a a oo O
218. ft key must also be pressed to cancel the program When you return to the Program Run mode of operation Error message Selected block not addressed Use mid program startup to select the point of interruption Error message FK programming Undefined starting position The menu for returning must be selected with the RESTORE POSITION soft key The order of axis approach cannot be recognized a fixed sequence of axes is always displayed on the screen After position has been reached positioning mode must be exited with the RESTORE POSITION soft key Only possible if startup position has already been approached Medium character set Editing is possible right after switching to the Programming mode of operation Switching the operating mode is allowed Switching the operating mode is allowed modal information is saved program run can be continued by pressing NC start GOTO allowed Menu for returning is selected automatically The order of axis approach is displayed on the screen by highlighting the corresponding axes The positioning mode is automatically exited after the position has been reached Possible in all operating states 453 Functions of the TNC 620 and the ITNC 530 Comparison Functions of the TNC 620 and the ITNC 530 Comparison Error messages Editing Q parameter contents after program run was interrupted by switching to the Single block mode of operation Manual traverse during pr
219. fter the program call A G71 No labels are needed to call any program as a subprogram N99999 A G71 The called program must not contain the miscellaneous functions M2 or M30 If you have defined subprograms with labels in the called program you can then use M2 or M30 with the D09 P01 0 P02 0 P03 99 jump function to force a jump over this program section The called program must not contain a call into the calling program otherwise an infinite loop will result Programming notes ve O O rd Q Q V V i 7 4 Separate HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 185 il Calling any program as a subprogram To select the functions for program call press the CALL PGM CALL key con Press the PROGRAM soft key for the TNC to start the dialog for defining the program to be called Use the screen keyboard to enter the path name GOTO key or press the PROGRAM soft key for the TNC to display a selection window in which you can select the program to be called Confirm with the END key S O O T Q 2 5 V N S 7 4 Separate 186 Programming Subprograms and Program Section Repeats il 7 5 Nesting Types of nesting Subprograms within a subprogram Program section repeats within a program section repeat Subprograms repeated Program section repeats within a subprogram Nesting depth The nesting depth is the number of successive levels in which program sect
220. function Show grid lines as the background 3 D programming graphics Test graphics plan view projection in 3 planes 3 D view High resolution view Image data processing Tool display Setting the simulation speed Coordinates of line intersection for projection in 3 planes Expanded zoom functions mouse operation Displaying frame for workpiece blank Displaying the depth value in plan view during mouse over Targeted stop of test run STOP AT N Consideration of tool change macro Program run graphics plan view projection in 3 planes 3 D view High resolution view Saving opening of simulation results Datum tables for storing workpiece related datums Preset table for saving reference points presets Pallet management Support of pallet files Tool oriented machining Pallet preset table for managing pallet datums Returning to the contour With mid program startup After program interruption Autostart function Actual position capture Actual positions can be transferred to the NC program Enhanced file management Creating multiple directories and subdirectories Sorting function Mouse operation Selection of target directory by soft key HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 X option 20 Blockwise Only in plan view X X option 20 X X X X option 22 X X X X X X X X in continuous jog mode X X KKK KK X Functions of the TNC 620 and the iITNC 530 Comparison il Functions of the TNC 620 and the IT
221. g Cycles 201 to 205 208 240 Milling of internal and external threads Cycles 262 to 265 267 Finishing of rectangular and circular pockets and studs Cycles 212 to 215 251 to 257 Clearing level and oblique surfaces Cycles 230 232 Straight slots and circular slots Cycles 210 211 253 254 Linear and circular point patterns Cycles 220 221 Contour train contour pocket with contour parallel machining Cycles 20 to 25 OEM cycles special cycles developed by the machine tool builder can be integrated _Advanced graphic features option number 20 Program verification graphics Plan view program run graphics Projection in three planes 16 3 Technical Information 3 D view Tool compensation M120 Radius compensated contour look ahead for up to 99 blocks look ahead 3 D machining M118 Superimpose handwheel positioning during program run Pallet editor 416 Tables and Overviews il Input resolution and display For linear axes to 0 01 um step Angular axes to 0 00001 Double speed control loops are used primarily for high speed spindles as well as linear motors and torque motors 16 3 Technical Information HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 417 il 16 3 Technical Information Positions coordinates circle radii chamfer lengths Tool numbers Tool names Delta values for tool compensation Spindle speeds Feed rates Dwell time in Cycle 9 Thread pitch in various cycles Angle of s
222. g Q Parameters il A Transaction In principle a transaction consists of the following actions Address table file select rows and transfer them to the result set Read rows from the result set change rows or insert new rows Conclude transaction If changes insertions were made the rows from the result set are placed in the table file Other actions are also necessary so that table entries can be edited in an NC program and to ensure that other changes are not made to copies of the same table rows at the same time This results in the following transaction sequence 1 AQ parameter is specified for each column to be edited The Q parameter is assigned to a column it is bound SQL BIND 2 Address table file select rows and transfer them to the result set ieee SQL Select Reeds SQL Fetch 1234 In addition you define which columns are transferred to the result set SQL SELECT SQL Commit SOL Update A saa Ma e You can lock the selected rows Other processes can then read these rows but cannot change the table entries You should always lock the selected rows when you are going to make changes SQL SELECT FOR UPDATE Dateiver SQL Server waltung SOL Rollback SOL Insert 3 Read rows from the result set change rows or insert new rows Transfer one row of the result set into the Q parameters of your NC program SQL FETCH Prepare changes in the O parameters and transfer one row fr
223. g and subsequent contour elements both coordinates must lie in the plane of the rounding arc If you machine the contour without tool radius compensation you must program both coordinates in the working plane The corner point is cut off by the rounding arc and is not part of the contour A feed rate programmed in the G25 block is effective only in that block 25 After the G25 block the previous feed rate becomes effective again You can also use an RND block for a tangential contour approach Programming Programming Contours il Circle center I J You can define a circle center for circles that you have programmed with the G02 G03 or G05 function This is done in the following ways Entering the Cartesian coordinates of the circle center in the working plane or Using the circle center defined in an earlier block or Capturing the coordinates with the ACTUAL POSITION CAPTURE key To program the circle center press the SPEC FCT key FCT Press the PROGRAM FUNCTIONS soft key Press the DIN ISO soft key Press the or J soft key gt Enter the coordinates for the circle center or If you want to use the last programmed position enter G29 Example NC blocks 6 4 Path ventours caaesien Coordinates The program blocks 10 and 11 do not refer to the illustration Duration of effect The circle center definition remains in effect until a new circle center is programmed You can also define a ci
224. gram for example during E Positioning block programming E Cycle programming To transfer the correct position values proceed as follows Place the input box at the position in the block where you want to insert a position value Select the actual position capture function In the soft key row the TNC displays the axes whose positions can be transferred Select the axis The TNC writes the current position of the selected axis into the active input box HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 3 2 Creating and Writing ee Editing a program You cannot edit a program while it is being run by the TNC in a machine operating mode While you are creating or editing a part program you can select any desired line in the program or individual words in a block with the arrow keys or the soft keys Go to previous page PA 0 E Go to next page v D Qo m oO m 0 H 2 Go to beginning of program Go to end of program m Oo 3 2 Creating and Writing Pe grams le Change the position of the current block on the screen Press this soft key to display additional program blocks that are programmed before the current block Change the position of the current block on the screen Press this soft key to display additional program blocks that are programmed after the current block Move from one block to the next Select individual words in a block 4 a To selecta certain block press the GO
225. h display remember The deeper the surface the darker the shade START RESET START SINGLE START HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 359 il 14 1 Graphics Projection in 3 planes Similar to a workpiece drawing the part is displayed with a plan view and two sectional planes A symbol to the lower left indicates whether the display is in first angle or third angle projection according to ISO 6433 selected with MP7310 Details can be isolated in this display mode for magnification see Magnifying details page 362 In addition you can shift the sectional planes with the corresponding soft keys Select the soft key for projection in three planes Shift the soft key row until the soft key for the functions for shifting the sectional plane appears Select the functions for shifting the sectional plane The TNC offers the following soft keys Shift the vertical sectional plane to the right i or left shift the vertical sectional plane forward or ei backward a a H Shift the horizontal sectional plane upwards _ or downwards ii A L The positions of the sectional planes are visible during shifting The default setting of the sectional plane is selected such that it lies in the working plane in the workpiece center and in the tool axis on the top surface 360 00 06 19 OFF Test Run and Program Run il START ST
226. h tilting table You must tilt the workpiece into the desired position for machining by positioning the tilting table for example with an L block The position of the transformed tool axis does not change in relation to the machine based coordinate system Thus if you rotate the table and therefore the workpiece by 90 for example the coordinate system does not rotate f you press the Z axis direction button in the Manual Operation mode the tool moves In Z direction In calculating the transtormed coordinate system the TNC considers only the mechanically influenced offsets of the particular tilting table the so called translational components Machine with swivel head You must bring the tool into the desired position for machining by positioning the swivel head for example with an L block The position of the transformed tool axis changes in relation to the machine based coordinate system Thus if you rotate the swivel head of your machine and therefore the tool in the B axis by 90 for example the coordinate system rotates also If you press the Z axis direction button in the Manual Operation mode the tool moves In X direction of the machine based coordinate system In calculating the transformed coordinate system the TNC considers both the mechanically influenced offsets of the particular swivel head the so called translational components and offsets caused by tilting of the tool 3 D tool length
227. haking RIS_CTS Transmission stop is active through RTS Software handshaking KON_XOFF Transmission stop is active through DC3 XOFF HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 15 4 Setting the Data Interfaces C il 15 4 Setting the Data Interfaces Settings for data transfer with the TNCserver PC software Enter the following settings in the user parameters seriallnterfaceRS232 definition of data blocks for the serial ports RS232 Data transfer rate in baud Has to match the setting in TNCserver Communications protocol BLOCKWISE Data bits in each transferred 7 bits character Type of parity checking EVEN Number of stop bits 1 stop bit Specify type of handshake Alo GS File system for file operations Fel Setting the operating mode of the external device fileSystem and Transfer directory are not available in the FE2 and The functions Transfer all files Transfer selected file FEX modes PC with HEIDENHAIN data transfer LSV2 software TNCremoNT Non HEIDENHAIN devices suchas FEX printers scanners punchers PC without TNCremoNT HEIDENHAIN floppy disk units FE1 m 388 MOD Functions il Software for data transfer For transfer of files to and from the TNC we recommend using the HEIDENHAIN TNCremo data transfer software With TNCremo data transfer is possible with all HEIDENHAIN controls via the serial interface or the Ethernet interface charge from the HEIDENHAIN Filebase www heid
228. he current tool position If you program Incremental coordinates in an M91 block The coordinate values on the TNC screen are referenced to the machine datum Switch the display of coordinates in the status display to REF see Status Displays page 63 262 Programming Miscellaneous Functions il Behavior with M92 Additional machine datum can also define an additional machine based position as a A In addition to the machine datum the machine tool builder reference point For each axis the machine tool builder defines the distance between the machine datum and this additional machine datum Refer to the machine manual for more information If you want the coordinates in a positioning block to be based on the additional machine datum end the block with M92 programmed with M91 or M92 The tool length however is not compensated Radius compensation remains the same in blocks that are Effect M91 and M92 are effective only in the blocks in which they are programmed M91 and M92 take effect at the start of block Workpiece datum If you want the coordinates to always be referenced to the machine datum you can inhibit datum setting for one or more axes If datum setting is inhibited for all axes the TNC no longer displays the SET DATUM soft key in the Manual Operation mode The figure shows coordinate systems with the machine datum and workpiece datum M91 M92 in the Test Run mode In order to be ab
229. he TNC and enable you to process texts In principle the same ranges are available for QS parameters as for Q parameters see table above Note that for the QS parameters the QS100 to QS199 range is reserved for internal texts Programming notes You can mix Q parameters and fixed numerical values within a program Q parameters can be assigned numerical values between 999 999 999 and 999 999 999 meaning that up to nine digits plus the algebraic sign are permitted You can set the decimal point at any position Internally the TNC can calculate up to a range of 57 bits before and 7 bits after the decimal point 32 bit data width corresponds to a decimal value of 4 294 967 296 You can assign a maximum of 254 characters to QS parameters same data by the TNC For example 0108 is always assigned the current tool radius see Preassigned Q Parameters page 246 Some Q and OS parameters are always assigned the HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 gt gt ee D gt O O 2 T A j il Calling Q parameter functions When you are writing a part program press the Q key in the numeric keypad for numerical input and axis selection below the key The TNC then displays the following soft keys Principle and Overview Basic arithmetic assign add subtract mere Page 202 multiply divide square root sgl Trigonometric functions vara Page
230. he contour 273 Returning to the contour 376 Rotary axis Reducing display M94 309 Shorter path traverse M126 308 HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 S Screen layout 58 Search function 88 Secondary axes 75 Setting the baud rate 386 387 Software number 384 SPEC FCT 278 Special functions 278 Specifications 412 Sphere 256 Spindle speed changing the 321 Spindle speed entering 143 SOL commands 222 Status display 63 Additional 65 General 63 Straight line 160 173 String parameters 237 Structuring programs 113 Subprogram 183 Superimposing handwheel positioning M118 272 Switch off 316 Switch on 314 Swivel axes 309 T Table access 222 Teach in 83 160 Test Run Executing 368 Overview 366 Text variables 237 Tilting the working plane 285 346 Manually 346 TNCguide 123 TNCremo 389 TNCremoNT 389 Tool compensation Length 144 Radius 145 Tool data Calling 143 Delta values 133 Entering into tables 134 Entering them into the program 133 Indexing 138 T Tool length 132 Tool measurement 136 Tool name 132 Tool number 132 Tool radius 132 Tool table Editing functions 138 Editing exiting 137 Input possibilities 134 Touch probe cycles Manual Operation mode 330 Touch probe functions use with mechanical probes or dial ga
231. he distance from the pole CC to the straight line end point Polar coordinate angle PAH Angular position of the Straight line end point between 360 and 360 The sign of H depends on the angle reference axis E f the angle from the angle reference axis to R is counterclockwise H gt 0 E f the angle from the angle reference axis to R is clockwise H lt 0 Example NC blocks HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 olar Coordinates i i p Par oO iho oO Q Q k amp Oo 6 5 Path Contour Circular path G12 G13 G15 around pole I J The polar coordinate radius R is also the radius of the arc R is defined by the distance from the starting point to the pole I J The last programmed tool position will be the starting point of the arc Direction of rotation E In clockwise direction G12 E In counterclockwise direction G13 E Without programmed direction G15 The TNC traverses the circular arc with the last programmed direction of rotation P gt Polar coordinates angle H Angular position of the arc end point between 99 999 9999 and 99 999 9999 Direction of rotation DR Example NC blocks Programming Programming Contours il Circular path G16 with tangential connection The tool moves on a circular path starting tangentially from a preceding contour element P Polar coordinate radius R Enter the distance from are end point to the pole I J Polar coordinates angle
232. he opposite algebraic sign If you use the PLANE RELATIVE function on an untilted machining plane then you simply rotate the untilted plane about the space angle defined in the PLANE function orking Plane Software Option 1 Parameter description for the positioning behavior See Specifying the positioning behavior of the PLANE function on page 302 re Input parameters O REL SPA Incremental angle Space angle about which the active machining plane is to be rotated additionally pe see figure at right Use a soft key to select the axis n m to be rotated about Input range 359 9999 to 359 9999 Continue with the positioning properties see Specifying the positioning behavior of the PLANE function on page 302 Abbreviations used RELATIVE Relative to SPA SPB SPC Example NC block 11 2 The PLANE Function HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 299 il amm 2 me Q O E z oO Z SS 0 O wt de O Tilting t 11 2 The PLANE Function Tilting the working plane through axis angle PLANE AXIAL FCL 3 function Application The PLANE AXIAL function defines both the position of the working plane and the nominal coordinates of the rotary axes This function is particularly easy to use on machines with Cartesian coordinates and with kinematics structures in which only one rotary axis is active 300 Programming Multiple Axis Machining il Input parameters A
233. hentication we aes LO OK CANCEL FIELD FIELD DHCP DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol In the drop down menu set YES Then the control automatically draws its network address IP address subnet mask default router and any broadcast address from a DHCP server in the network The DHCP server identifies the control by its hostname Your company network must be specially prepared for this function Contact your network administrator IP ADDRESS Network address of the control In each of the four adjacent input fields you can enter 3 digits of the IP address With the ENT key you can jump into the next field Your network specialist can give you a network address for the control SUBNET MASK Serves to distinguish the net and host ID of the network Your network specialist assigns the subnet mask of the control HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 393 15 5 Ethernet Interface BROADCAST The broadcast address of the control is needed only if it is different from the standard setting The standard setting is formed from the net and host ID in which all bits are set to 1 ROUTER Network address of default router This entry is required only if your network consists of several subnetworks interconnected by routers The entered network configuration does not become effective until the control is rebooted After the network configuration is concluded with the OK button or soft key the control asks for confirmation and reboots
234. il L uondo BAeMYOS uejd UDOM A hin 6 ZL Manual Operation and Setup il 350 SS a oe ee ong Tirti EE Positioning with Manual Data Input Executing Simple Machining Operations 13 1 Programming 13 1 Programming and Executing Simple Machining Operations The Positioning with Manual Data Input mode of operation is particularly convenient for simple machining operations or pre positioning of the tool It enables you to write a short program in HEIDENHAIN conversational programming or in DIN ISO format and execute it immediately You can also call TNC cycles The program is Stored in the file MDI In the Positioning with MDI mode of operation the additional status displays can also be activated Positioning with Manual Data Input MDI Limitation The following functions are not available in the MDI mode FK free contour programming Program section repeats Subprogramming Path compensation The programming graphics Program call The program run graphics Select the Positioning with MDI mode of operation Program the file MDI as you wish O To start program run press the machine START key Example 1 A hole with a depth of 20 mm is to be drilled into a single workpiece After clamping and aligning the workpiece and setting the datum you can program and execute the drilling operation in a few lines 352 Positioning with Manual Data Input il First you pre position the tool
235. ile Rename a file Protect a file against editing and erasure Cancel file protection Manage network drives Select the editor Sort files by properties Copy a directory Delete directory with all its subdirectories Display all the directories of a particular drive Rename directory Create a new directory HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 COPY an SELECT TYPE a LAST FILES F m r m 4 m a f m Z EZ ZJ v a e p m g 4 E zZ v a e 4 m Lg i E NET SELECT EDITOR SORT NEW ae Page 98 Page 95 Page 97 Page 100 Page 100 Page 102 Page 103 Page 104 Page 104 Page 107 Page 104 Page 103 Page 99 th the AA iii ing wi 3 4 Work th the Fiigfllanager ing wi 3 4 Work Calling the file manager sar Press the PGM MGT key The TNC displays the file management window see figure for default setting If the TNC displays a different screen layout press the WINDOW soft key The narrow window on the left shows the available drives and directories Drives designate devices with which data are stored or transferred One drive is the hard disk of the TNC Other drives are the interfaces RS232 Ethernet which can be used for example for connecting a personal computer A directory is always identified by a folder symbol to the left and the directory name to the right Subdir
236. imated by many short lines in the Z X plane defined in 014 The smaller you define the angle increment the smoother the curve becomes You can determine the number of contour cuts through the angle increment in the plane defined in Q18 E The tool moves upward in three dimensional cuts The tool radius is compensated automatically Examples ing 2 Pro gramm N 56 Center in X axis Center in Y axis Starting angle in space Z X plane End angle in space Z X plane Angle increment in space Radius of the sphere Starting angle of rotational position in the X Y plane End angle of rotational position in the X Y plane Angle increment in the X Y plane for roughing Allowance in sphere radius for roughing Set up clearance for pre positioning in the tool axis Feed rate for milling Definition of workpiece blank Tool call Retract the tool Programming Q Parameters il Call machining operation Reset allowance Angle increment in the X Y plane for finishing Call machining operation Retract in the tool axis end program Subprogram 10 Machining operation Calculate Z coordinate for pre positioning Copy starting angle in space Z X plane Compensate sphere radius for pre positioning Copy rotational position in the plane Account for allowance in the sphere radius Shift datum to center of sphere Account for starting angle of rotational position in the plane Pre position
237. in the tool axis Set pole in the X Y plane for pre positioning Pre position in the plane Set pole in the Z X plane offset by the tool radius Move to working depth Move upward in an approximated arc Update solid angle Inquire whether an arc is finished If not finished return to LBL 2 Programming Examples j i Move to the end angle in space Retract in the tool axis Pre position for next arc Update rotational position in the plane Reset solid angle Activate new rotational position Unfinished If not finished return to label 1 Reset the rotation Reset the datum shift End of subprogram 2 Programming Examples N 58 Programming Q Parameters il 9 1 Entering an Functions M and STOP 9 1 Entering Miscellaneous Functions M and STOP Fundamentals With the TNC s miscellaneous functions also called M functions you can affect the program run e g a program interruption the machine functions such as switching spindle rotation and coolant supply on and oft the path behavior of the tool The machine tool builder may add some M functions that O are not described in this User s Manual Refer to your machine manual You can enter up to two M functions at the end of a positioning block or in a separate block The TNC displays the following dialog question Miscellaneous function M You usually enter only the number of the M function in the prog
238. ine number Tool number T Active tool axis O X6 U ley 7eyV 2 L8 W Spindle speed S Oversize in tool length DL Oversize in tool radius DR Automatic TOOL CALL 0 yes 1 no Oversize for tool radius DR2 Tool index Active feed rate Tool number T Length Radius Index Tool data programmed in TOOL DEF 1 yes 0 no Active radius Programming Q Parameters il Active transformations 210 HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 AJIA AIA BY gt 1 without oversize 2 with oversize 3 with oversize and oversize from TOOL CALL 1 without oversize 2 with oversize 3 with oversize and oversize from TOOL CALL Active length Rounding radius R2 Basic rotation in MANUAL OPERATION mode Programmed rotation with Cycle 10 Active mirrored axes 0 mirroring not active 1 X axis mirrored 2 Y axis mirrored 4 Z axis mirrored 64 U axis mirrored 128 V axis mirrored 256 W axis mirrored Combinations sum of individual axes Active scaling factor in X axis Active scaling factor in Y axis Active scaling factor in Z axis Active scaling factor in U axis Active scaling factor in V axis Active scaling factor in W axis 3 D ROT A axis 3 D ROT B axis 3 D ROT C axis Tilted working plane active inactive 1 0 in a Program Run operating mode Tilted working plane active inactive 1 0 in a Manual operating mode m Additional Functions C il N am oO Active datum shift 220 2
239. ing controls Blockwise reception of an NC program and simultaneous machining of the program is not possible Standard data transfer STANDARD Packet based data transfer BLOCKWISE Transmission without protocol RAW_DATA 386 Basic data Machine parameter programming W HHAAAA gp 888880 Z2uvcVoOlo a 3 H BAUD 9600 STANDARD A i EVEN 1 Stop Bit ONE se EXT al A Me ea DIAGNOSIS PSS 2 PAGE PAGE VIEW MORE MOD Functions il Set the data bits dataBits By setting the data bits you define whether a character is transmitted with 7 or 8 data bits Parity check parity The parity bit helps the receiver to detect transmission errors The parity bit can be formed in three different ways No parity NONE There is no error recognition Even parity EVEN Here there is an error if the receiver finds that it has received an odd number of set bits Odd parity ODD Here there is an error if the receiver finds that it has received an even number of set bits Setting the stop bits stopBits The start bit and one or two stop bits enable the receiver to synchronize to every transmitted character during serial data transmission Setting the handshake flowControl By handshaking two devices control data transfer between them A distinction is made between software handshaking and hardware handshaking No dataflow checking NONE Handshaking is not active Hardware hands
240. ing point patterns was introduced see User s Manual for Cycles The SEL PATTERN function makes it possible to select point tables see User s Manual for Cycles With the CYCL CALL PAT function cycles can now be run in connection with point tables see User s Manual for Cycles The DECLARE CONTOUR function can now also define the depth of the contour see User s Manual for Cycles New Cycle 241 for Single Fluted Deep Hole Drilling was introduced see User s Manual for Cycles The new fixed cycles 251 to 257 were introduced for milling pockets studs and slots see User s Manual for Cycles Touch probe cycle 416 Datum on Circle Center was expanded by parameter Q320 safety clearance see User s Manual for Cycles Touch probe cycles 412 413 421 and 422 Additional parameter Q365 type of traverse see User s Manual for Cycles Touch probe cycle 425 Measure Slot was expanded by parameters Q301 Move to clearance height and Q320 setup clearance see User s Manual for Cycles Touch probe cycles 408 to 419 The TNC now also writes to line O of the preset table when the display value is set see User s Manual for Cycles In the machine operating modes Program Run Full Sequence and Program Run Single Block datum tables can now also be selected STATUS M The definition of feed rates in fixed cycles can now also include FU and FZ values see User s Manual for Cycles 10 Changed Functions of Software 340 56x 02 In Cycle 22 y
241. ing ways The machine STOP button was pressed Programmed interruption Resuming program run after an error If the error message is not blinking Remove the cause of the error To clear the error message from the screen press the CE key Restart the program or resume program run where It was interrupted If the error message is blinking Press and hold the END key for two seconds This induces a TNC system restart Remove the cause of the error Start again If you cannot correct the error write down the error message and contact your repair service agency HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 14 5 Program Run o il 14 5 Program Run Mid program startup block scan With the RESTORE POS AT N feature block scan you can start a part program at any block you desire The TNC scans the program blocks up to that point Machining can be graphically simulated If you have interrupted a part program with an INTERNAL STOP the TNC automatically offers the interrupted block N for mid program startup 374 The RESTORE POS AT N feature must be enabled and adapted by the machine tool builder Refer to your machine manual Mid program startup must not begin in a subprogram All necessary programs tables and pallet files must be selected in a program run mode of operation status M If the program contains a programmed interruption before the startup block the block scan is interrupted Press the machine START button
242. ion DisplaySettings Definition of the unit of measure valid for the display Metric Use metric system Inch Use inch system 16 1 Machine Specific User Parameters DisplaySettings Format of the NC programs and cycle display Program entry in HEIDENHAIN plain language or in DIN ISO HEIDENHAIN Program entry in plain language in MDI mode ISO Program entry in DIN ISO in MDI mode Display of cycles TNC_STD Display cycles with comments TNC_PARAM Display cycles without comments HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 405 il DisplaySettings NC and PLC conversational language settings NC conversational language ENGLISH GERMAN CZECH FRENCH ITALIAN SPANISH PORTUGUESE SWEDISH DANISH FINNISH DUTCH POLISH HUNGARIAN RUSSIAN CHINESE CHINESE TRAD SLOVENIAN ESTONIAN KOREAN LATVIAN NORWEGIAN ROMANIAN SLOVAK TURKISH LITHUANIAN PLC conversational language See NC conversational language Language for PLC error messages 16 1 Machine Specific User Parameters See NC conversational language Language for online help See NC conversational language DisplaySettings Behavior during control startup Acknowledge the Power interrupted message TRUE Start up of the control is not continued until the message has been acknowledged FALSE The Power interrupted message does not appear Display of cycles TNC_STD Display cycles with comments TNC_PARAM Display cycles without comments 406 Tables and Overviews il ProbeSettings Con
243. ion 21 X Option 09 X option 08 with MC 420 X option 08 with MC 420 lt x KX X X X option 09 with MC 420 X XI XIX X M144 M145 M148 M149 M150 M200 M204 Compensating the machine s kinematics configuration for ACTUAL NOMINAL positions at end of block Reset M144 Retract the tool automatically from the contour at NC stop Reset M148 Suppress limit switch message Laser cutting functions HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 Option 09 X option 09 with MC 420 Functions of the TNC 620 and the ITNC 530 Comparison i il Functions of the TNC 620 and the ITNC 530 Comparison Comparison Touch probe cycles in the Manual Operation and El Handwheel modes Touch probe table for managing 3 D touch probes Calibrating the effective length Calibrating the effective radius Measuring a basic rotation using a line Datum setting In any axis Setting a corner as datum Setting a circle center as datum Setting a center line as datum Measuring a basic rotation using two holes cylindrical studs Setting the datum using four holes cylindrical studs Setting the circle center using three holes cylindrical studs Support of mechanical touch probes by manually capturing the current position Writing measured values in preset table Writing measured values in datum tables 444 X Option 17 Option 17 Option 17 Option 17 Option 17 Option 17 By soft key X X X XJ X X X X X X X X
244. ions or subprograms can call further program sections or subprograms Maximum nesting depth for subprograms 8 Maximum nesting depth for main program calls 6 where a G79 acts like a main program call You can nest program section repeats as often as desired HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 7 5 Nesting i il 7 5 Nesting P u a 0 S 2 3 a D Z x lt g le S J 5 A Subprogram within a subprogram 1 Main program SUBPGMS is executed up to block 17 2 Subprogram SP1 is called and executed up to block 39 3 Subprogram 2 is called and executed up to block 62 End of subprogram 2 and return jump to the subprogram from which it was called 4 Subprogram 1 is executed from block 40 up to block 45 End of subprogram 1 and return jump to the main program SUBPGMS 5 Main program SUBPGMS is executed from block 18 up to block 35 Return jump to block 1 and end of program 188 Subprogram at label G98 L1 is called Last program block of the main program with M2 Beginning of subprogram SP1 Subprogram at label G98 L2 is called End of subprogram 1 Beginning of subprogram 2 End of subprogram 2 Programming Subprograms and Program Section Repeats il Repeating program section repeats Example NC blocks Program execution 1 Main program REPS is executed up to block 27 2 Program section between block 20 and block 27 is repeated twice 3 Main program REPS is executed from block 28 to block 35 4 Program section
245. it and Keyboard 5 Visual display unit 57 Sets the screen layout 58 Operating panel 59 2 3 Operating Modes 60 Manual Operation and Electronic Handwheel 60 Positioning with Manual Data Input 60 Programming and Editing 61 Test Run 61 Program Run Full Sequence and Program Run Single Block 62 2 4 Status Displays 63 General status display 63 Additional status displays 65 2 5 Accessories HEIDENHAIN 3 D Touch Probes and Electronic Handwheels 71 3 D touch probes 71 HR electronic handwheels 72 16 3 1 Fundamentals 74 Position encoders and reference marks 74 Reference system 74 Reference system on milling machines 75 Designation of the axes on milling machines 75 Polar coordinates 76 Absolute and incremental workpiece positions 77 Setting the datum 78 3 2 Creating and Writing Programs 79 Organization of an NC program in DIN ISO 79 Define the blank G30 G31 79 Creating a new part program 80 Programming tool movements in DIN ISO 82 Actual position capture 83 Editing a program 84 The TNC search function 88 Data backup 91 3 4 Working with the File Manager 92 Directories 92 Paths 92 Overview Functions of the file manager 93 Calling the file manager 94 Selecting drives directories and Tiles 95 Creating a n
246. itiated by a miscellaneous function that is set by the machine tool builder in Machine Parameter mStrobeUTurn Proceed as follows for manual calibration In the Manual Operation mode position the ball tip in the bore of the ring gauge CAL To select the calibration function for the ball tip radius and the touch probe center misalignment press the CAL R soft key Select the tool axis and enter the radius of the ring gauge To probe the workpiece press the machine START button four times The 3 D touch probe contacts a position on the hole in each axis direction and calculates the effective ball tip radius If you want to terminate the calibration function at this point press the END soft key In order to be able to determine ball tip center misalignment the TNC needs to be specially prepared by the machine manufacturer The machine tool manual provides further information i 180 If you want to determine the ball tip center ts misalignment press the 180 soft key The TNC rotates the touch probe by 180 To probe the workpiece press the machine START button four times The 3 D touch probe contacts a position on the hole in each axis direction and calculates the ball tip center misalignment HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 12 6 Calibrating 3 D Touch Probes j il 12 6 Calibrating 3 D Touch Probes Displaying calibration values The TNC saves the effective length and effective radius of the touch probe in the tool table
247. ive to the workpiece Set the display of the TNC either to zero or to a known position value for each position This establishes the reference system for the workpiece which will be used for the TNC display and your part program If the production drawing is dimensioned in relative coordinates simply use the coordinate transformation cycles see User s Manual for Cycles Cycles for Coordinate Transformation If the production drawing is not dimensioned for NC set the datum at a position or corner on the workpiece which is suitable for deducing the dimensions of the remaining workpiece positions The fastest easiest and most accurate way of setting the datum is by using a 3 D touch probe from HEIDENHAIN See Setting the Datum with a 3 D Touch Probe in the Touch Probe Cycles User s Manual Example The workpiece drawing shows holes 1 to 4 whose dimensions are shown with respect to an absolute datum with the coordinates X 0 Y 0 Holes 5 to 7 are dimensioned with respect to a relative datum with the absolute coordinates X 450 Y 750 With the DATUM SHIFT cycle you can temporarily set the datum to the position X 450 Y 750 to be able to program holes 5 to 7 without further calculations 78 Programming Fundamentals File Management il 3 2 Creating and Writing Programs Organization of an NC program in DIN ISO A part program consists of a series of program blocks The figure at right illustrates the elements of a block
248. l table cet Press the POCKET TABLE soft key to select the TABLE pocket table EDIT Set the EDIT soft key to ON On your machine this oF on might not be necessary or even possible Refer to your machine manual 140 Pocket table editing Tool number File 8 0 0 eererererneO0QDUAUUNeO DUNe tnc NtableNtool p tch WKZ 20 WKZ 30 WKZ 1 PROBE Programming Tools il Selecting a pocket table in the Programming and Editing operating mode Call the file manager MGT Press the SHOW ALL soft key to select the file type Select a file or enter a new file name Conclude your entry with the ENT key or the SELECT soft key RSV ST DOC PLC PL au PS PTYP LOCKED ABOVE LOCKED BELOW LOCKED LEFT LOCKED RIGHT Pocket number of the tool in the tool magazine Tool number Pocket reservation for box magazines Special tool with a large radius requiring several pockets in the tool magazine If your special tool takes up pockets in front of and behind its actual pocket these additional pockets need to be locked in column L status L Fixed tool number The tool is always returned to the same pocket in the tool magazine Locked pocket see also column ST Display of the comment to the tool from TOOL T Information on this tool pocket that is to be sent to the PLC Function is defined by the machine tool builder The machine tool d
249. last element to be corrected the next or previous element is dealt with in the same way as the first or last element to be corrected Must be deactivated if Cycle 209 is used Program cancellation with error message Only the X Y and Z coordinates of the 5 axis movement are considered in the tangent calculation and not the rotary axis movements This may result in the contour element s tangential connection in the editing graphics but not in the actual machining operation Only the X Y and Z coordinates of the 5 axis movement are considered in the approach departure calculation and not the rotary axis movements This may result in the approach departure movements tangential connection in the editing graphics but not in the actual machining operation The equidistant line of the arc helix is used for generating the tool path No restrictions Tool radius compensation is canceled tool change is performed 457 Functions of the TNC 620 and the ITNC 530 Comparison Functions of the TNC 620 and the ITNC 530 Comparison SLII Cycles 20 to 24 Number of definable contour elements Define the working plane Traverse paths during rough out Contour parallel rough out or paraxial channel milling and rough out Internal consideration of combined contours Rough out strategy if multiple pockets are defined Position at end of SL cycle Tangential arcs for floor finishing Cycle 23 Tangential arcs for si
250. lay window You then have the option of canceling the search via soft key If you have started a search in a very long program the Finding any text To select the search function press the FIND soft key The TNC displays the Find text dialog prompt Enter the text that you wish to find To find the text press the EXECUTE soft key 86 Programming Fundamentals File Management il Marking copying deleting and inserting program sections The TNC provides certain functions for copying program sections within an NC program or into another NC program see the table below P Z full sequence Programming 14 h BEGIN PGM 14 MM M BLK FORM 1 Z X Y 0 Z 20 M BLK FORM 2 X 100 Y 100 Z 0 TOOL CALL 9 Z 53500 L Z 10 0 R FMAX M13 x 50 Y L Z 2 R FMAX 5 L Z 6 R F2000 APPR LCT X 12 Y 5 R5 RL F250 L 60 D R7 5 11 L X 36 Y 80 12 RND R7 5 m R 13 L X 60 f 14 RND R7 5 4 t 15 L X 84 Y 50 z 16 L Y 5 17 DEP LCT X 15 Y 5 R5 18 L Z 2 R FMAX 19 L Z 100 R FMAX M30 2 END PGM 14 MM DIAGNOSIS a ES 2j CANCEL DELETE COPY INSERT LAST SELECTION BLOCK BLOCK Ne juste To copy a program section proceed as follows WOONTUDBUONeFSD Select the soft key row containing the marking functions Select the first last block of the section you wish to copy To mark the first last block press the SELECT BLOCK soft key The TNC then highlights the first character of the block and the CANC
251. laying editing the tool table 450 Via FN17 FN18 or TABREAD TABWRITE functions Via FN18 functions Not available Are considered Available function Each time the simulation is repeated by pressing the START soft key time calculation starts at 0 Arrangement of soft key rows and soft keys varies depending on the active screen layout Each sectional plane can be selected by individual soft keys Small character set When you switch to the Programming mode of operation the warning No write permission is displayed once a change has been made the error message is cleared and the program is reset to the beginning when you switch back to Test Run mode Lead to error messages if they are not integrated in the PLC Function available via soft key Sectional plane can be selected via three toggle soft keys Medium character set The operating mode can be switched Changes to the program do not influence the position of the cursor Are ignored during Test Run Function not available Comparison Differences in Manual Operation functionality 3 D ROT function Manual deactivation of the Tilt working plane function Jog increment function Preset table Behavior during presetting HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 If the tilted working plane function is deactivated for both operating modes the text fields will be filled with zeros instead of the current rotary axis positions when the 3 D ROT function is next called
252. le 28 Complete roughing out of slot Definable tolerance Cylinder surface machining with Cycle 29 Cycles 25x for pockets studs and slots Touch probe cycles for datum setting manual and automatic cycles HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 Error message is issued Cannot be defined with complex contour formula Real set operation possible Error message is issued Error message is issued Error message is issued Error message is issued Function does not work within SL cycles Not allowed machining of closed contours is more coherent With X Y coordinates independent of machine type With datum shift in X Y independent of machine type Available function Available function Function not available Available function Available function Direct plunging to contour of ridge In limit ranges geometrical conditions of tool contour error messages are triggered if plunging movements lead to unreasonable critical behavior Cycles can only be executed if the tilted working plane function is inactive the datum shift is inactive and rotation with Cycle 10 is inactive Axes that are outside the working plane in the contour description are ignored Restricted definition in complex contour formula is possible Only restricted performance of real set operation possible Radius compensation is canceled program is executed Program is executed M functions are ignored Infeed movements are ignored Function also works within SL
253. le by pressing the TAG FILE soft key n Move the highlight to the next file you wish to tag Only works via soft keys Do not use the arrow keys To tag further files press the TAG FILES soft key etc copy TAG To copy the tagged files press the COPY TAG soft aa key or me eE Delete the tagged files by pressing END to end the DX tagging function and then the DELETE soft key to delete the tagged files 102 Programming Fundamentals File Management il Renaming a file Move the highlight to the file you wish to rename RENAME Select the renaming function Enter the new file name the file type cannot be changed To rename Press the OK soft key or the ENT key File sorting Select the folder in which you wish to sort the files Select the SORT soft key SORT Select the soft key with the corresponding display criterion HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 th the AA iii ing wi 3 4 Work j il th the iManager ing wi 3 4 Work Additional functions Protecting a file Canceling file protection Move the highlight to the file you want to protect MORE FUNCTIONS PROTECT UNPROTECT To select the additional functions press the MORE FUNCTIONS soft key To activate file protection press the PROTECT soft key The file now has status P To cancel file protection press the UNPROTECT soft key Select the editor Move the highlight in the right window onto the file you want to op
254. le to graphically simulate M91 M92 movements you need to activate working space monitoring and display the workpiece blank referenced to the set datum see Show the Workpiece in the Working Space page 365 HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 9 3 miseataneous m OTS for Coordinate Data j il 9 3 Miscellaneous Pihctions for Coordinate Data Moving to positions in a non tilted coordinate system with a tilted working plane M130 Standard behavior with a tilted working plane The TNC places the coordinates in the positioning blocks in the tilted coordinate system Behavior with M130 The TNC places coordinates in straight line blocks in the untilted coordinate system The TNC then positions the tilted tool to the programmed coordinates of the untilted system Danger of collision Subsequent positioning blocks or fixed cycles are carried out in a tilted coordinate system This can lead to problems in fixed cycles with absolute pre positioning The function M130 is allowed only if the tilted working plane function is active Effect M130 functions blockwise in straight line blocks without tool radius compensation 264 Programming Miscellaneous Functions il 9 4 Miscellaneous Functions for Contouring Behavior Machining small contour steps M97 Standard behavior The TNC inserts a transition arc at outside corners If the contour steps are very small however the tool would damage the contour In such cases the TNC interr
255. ll group of holes subprogram 2 E Program the group of holes only once in subprogram 2 D c Call tool center drill Retract the tool Cycle definition CENTERING Call subprogram 1 for the entire hole pattern HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 195 il Tool change Call tool drill New depth for drilling New plunging depth for drilling Call subprogram 1 for the entire hole pattern Tool change Call tool reamer Cycle definition REAMING 7 6 Bs amming Examples Call subprogram 1 for the entire hole pattern End of main program Beginning of subprogram 1 Entire hole pattern Move to starting point for group 1 Call subprogram 2 for the group Move to starting point for group 2 Call subprogram 2 for the group Move to starting point for group 3 Call subprogram 2 for the group End of subprogram 1 Beginning of subprogram 2 Group of holes Call cycle for 1st hole Move to 2nd hole call cycle Move to 3rd hole call cycle Move to 4th hole call cycle End of subprogram 2 96 Programming Subprograms and Program Section Repeats il esl g i Principle and Overview 8 1 Principle and Overview You can program entire families of parts in a single part program You do this by entering variables called Q parameters instead of fixed numerical values Q parameters can represent information such as Coordina
256. llowing The connection from Point 1 to Point 2 determines the direction of the tilted principal axis X for tool axis Z The direction of the tilted tool axis is determined by the position of Point 3 relative to the connecting line between Point 1 and Point 2 Use the right hand rule thumb X axis index finger Y axis middle finger Z axis see figure at right to remember thumb X axis points from Point 1 to Point 2 index finger Y axis points parallel to the tilted Y axis in the direction of Point 3 Then the middle finger points in the direction of the tilted tool axis The three points define the slope of the plane The position of the active datum is not changed by the TNC Parameter description for the positioning behavior See Specifying the positioning behavior of the PLANE function on page 302 HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 orking Plane Software Option 1 re Tilting 11 2 The PLANE Function j il Input parameters X coordinate of 1st plane point X coordinate P1X Ns of the 1st plane point see figure at top right Y coordinate of 1st plane point Y coordinate P1Y of the 1st plane point see figure at top right Z coordinate of 1st plane point Z coordinate P1Z of the 1st plane point see figure at top right X coordinate of 2nd plane point X coordinate P2X of the 2nd plane point see figure at center right Y coordinate of 2nd plane point Y coordinate P2Y of the 2nd plane point see fig
257. lose the error window 118 Detailed error messages 119 INTERNAL INFO soft key 119 Clearing errors 120 Error log 120 Keystroke log 121 Informational texts 122 Saving service Tiles 122 Calling the TNCguide help system 122 4 7 Context Sensitive Help System 123 Application 123 Working with the TNCguide 124 Downloading current help files 128 18 5 1 Entering Tool Related Data 130 Feed rate F 130 Spindle speed S 131 5 2 Tool Data 132 Requirements for tool compensation 132 Tool numbers and tool names 132 Tool length L 132 Tool radius R 132 Delta values for lengths and radii 130 Entering tool data into the program 133 Entering tool data in the table 134 Pocket table for tool changer 140 Calling tool data 143 5 3 Tool Compensation 144 Introduction 144 Tool length compensation 144 Tool radius compensation 145 HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 19 il 6 1 Tool Movements 150 Path functions 150 Miscellaneous functions M 150 Subprograms and program section repeats 150 Programming with Q parameters 151 6 2 Fundamentals of Path Functions 152 Programming tool movements for workpiece machining 152 6 3 Contour Approach and Departure 155 Starting point and end point 155 Tangential approach and departure 157 6 4 Path Contours
258. ltiline blocks ALL Always display all lines ACT Only display the lines of the active block completely NO Only display all lines when block is edited Activate help TRUE Always display help graphics during input FALSE Only display help graphics if HELP was activated by pressing the key Behavior of the soft key row after a cycle entry TRUE The cycle soft key row remains active after a cycle definition FALSE The cycle soft key row is hidden after a cycle definition Safety check when deleting blocks TRUE Display confirmation question when deleting an NC block FALSE Do not display confirmation question when deleting an NC block Program length for which the geometry is to be checked 100 to 9999 Program length for which the geometry is to be checked 16 1 Machine Specific User Parameters Paths for the end user List of drives and or directories Drives or directories entered here are shown in the TNC s file manager Universal Time Greenwich Mean Time Time difference to universal time h 12 to 13 Time difference in hours relative to Greenwich Mean Time HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 409 il 16 2 Pin Pe outs and Connecting Cables for the Data Interfaces 16 2 Pin Layouts and Connecting Cables for the Data Interfaces RS 232 C V 24 interface for HEIDENHAIN devices The interface complies with the requirements of EN 50 178 for low voltage electrical separation When using the 25 pin adapter block Do not assign RXD XD
259. lude entry O Press the machine START button The rotation of the table corrects the misalignment 354 Positioning with Manual Data Input il Protecting and erasing programs in MDI The MDI file is generally intended for short programs that are only needed temporarily Nevertheless you can store a program if necessary by proceeding as described below Select the Programming and Editing mode of operation Press the PGM MGT key program management to call the file manager Mark the MDI file cory To select the file copying function press the COPY Peo soft key HOLE Enter the name under which you want to save the current contents of the MDI file Copy the file Press the END soft key to close the file manager For more information see Copying a single file page 98 HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 13 1 Programming n Executing Simple Machining Operations j i suoi ei9doC Puiuiyoew 9jdwisg Huizno xg pue Hulwiweibold L EL Positioning with Manual Data Input il 356 ie d Ay ee Gl m mM Test Run and Program Run 14 1 Graphics 14 1 Graphics Application In the program run modes of operation as well as in the Test Run mode the TNC provides the following three display modes Using soft keys select whether you desire Plan view Projection in three planes 3 D view The TNC graphic depicts the workpiece as if it were being machined with a cylindrical end mill If a
260. lue or a selection list is also displayed If the selected machine parameter matches a parameter in the TNC the corresponding MP number is shown Parameter list DisplaySettings Settings for screen display Sequence of the displayed axes O to 5 Depends on the available axes Type of position display in the position window NOML ACTL RFACTL REF NOML LAG DIST Type of position display in the status display NOML ACTL RFACTL REF NOML LAG DIST Definition of decimal separator for position display Feed rate display in Manual operating mode At axis key Display feed rate only if axis direction key is pressed Always minimum Always display feed rate Display of spindle position in the position display During closed loop Display spindle position only if spindle is in position control loop During closed loop and M5 Display spindle position only if spindle is in position control loop and with M5 hidePresetTable True Soft key preset table is not displayed False Display soft key preset table 404 Tables and Overviews il DisplaySettings Display step for the individual axes List of all available axes Display step for position display in mm or degrees 0 1 0 05 0 01 0 005 0 001 0 0005 0 0001 0 00005 Display step software option 0 00001 Display step software option Display step for position display in inches 0 005 0 001 0 0005 0 0001 0 00005 Display step software option 0 00001 Display step software opt
261. ly to Its end or up to a program el E Ee O stop No Zsa O N70 G01 X 15 15 G41 F350 T In the Program Run Single Block mode of operation you must start A each block separately by pressing the machine START button LO The following TNC functions are available in the program run modes S of operation a Interrupt program run 33 635 1Y tr2 542 0 000 S 85 860 DIAGNOSIS Start program run from a certain block Optional block skip Editing the tool table TOOL T Check and change Q parameters Superimpose handwheel positioning Functions for graphic display with advanced graphic features software option Additional status display ACTL 11 lkeQ FI 3 z s BEGIN END PAGE PAGE BLOCK TOOL t l t SCAN TABLE Yi i F Omm7min Our 58 1 M5 HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 369 14 5 Program Run Running a part program Preparation 1 Clamp the workpiece to the machine table 2 Set the datum 3 Select the necessary tables and pallet files status M 4 Select the part program status M Program Run Full Sequence Start the part program with the machine START button Program Run Single Block Start each block of the part program individually with the machine START button 370 Test Run and Program Run il Interrupting machining There are several ways to Interrupt a program run Programmed interruptions Pressing the machine STOP button Switching to program run Single step If the TN
262. m beginning Program call X axis Y axis Z axis N lt xX S lt C 44S 1 Oo Damm O UT 2 2 rrr Zaz Datum number with G53 End of block Rotation about X axis Rotation about Y axis Rotation about Z axis Q parameter definitions Length wear compensation with T Radius wear compensation with T Mm UO UOU OWLD DT Tolerance with M112 and M124 Feed rate Dwell time with G04 Scaling factor with G72 Factor for feed rate reduction F with M103 ee ee a a O G Functions Contour cycles Coordinate transformation List of subcontour programs G37 P01 Datum G54 X 20 Y 30 G54 X0 YO ZO oo o shift Z 10 Define contour data G120 Q1 Mirror image G28 X G28 Detine Call drill Contour cycle pilot drilling G121 O10 Rotation G73 H 45 G73 H 0 Cycle call Scaling factor G72 F 0 8 G72 F1 Define Call roughing mill Contour cycle rough out G122 Q10 Working plane G80A 10B 10 G80 Cycle call C 15 Define Call finishing mill Working plane PLANE PLANE RESET Contour cycle floor finishing 120 O17 sx Cycle call Q parameter definitions e D Function SS Contour cycle side finishing G124 Q11 Cycle call 00 Assign FS 8 SS 01 Addition End of main program return M02 02 Subtraction a 03 Multiplication Contour subprograms G98 04 Division G98 LO 05 Root 06 Sine Radius compensation of the contour subprograms 07 Cosine 08 Root sum of squares c Va2 b2 09 If equal go to label number 10 If not eq
263. m permissible speed during tool measurement 0 to 1 000 1 min Maximum permissible speed Maximum permissible measuring error for tool measurement 0 001 to 0 999 mm First maximum permissible measurement error Maximum permissible measuring error for tool measurement 0 001 to 0 999 mm Second maximum permissible measurement error CfgT TRoundStylus Coordinates of the stylus center 0 X coordinate of the stylus center with respect to the machine datum 1 Y coordinate of the stylus center with respect to the machine datum 2 Z coordinate of the stylus center with respect to the machine datum Safety clearance above the stylus for pre positioning 0 001 to 99 999 9999 mm Set up clearance in tool axis direction Safety zone around the stylus for pre positioning 0 001 to 99 999 9999 mm Set up clearance in the plane perpendicular to the tool axis HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 407 il 16 1 Machine Specific User Parameters ChannelSettings Chi NC Active kinematics Kinematics to be activated List of machine kinematics Geometry tolerances Permissible deviation from the radius 0 0001 to 0 016 mm Permissible deviation of the radius at the circle end point compared with the circle start point Configuration of the fixed cycles Overlap factor for pocket milling 0 001 to 1 414 Overlap factor for Cycle 4 POCKET MILLING and Cycle 5 CIRCULAR POCKET MILLING Display the Spindle error message If M3 M4 is not active On Is
264. m up to the block in which a subprogram is called with Ln 0 2 The subprogram is then executed from beginning to end The Subprogram end is marked G98 LO 3 The TNC then resumes the part program from the block after the Subprogram call Ln 0 Programming notes A main program can contain up to 254 subprograms You can call subprograms in any sequence and as often as desired A subprogram cannot call itself NSIS A Write subprograms at the end of the main program behind the block with M2 or M30 If subprograms are located before the block with M2 or M30 they will be executed at least once even if they are not called 7 2 Subprograms Programming a subprogram To mark the beginning press the LBL SET key SET Enter the subprogram number If you want to use a label name press the LBL NAME soft key to switch to text entry To mark the end press the LBL SET key and enter the label number 0 Calling a subprogram To call a subprogram press the LBL CALL key CALL Label number Enter the label number of the subprogram you wish to call If you want to use a label name press the LBL NAME soft key to switch to text entry G98 L 0 is not permitted Label O is only used to mark the end of a subprogram HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 183 il 7 3 gt am Section Repeats 7 3 Program Section Repeats Label G98 The beginning of a program section repeat is marked by the label G98 L The end of a program section repeat is identi
265. machine parameter M3 Spindle ON clockwise M4 Spindle ON counterclockwise M5 Spindle STOP M6 Tool change Spindle STOP Stop program run Ms Coolant ON Mg Coolant OFF M13 Spindle ON clockwise Coolant ON M14 Spindle ON counterclockwise Coolant ON M30 Same as M2 HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 261 9 2 Miscellaneous Functions for Program tuto Spindle and Coolant 9 3 Miscellaneouslfinctions for Coordinate Data 9 3 Miscellaneous Functions for Coordinate Data Programming machine referenced coordinates M91 M92 Scale reference point On the scale a reference mark indicates the position of the scale reference point Machine datum The machine datum is required for the following tasks Defining the limits of traverse software limit switches Moving to machine referenced positions Such as tool change positions Setting the workpiece datum The distance in each axis from the scale reference point to the machine datum is defined by the machine tool builder in a machine parameter Standard behavior The TNC references coordinates to the workpiece datum see Datum Setting without a 3 D Touch Probe page 322 Behavior with M91 Machine datum If you want the coordinates in a positioning block to be referenced to the machine datum end the block with M91 enter them with respect to the last programmed M91 position If no M91 position is programmed in the active NC block then enter the coordinates with respect to t
266. machine tool builder With some swivel heads and tilting tables the machine tool builder determines whether the entered angles are interpreted as coordinates of the rotary axes or as angular components of a tilted plane Refer to your machine tool manual D The functions for tilting the working plane are interfaced to The TNC supports the tilting functions on machine tools with swivel heads and or tilting tables Typical applications are for example oblique holes or contours in an oblique plane The working plane is always tilted around the active datum The program is written as usual in a main plane such as the X Y plane but is executed in a plane that is tilted relative to the main plane There are three functions available for tilting the working plane 3 D ROT soft key in the Manual Operation mode and Electronic Handwheel mode see Activating manual tilting page 349 Tilting under program control Cycle G80 in the part program see User s Manual Cycles Cycle 19 WORKING PLANE Tilting under program control PLANE function in the part program see The PLANE Function Tilting the Working Plane Software Option 1 on page 285 The TNC functions for tilting the working plane are coordinate transformations The working plane is always perpendicular to the direction of the tool axis 346 Manual Operation and Setup il When tilting the working plane the TNC differentiates between two machine types Machine wit
267. mental jog positioning 318 Traversing with the HR 410 electronic handwheel 319 12 3 Spindle Speed S Feed Rate F and Miscellaneous Functions M 320 Function 320 Entering values 320 Changing the spindle speed and feed rate 321 12 4 Datum Setting without a 3 D Touch Probe 322 Note 322 Preparation 322 Workpiece presetting with axis keys 323 Datum management with the preset table 324 12 5 Using 3 D Touch Probes 330 Overview 300 Selecting probe cycles 331 Writing the measured values from touch probe cycles in datum tables 332 Writing the measured values from touch probe cycles in the preset table ie fete 12 6 Calibrating 3 D Touch Probes 334 Introduction 334 Calibrating the effective length 334 Calibrating the effective radius and compensating center misalignment 335 Displaying calibration values 336 12 7 Compensating Workpiece Misalignment with 3 D Touch Probe 337 Introduction 337 Measuring the basic rotation Go Saving the basic rotation in the preset table 338 Displaying a basic rotation 338 Canceling a basic rotation 338 HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 27 il 12 8 Datum Setting with 3 D Touch Probe 339 Overview 339 Datum setting in any axis 339 Corner as datum 340 Circle center as datum 341 Measuring Workpieces with a 3 D Touch Probe 342 Using the touch probe
268. ments adding 111 Compensating workpiece misalignment By measuring two points of a line 337 Context sensitive help 123 Contour approach 155 Contour departure 155 Conversational programming 82 Copying program sections 87 Corner rounding 162 Cylinder 254 HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 D Data backup 91 110 Data interface Pin layout 410 setting 386 Data transfer rate 386 387 Data transfer software 389 Datum management 324 Datum setting 322 without a 3 D touch probe 322 Datum setting manual Circle center as datum 341 Corner as datum 340 In any axis 339 Datum table Confirming probed values 332 Datum setting the 78 Dialog 82 Directory 92 97 Copying 99 Creating 97 Deleting 101 E Ellipse 252 Error messages 118 Help with 118 Ethernet interface Connecting and disconnecting network drives 107 Connection possibilities 391 Introduction 391 External data transfer ITNC 530 105 F PCL 23 B04 FCL function 9 Feature content level 9 Feed rate 320 Changing 321 for rotary axes M116 307 Feed rate factor for plunging movements M103 268 Feed rate in millimeters per spindle revolution M136 269 File Creating 97 File management 92 Calling 94 Copying a file 98 Deleting a file 100 Directories 92 Index Copying 99 Creating 97
269. mment block by simply If you have connected a PC keyboard to the USB pressing the key on the PC keyboard HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 111 2 Functions for editing of the comment go otmen __faitey__ Jump to beginning of comment BEGIN k Q Jump to end of comment END gt Jump to the beginning of a word Words must be nove separated by a space Jump to the end of a word Words must be nove separated by a space i 5 lt N Switch between insert mode and overwrite mM od e OVERWRITE 112 Programming Programming Aids il 4 3 Structuring Programs Definition and applications This TNC function enables you to comment part programs in structuring blocks Structuring blocks are short texts with up to 37 characters and are used as comments or headlines for the subsequent program lines With the aid of appropriate structuring blocks you can organize long and complex programs in a clear and comprehensible manner This function is particularly convenient if you want to change the program later Structuring blocks can be inserted into the part program at any point They can also be displayed in a separate window and edited or added to as desired The inserted structure items are managed by the TNC in a separate file extension SEC DEP This speeds navigation in the program structure window Displaying the program structure window Changing the active window PROGRAM To display the program
270. n Clamp and align the workpiece Insert the zero tool with known radius into the spindle Ensure that the TNC is showing the actual position values 322 Manual Operation and Setup il Workpiece presetting with axis keys Fragile workpiece If the workpiece surface must not be scratched you can lay a metal shim of known thickness d on it Then enter a tool axis datum value that is larger than the desired datum by the value d E Select the Manual Operation mode x Y Move the tool slowly until it touches scratches the workpiece surface z Select the axis Zero tool in spindle axis Set the display to a known workpiece position here 0 or enter the thickness d of the shim In the tool axis offset the tool radius Repeat the process for the remaining axes If you are using a preset tool set the display of the tool axis to the length L of the tool or enter the sum Z L d The TNC automatically saves the datum set with the axis keys in line O of the preset table HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 thout a 3 D Touch Probe ing wi E T Y 12 4 f il thout a 3 D Touch Probe ing wi E T V z 12 4 Datum management with the preset table You should definitely use the preset table if Your machine is equipped with rotary axes tilting table or swivel head and you work with the function for tilting the working plane Your machine is equipped with a spindle head changing sy
271. n F Display software numbers meoo po E m a z DIAGNOSIS Show active tool table in the test run 0 S IST 12 38 l 57 F O0VR Show active datum table in the test run oo 2 POSITION MACHINE OK CANCEL INPUT PGM TIME FE In all other modes Display software numbers Select position display Unit of measurement mm inches Programming language for MDI Select the axes for actual position capture Display operating times Ti m O L A e me O Y we LO q HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 383 7 D 2 5 hm S N a O Y N Lo q 15 2 Software Numbers Function The following software numbers are displayed on the TNC screen after the MOD functions have been selected 384 Control model Designation of the control managed by HEIDENHAIN NC software Number of the NC software managed by HEIDENHAIN NC software Number of the NC software managed by HEIDENHAIN NC Kernel Number of the NC software managed by HEIDENHAIN PLC software Number or name of the PLC software managed by your machine tool builder Feature Content Level FCL Development level of the software installed on the control see Feature content level upgrade functions on page 9 MOD Functions il 15 3 Entering Code Numbers Application The TNC requires a code number for the following functions Select user parameters 123 Configuring an Ethernet
272. n electrical signal The TNC evaluates this signal and calculates the precise actual position of the machine axis If there is a power interruption the calculated position will no longer correspond to the actual position of the machine slide To recover this association incremental position encoders are provided with reference marks The scales of the position encoders contain one or more reference marks that transmit a signal to the TNC when they are crossed over From that signal the TNC can re establish the assignment of displayed positions to machine positions For linear encoders with distance coded reference marks the machine axes need to move by no more than 20 mm for angle encoders by no more than 20 With absolute encoders an absolute position value is transmitted to the control immediately upon switch on In this way the assignment of the actual position to the machine slide position is re established directly after switch on Reference system A reference system is required to define positions in a plane or in space The position data are always referenced to a predetermined point and are described through coordinates The Cartesian coordinate system a rectangular coordinate system is based on the three coordinate axes X Y and Z The axes are mutually perpendicular and intersect at one point called the datum A coordinate identifies the distance from the datum in one of these directions A position in a plane is thus descri
273. n until it contacts the workpiece and then automatically returns to its starting point Use the axis direction keys to pre position the touch probe to a position near the second touch point on the first workpiece edge Press NC start The touch probe moves in the defined direction until it contacts the workpiece and then automatically returns to its starting point Use the axis direction keys to pre position the touch probe to a position near the first touch point on the second workpiece edge Select the probing direction via soft key Press NC start The touch probe moves in the defined direction until it contacts the workpiece and then automatically returns to its starting point Use the axis direction keys to pre position the touch probe to a position near the second touch point on the second workpiece edge Press NC start The touch probe moves in the defined direction until it contacts the workpiece and then automatically returns to its starting point Then the TNC shows the coordinates of the measured corner point Set to 0 Press the SET DATUM soft key Press the END soft key to close the menu Further information on this topic Datum setting See Datum Setting with 3 D Touch Probe on page 339 52 First Steps with the TNC 620 il 1 7 Running the First Program full sequence ie Program run 333 333 G71 Select the correct operating mode You can run programs either in the Single
274. nager window is displayed again press the SHOW TREE soft key If you press the SHOW FILES soft key the TNC shows the content of the selected directory To select another directory in the split screen display 106 Programming Fundamentals File Management il The TNC in a network To connect the Ethernet card to your network see Ethernet Interface page 391 The TNC logs error messages during network operation see Ethernet Interface page 391 If the TNC is connected to a network the directory window displays additional drives see figure All the functions described above selecting a drive copying files etc also apply to network drives provided that you have been granted the corresponding rights Connecting and disconnecting a network drive To select the program management Press the PGM MGT MGT key If necessary press the WINDOW soft key to set up the screen as It is shown at the upper right To manage the network drives Press the NETWORK soft key Second soft key row In the right hand window the TNC shows the network drives available for access With the soft keys described below you can define the connection for each drive Establish the network connection If the mie connection is active the TNC marks the Mnt DEVICE column Delete network connection UNMOUNT DEVICE Automatically establish network connection ae whenever the TNC is switched on The TNC MOUNT marks the Auto column if
275. nd Features Additional axis for 4 axes and open loop spindle Additional axis for 5 axes and open loop spindle Cylinder surface interpolation Cycles 27 28 and 29 Feed rate in mm min for rotary axes M116 Tilting the machining plane plane functions Cycle 19 and 3 D ROT soft key in the Manual Operation mode Circle in 3 axes with tilted working plane Block processing time 1 5 ms instead of 6 ms 5 axis Interpolation 3 D machining M128 Maintaining the position of the tool tip when positioning with swivel axes TCPM M144 Compensating the machine s kinematics configuration for ACTUAL NOMINAL positions at end of block Additional parameters for finishing roughing and tolerance for rotary axes in Cycle 32 G62 LN blocks 3 D compensation Touch probe cycles Compensation of tool misalignment in manual mode Compensation of tool misalignment in automatic mode Datum setting in manual mode Datum setting in automatic mode Automatic workpiece measurement Automatic tool measurement HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 TNC Model Software and Features FK free contour programming Programming in HEIDENHAIN conversational format with graphic support for workpiece drawings not dimensioned for NC Fixed cycles Peck drilling reaming boring counterboring centering Cycles 201 to 205 208 240 241 Milling of internal and external threads Cycles 262 to 265 267 I Finishing of rectangular and circular pockets and studs Cy
276. nd point The tool approaches the first contour point from the starting point The starting point must be E Programmed without radius compensation E Approachable without danger of collision E Close to the first contour point Example Figure at upper right If you set the starting point in the dark gray area the contour will be damaged when the first contour element is approached First contour point You need to program a radius compensation for the tool movement to the first contour point Approaching the starting point in the spindle axis When the starting point is approached the tool must be moved to the working depth in the spindle axis If danger of collision exists approach the starting point in the spindle axis separately Example NC blocks HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 6 3 Contour Appar and Departure 6 3 Contour applillen and Departure End point The end point should be selected so that It is E Approachable without danger of collision Near to the last contour point E In order to make sure the contour will not be damaged the optimal ending point should lie on the extended tool path for machining the last contour element Example Figure at upper right If you set the ending point in the dark gray area the contour will be damaged when the end point is approached Depart the end point in the spindle axis Program the departure from the end point in the spindle axis separately See figure at ce
277. nding on the individual machine tool the part program is executed by movement of either the tool or the machine table on which the workpiece is clamped Nevertheless you always program Li path contours as if the tool moves and the workpiece remains N stationary Z Example N50 Block number G00 Path function straight line at rapid traverse X 100 Coordinate of the end point The tool retains the Y and Z coordinates and moves to the position X 100 See figure Movement in the main planes The program block contains two coordinates The TNC thus moves the tool in the programmed plane Example The tool retains the Z coordinate and moves in the XY plane to the position X 70 Y 50 see figure Three dimensional movement The program block contains three coordinates The TNC thus moves the tool in space to the programmed position Example 152 Programming Programming Contours il Entering more than three coordinates The TNC can control up to 5 axes simultaneously software option Machining with 5 axes for example moves 3 linear and 2 rotary axes simultaneously Such programs are too complex to program at the machine however and are usually created with a CAM system Example Circles and circular arcs The TNC moves two axes simultaneously on a circular path relative to the workpiece You can define a circular movement by entering the circle center CC e amm and Q C LL os me
278. nerates an L block with the actual position coordinates Programming Programming Contours il Inserting a chamfer between two straight lines The chamfer enables you to cut off corners at the intersection of two Straight lines The line blocks before and after the G24 block must be in the same working plane as the chamfer E The radius compensation before and after the G24 block must be the same The chamfer must be machinable with the current tool CHE Chamfer side length Length of the chamfer and if ole necessary Feed rate F effective only in G24 block Example NC blocks You cannot start a contour with a G24 block A chamfer is possible only in the working plane The corner point is cut off by the chamfer and is not part of the contour 6 4 Path vontours caesien Coordinates A feed rate programmed in the CHF block is effective only in that block After the G24 block the previous feed rate becomes effective again HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 161 il 6 4 Path contours cM sian Coordinates Corner rounding G25 The G25 function is used for rounding off corners The tool moves on an arc that is tangentially connected to both the preceding and subsequent contour elements The rounding arc must be machinable with the called tool RND oi gt Rounding radius Enter the radius and if necessary Feed rate F effective only in G25 block Example NC blocks 162 In the precedin
279. ng cycle in connection with measuring cycle 3 in order to retract the stylus by means of a positioning block after it has been deflected Danger of collision If you use M141 make sure that you retract the touch probe in the correct direction M141 functions only for movements with straight line blocks Effect M141 is effective only in the block in which it is programmed M141 becomes effective at the start of the block 274 Programming Miscellaneous Functions il Automatically retract tool from the contour at an NC stop M148 Standard behavior At an NC stop the TNC stops all traverse movements The tool stops moving at the point of interruption Behavior with M148 builder The machine tool builder defines in a machine parameter the path that TNC is to traverse for a LIFTOFF command A The M148 function must be enabled by the machine tool The TNC retracts the tool by up to 30 mm in the direction of the tool axis if in the LIFTOFF column of the tool table you set the parameter Y for the active tool see Tool table Standard tool data on page 134 LIFTOFF takes effect in the following situations An NC stop triggered by you An NC stop triggered by the software e g if an error occurred in the drive system When a power interruption occurs Danger of collision Remember that especially on curved surfaces the surface can be damaged during return to the contour Back the tool off before returning
280. ng factor reduce or enlarge contour G80 Tilting the working plane G247 Datum setting Cycles for multipass milling G230 Multipass milling of smooth surfaces G231 Multipass milling of tilted surfaces G232 Face milling Non modal function Touch probe cycles for measuring workpiece misalignment G400 Basic rotation using two points G401 Basic rotation from two holes G402 Basic rotation from two studs G403 Compensate a basic rotation via a rotary axis G404 Set basic rotation G405 Compensating misalignment with the C axis Touch probe cycles for datum setting G408 Slot center reference point G409 Reference point at center of hole G410 Datum trom inside of rectangle G411 Datum from outside of rectangle G412 Datum from inside of circle G413 Datum from outside of circle G414 Datum in outside corner G415 Datum in inside corner G416 Datum circle center G417 Datum in touch probe axis G418 Datum in center of 4 holes G419 Reference point in selectable axis Touch probe cycles for workpiece measurement G55 Measure any coordinate G420 Measure any angle G421 Measure hole G422 Measure cylindrical stud G423 Measure rectangular pocket G424 Measure rectangular stud G425 Measure slot G426 Measure ridge G427 Measure any coordinate G430 Measure circle center G431 Measure any plane Touch probe cycles for tool measurement G480 Calibrating the TT G481 Measure tool length G482 Measure tool radius G483 Measure t
281. ng function press the Q key and the FORMULA soft key or use the shortcut Q Press the Q key on the ASCII keyboard 25 Enter the parameter number D gt Shift the soft key row and select the arc tangent function a Ea Shift the soft key row and open the parentheses Q 12 Enter Q parameter number 12 Select division O 13 Enter Q parameter number 13 E amp Close parentheses and conclude formula entry Example NC block Programming Q Parameters il 8 10 String Parameters String processing functions You can use the QS parameters to create variable character strings You can assign a linear sequence of characters letters numbers special characters and spaces up to a length of 256 characters to a string parameter You can also check and process the assigned or imported values by using the functions described below As in Q parameter programming you can use a total of 2000 OS parameters see also Principle and Overview on page 198 The STRING FORMULA and FORMULA O parameter functions contain various functions for processing the string parameters Assigning string parameters Page 238 Chain linking string parameters Page 238 Converting a numerical value to a string P Page 240 parameter Copying a substring from a string on Page 241 parameter Converting a string parameter to a ore Page 242 numerical value Checking a string parameter Po Page 243 Finding the leng
282. ng parameter in which the TNC is to save the copied string Confirm with the ENT key Select the function for cutting out a substring Enter the number of the QS parameter from which the substring is to be copied Confirm with the ENT key Enter the number of the place starting from which to copy the substring and confirm with the ENT key Enter the number of characters to be copied and confirm with the ENT key Close the parenthetical expression with the ENT key and confirm your entry with the END key Remember that the first character of a text sequence starts internally with the zeroth place Example A four character substring LEN4 is read from the string parameter QS10 beginning with the third character BEG2 HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 8 10 String Parameters i il n 8 10 String Parameters Converting a string parameter to a numerical value The TONUMB function converts a string parameter to a numerical value The value to be converted should be only numerical The OS parameter must contain only one numerical value Otherwise the TNC will output an error message Select Q parameter functions Select the FORMULA function Enter the number of the string parameter in which the TNC is to save the numerical value Confirm with the ENT key Shift the soft key row FORMULA ne Select the function for converting a string parameter to a numerical value TONUMB Enter the number of the O parameter to be convert
283. nk SQL access ID O parameter with the handle for identifying the result set also see SQL SELECT Data bank Index for SQL result Row number within the result set The table entries prepared in the Q parameters are written to this row If you do not enter an index the first row is written to n 0 Either enter the row number directly or program the Q parameter containing the index SQL INSERT SQL INSERT generates a new row in the result set and transfers the data prepared in the O parameters into the new row SQL INSERT takes into account all columns entered in the Select command Table columns not entered in the Select command are filled with default values ae Parameter no for result O parameter in which the SOL server reports the result 0 No error occurred 1 Error occurred incorrect handle value outside of value range or incorrect data format Data bank SQL access ID O parameter with the handle for identifying the result set also see SQL SELECT HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 Example Row number is transferred in a Q parameter m x Q 3 p J lt 5 3 o D D 5 re Q 3 3 D Q o D O lt 8 8 Accessing T with SQL Commands Example Row number is transferred in a Q parameter 231 T L z e Q O V S T 8 8 Accessing SQL COMMIT SQL COMMIT transfers all rows in the result set back to the table A lock set with SELECT FOR U
284. no Pocket number Tool length Tool radius Tool radius R2 Oversize in tool length DL Oversize in tool radius DR Oversize for tool radius DR2 Tool inhibited 0 or 1 Number of the replacement tool Maximum tool age TIME1 Maximum tool age TIME2 Current tool age CUR TIME PLC status Maximum tooth length LCUTS Maximum plunge angle ANGLE TT Number of teeth CUT TT Wear tolerance in length LTOL TT Wear tolerance in radius RTOL TT Rotational direction DIRECT O positive 1 negative TT Offset in plane R OFFS TT Offset in length L OFFS TT Break tolerance for length LBREAK TT Break tolerance in radius RBREAK PLC value Center misalignment in reference axis CAL OF1 Probe center offset in minor axis CAL OF2 Spindle angle for calibration CAL ANG Tool type for pocket table Maximum speed NMAX Tool number i Additional Functions o il EE Additional Functions 2 3 4 5 Pocket number of a tool in the 1 tool pocket table 52 2 Values programmed immediately 1 after TOOL CALL 60 BR O O1 Values programmed immediately 1 after TOOL DEF 61 AJ O Active tool compensation 200 1 216 Pocket number Pocket number Pocket number Pocket number Tool no Tool no 1 without oversize 2 with oversize 3 with oversize and oversize from TOOL CALL Special tool O no 1 yes Fixed pocket O no 1 yes Locked pocket O no 1 yes PLC status Pocket number Tool magaz
285. nt by the position display DR FAB Oversize for radius DR in the tool table Contouring without radius compensation G40 The tool center moves in the working plane along the programmed path or to the programmed coordinates Applications Drilling and boring pre positioning HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 5 3 Togpompensation i il 5 3 Tool Compensation Contouring with radius compensation G42 and G41 G43 The tool moves to the right on the programmed contour G42 The tool moves to the left on the programmed contour The tool center moves along the contour at a distance equal to the radius Right or left are to be understood as based on the direction of tool movement along the workpiece contour See figures 146 Programming Tools il Entering radius compensation Radius compensation is entered in a G01 block To select tool movement to the left of the G41 programmed contour select function G41 or To select tool movement to the right of the contour select function G42 or To select tool movement without radius compensation or to cancel radius compensation select function G40 Ei To terminate the block press the END key HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 5 3 i aii i il 5 3 Tool Compensation Radius compensation Machining corners E Outside corners If you program radius compensation the TNC moves the tool around outside corners on a transitional arc If necessary the TNC reduces the feed
286. nt level You can purchase a code number in order to permanently enable the FCL functions For more information contact your machine tool builder or HEIDENHAIN Intended place of operation The TNC complies with the limits for a Class A device in accordance with the specifications in EN 55022 and is intended for use primarily in industrially zoned areas Legal information This product uses open source software Further information is available on the control under Programming and Editing operating mode MOD function LICENSE INFO soft key HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 TNC Model Software and Features New Functions of Software 340 56x 02 New Functions of Software 340 56x 02 The PLANE function for flexible definition of a tilted working plane was introduced see The PLANE Function Tilting the Working Plane Software Option 1 on page285 The context sensitive helo system TNCguide was introduced see Calling the TNCguide on page1 24 The FUNCTION PARAX function for defining the behavior of the parallel axes U V and W was introduced see Working with the Parallel Axes U V and W on pageHIDDEN The conversational languages Estonian Korean Latvian Norwegian Romanian Slovak and Turkish were introduced see Parameter list on page404 Individual characters can now be deleted by using the backspace key see Coordinate axes and numbers Entering and editing on pages The PATTERN DEF function for defin
287. nter right Example NC blocks Common starting and end points Do not program any radius compensation if the starting point and end point are the same In order to make sure the contour will not be damaged the optimal starting point should lie between the extended tool paths for machining the first and last contour elements Example Figure at upper right If you set the starting point in the dark gray area the contour will be damaged when the first contour element is approached n s gt J 7 JA k lt s Programming Programming Contours il Tangential approach and departure With G26 figure at center right you can program a tangential approach to the workpiece and with G27 figure at lower right a tangential departure In this way you can avoid dwell marks Starting point and end point The starting point and the end point lie outside the workpiece close to the first and last contour points They are to be programmed without radius compensation Approach G26 is entered after the block in which the first contour element is programmed This will be the first block with radius compensation G41 G42 Departure G27 after the block in which the last contour element is programmed This will be the last block with radius compensation G41 G42 TNC can execute the circular path between the starting point and the first contour point as well as the last contour point an
288. nter the same IP address that you entered for the PC network settings on the ITNC e g 160 1 180 1 Enter 255 255 0 0 in the lt Subnet mask gt input field Confirm the settings with lt OK gt Save the network configuration with lt OK gt You may have to restart Windows now f Obtain ONS server address automatically od oO jm hom eb ad 4 b eb Z ad LLI I LO q f Use the following DNS server addresses Preferred DNS server Alternate ONS server 396 MOD Functions 15 6 Position Display Types Application In the Manual Operation mode and in the Program Run modes of operation you can select the type of coordinates to be displayed The figure at right shows the different tool positions Starting position Target position of the tool Workpiece datum Machine datum The TNC position displays can show the following coordinates Nominal position the value presently NOML commanded by the TNC Actual position current tool position ACTL Reference position the actual position relative to RFACTL the machine datum Reference position the nominal position relative REF NOML to the machine datum Servo lag difference between nominalandactual LAG positions following error Distance remaining to the programmed position DIST difference between actual and target positions With the MOD function Position display 1 you can select the position display in the status displ
289. ntered number of lines to the end of the APPEND V table 2nd soft key row N LINES z Copy the highlighted field 2nd soft key row copy Insert the copied field 2nd soft key row Eq N N Reset the selected line The TNC enters in all RESET columns 2nd soft key row Insert a single line at the end of the table 2nd ced soft key row LINE Delete a single line at the end of the table 2nd soft key row LINE 328 Manual Operation and Setup il Activating a datum from the preset table in the Manual Operation mode resets the active datum shift mirroring rotation and When activating a datum from the preset table the TNC scaling factor However a coordinate transformation that was programmed in Cycle 19 Tilted Working Plane or through the PLANE function remains active o Select the Manual Operation mode Display the preset table n Select the datum number you want to activate or With the GOTO key select the datum number that you want to activate Confirm with the ENT key ACTIVATE Activate the preset PRESET Confirm activation of the datum The TNC sets the display and if defined the basic rotation 5 Leave the preset table Activating the datum from the preset table in an NC program To activate datums from the preset table during program run use Cycle 247 In Cycle 247 you define the number of the datum that you want to activate see User s Manual Cycles Cycle 247 SET DATUM
290. o HEIDENHAIN Manual operation 003 000 500 000 Ona ain Our 111x nS s e u 0 S IST 10 19 138 S OVR 2 2 Visual Display Unit and Keoviger 2 2 Visual Display Unit and i ara Sets the screen layout You select the screen layout yourself In the PROGRAMMING AND EDITING mode of operation for example you can have the TNC show program blocks in the left window while the right window displays programming graphics You could also display the program structure in the right window Instead or display only program blocks in one large window The available screen windows depend on the selected operating mode To change the screen layout Press the SPLIT SCREEN key The soft key row o7 shows the available layout options see Operating Modes page 60 PROGRAM Select the desired screen layout GRAPHICS 58 Introduction il Operating panel The TNC 620 is delivered with an integrated keyboard The figure at right shows the controls and displays of the keyboard 1 File management Calculator MOD function HELP function Programming modes Machine operating modes Initiation of programming dialog Arrow keys and GOTO jump command Numerical input and axis selection Navigation keys OF PhP W N The functions of the individual keys are described on the inside front cover Machine panel buttons e g NC START or NC STOP are described in the manual for your machine tool HEIDE
291. o P Circular path corresponding Polar angle of the circle end Page 174 to active direction of rotation oint A p LO Circular arc G16 a P Circular arc with tangential Polar radius polar angle of Page 175 O connection to the preceding the arc end point contour element Helical interpolation P Combination of a circularand Polar radius polar angle of Page 176 a linear movement the arc end point coordinate of the end point in the tool axis 172 Programming Programming Contours il Zero point for polar coordinates pole I J You can define the pole CC anywhere in the part program before blocks containing polar coordinates Set the pole in the same way as you would program the circle center To program a pole press the SPEC FCT key gt Press the PROGRAM FUNCTIONS soft key Press the DIN ISO soft key Press the or J soft key Coordinates Enter Cartesian coordinates for the pole or if you want to use the last programmed position enter G29 Before programming polar coordinates define the pole You can only define the pole in Cartesian coordinates The pole remains in effect until you define a new pole Example NC blocks 6 5 Path Contours Straight line at rapid traverse G10 Straight line with feed rate G11 F The tool moves in a straight line from its current position to the straight line end point The starting point is the end point of the preceding block gt Polar coordinate radius R Enter t
292. ocket 6 Rough out SL 7 Datum shift 8 Mirror image 9 Dwell time 10 Rotation 11 Scaling 12 Program call 13 Oriented spindle stop 14 Contour definition 15 Pilot drilling SL 1 16 Contour milling SL I 17 Tapping controlled spindle 18 Thread cutting 19 Working plane 20 Contour data 21 Pilot drilling 22 Rough out Parameter 0401 feed rate factor Parameter 0404 fine roughing strategy 23 Floor finishing 24 Side finishing 25 Contour train 26 Axis specitfic scaling factor 438 X KX K X X XI XI X XI X X X X gt X lt X lt X option 08 Option 19 option 19 option 19 option 19 option 19 option 19 XI XJI XI XIX X X X X X X X X XIXI XIXI X X option 08 with MC 420 X X X XJ XJ X 27 Contour surface 28 Cylinder surface 29 Cylinder surface ridge 30 3 D data 32 Tolerance with HSC mode and TA 39 Cylinder surface external contour 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 210 Drilling Reaming Boring Universal drilling Back boring Universal pecking Tapping with floating tap holder Rigid tapping new Bore milling Tapping with chip breaking Slot with reciprocating plunge Circular slot Rectangular pocket finishing Rectangular stud finishing Circular pocket finishing Circular stud finishing Circular pattern Linear pattern Multipass
293. ocumentation provides further information Tool type Function is defined by the machine tool builder The machine tool documentation provides further information Box magazine Lock the pocket above Box magazine Lock the pocket below Box magazine Lock the pocket at left Box magazine Lock the pocket at right HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 on 5 2 Tool Data Tool number Pocket reserv Yes ENT No NOENT Special tool Fixed pocket Yes ENT No NO ENT Pocket locked Yes ENT No NO ENT PLC status Value Tool type for pocket table Lock the pocket above Lock the pocket below Lock the pocket at left Lock the pocket at right j il 5 2 Tool Data Select beginning of table Select end of table Select previous page in table Select next page in table Reset pocket table Reset tool number column T Go to beginning of the line Go to end of the line Simulate a tool change Select a tool from the tool table The TNC shows the contents of the tool table Use the arrow keys to select a tool press OK to transfer it to the pocket table Edit the current field Sort the view properties and designations of the various display filters BEGIN a m oO PAGE aie v D Qo m RESET POCKET TABLE RESET COLUMN BEGIN LINE mO SIMULATED TOOL CHANGE SELECT t EDIT CURRENT FIELD SORT D The machine manufacturer defines the feature
294. ogram interruption and with active M118 454 Error messages e g limit switch messages are still active after the error has been corrected and must be acknowledged separately The INTERNAL STOP soft key must also be pressed to cancel the program Function not available Error messages are sometimes acknowledged automatically after the error has been corrected Direct editing possible Available function Comparison Differences in Program Run traverse movements Caution Check the traverse movements NC programs that were created on earlier TNC controls may lead to different traverse movements or error messages on a TNC 620 Be sure to take the necessary care and caution when running in programs Please find a list of known differences below The list does not pretend to be complete Handwheel superimposed traverse with M118 M118 in conjunction with M128 Approach Departure with APPR DEP RO is active contour element plane is not equal to working plane Scaling approach departure movements APPR DEP RND Approach departure with APPR DEP Approach departure with APPR DEP if contour elements with length O are defined Effect of Q parameters M128 block without programmed feed rate F HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 Effective in the active coordinate system which may also be rotated or tilted or in the machine based coordinate system depending on the setting in the 3 D ROT menu for manual oper
295. ogrammed feed rate of a rotary axis in degrees min in mm programs and also in inch programs The feed rate therefore depends on the distance from the tool center to the center of axis rotation The larger this distance becomes the greater the contouring feed rate Feed rate in mm min on rotary axes with M116 The machine geometry must be specified by the machine F tool builder in the description of kinematics M116 works only on rotary tables M116 cannot be used with swivel heads If your machine is equipped with a table head combination the TNC ignores the swivel head rotary axes M116 is also effective in an active tilted working plane and in combination with M128 The TNC interprets the programmed feed rate of a rotary axis in degrees min or 1 10 inch min In this case the TNC calculates the feed for the block at the start of each block With a rotary axis the feed rate is not changed during execution of the block even if the tool moves toward the center of the rotary axis Effect M116 is effective in the working plane With M117 you can reset M116 M116 is also canceled at the end of the program M116 becomes effective at the start of block HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 11 4 b an Functions for Rotary Axes j il 11 4 vidithlaneous Functions for Rotary Axes Shorter path traverse of rotary axes M126 Standard behavior The standard behavior of the TNC while positioning rotary axes whose display has been reduced to val
296. ol axis Parameter description for the positioning behavior See Specifying the positioning behavior of the PLANE function on page 302 HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 orking Plane Software Option 1 re Tilting 11 2 The PLANE Function j il orking Plane Software Option 1 re Tilting 11 2 The PLANE Function Input parameters PROJECTED NC block Rot angle main coordinate plane Rotary angle EULPR around the Z axis see figure at top right Please note Input range 180 0000 to 180 0000 The 0 axis is the X axis Tilting angle tool axis Tilting angle EULNUT of the coordinate system around the X axis shifted by the precession angle see figure at center right Please note Input range 0 to 180 0000 The O axis is the Z axis ROT angle of the tilted plane Rotation EULROT of the tilted coordinate system around the tilted Z axis corresponds to a rotation with Cycle 10 ROTATION Use the rotation angle to simply define the direction of the X axis in the tilted machining plane see figure at bottom right Please note Input range 0 to 360 0000 The O axis is the X axis Continue with the positioning properties see Specifying the positioning behavior of the PLANE function on page 302 Abbreviations used EULER EULPR EULNU EULROT Swiss mathematician who defined these angles Precession angle angle describing the rotation of the coordinate system
297. om the result set SQL UPDATE Prepare new table row in the O parameters and transfer into the result set as a new row SQL INSERT 4 Conclude transaction f changes insertions were made the data from the result set Is placed in the table file The data is now saved in the file Any locks are canceled and the result set is released SQL COMMIT f table entries were not changed or inserted only read access any locks are canceled and the result set is released SQL ROLLBACK WITHOUT INDEX Multiple transactions can be edited at the same time of read accesses Only this guarantees that changes insertions are not lost that locks are canceled and that result sets are released You must conclude a transaction even if it consists solely HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 223 8 8 Accessing T with SQL Commands T O Q O Y gt T 8 8 Accessing Result set The selected rows are numbered in ascending order within the result set starting from 0 This numbering is referred to as the index The index is used for read and write accesses enabling a row of the result set to be specifically addressed It can often be advantageous to sort the rows in the result set Do this by specifying the table column containing the sorting criteria Also select ascending or descending order SQL SELECT ORDER BY The selected rows that were transferred to the result set are addre
298. ool length and tool radius i Special cycles H Polar coordinate angle H Rotation angle with G73 GO04 Dwell time with F seconds H Tolerance angle with M112 G36 Spindle orientation G39 Program call X coordinate of the circle center pole G62 Tolerance deviation for fast contour milling G440 Measure axis shift J Y coordinate of the circle center pole G441 Fast probing Z coordinate of the circle center pole Define machining plane Set a label number with G98 Jump to a label number Tool length with G99 G17 Working plane X Y tool axis Z G18 Working plane Z X tool axis Y G19 Working plane Y Z tool axis X G20 Tool axis IV M functions Dimensions Block number Cycle parameters in machining cycles Value or Q parameter in O parameter definition G90 Absolute dimensions G91 Incremental dimensions Unit of measure Q parameter Polar coordinate radius Circular radius with GO2 G03 G05 Rounding radius with G25 G26 G27 Tool radius with G99 G70 Inches set at start of program G71 Millimeters set at start of program Other G functions Spindle speed Oriented spindle stop with G36 G29 Transfer the last nominal position value as a pole circle center G38 STOP program run G51 Next tool number with central tool file G79 Cycle call G98 Set label number G Tool definition with G99 Tool call Next tool with G51 Axis parallel to X axis Axis parallel to Y axis Axis parallel to Z axis Non modal function Progra
299. or key to show the selected page If the text window at right is active If the cursor is on a link jump to the linked page If the table of contents at left is active Switch the tab between the display of the table of contents display of the subject index and the full text search function and switching to the screen half at right If the text window at right is active Jump back to the window at left If the table of contents at left is active Select the entry above it or below it If the text window at right is active Jump to the next link HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 4 7 Context Sensi vous System j il Select the page last shown Page forward if you have used the select page last shown function lp System Move up by one page Move down by one page Display or hide table of contents Switch between full screen display and reduced display With the reduced display you can see some of the rest of the TNC window The focus is switched internally to the TNC WEEE application so that you can operate the control when the TNCguide is open If the full screen is active the TNC reduces the window size automatically before the change of focus Close the TNCguide 2 O eb ad gt K eb ad Q Q N a 126 Programming Programming Aids il Subject index The most important subjects in the Manual are listed in the subject rir Inhalt Index Suchen index Index tab You can
300. ou can now define a tool name also for the coarse roughing tool see User s Manual Cycles The additional status display has been revised The following improvements have been introduced see Additional status displays on page65 A new overview page with the most important status displays were introduced The tolerance values set in Cycle 32 are displayed The pocket stud and slot milling cycles 210 to 214 were removed from the standard soft key row CYCL DEF gt POCKETS STUDS SLOTS For reasons of compatibility the cycles will still be available and can be selected via the GOTO key With Cycle 25 Contour Train closed contours can now also be programmed Tool changes are now also possible during mid program startup Language dependent tables can now be output with FN16 F Print The soft key structure of the SPEC FCT function was changed and adapted to the iTNC 530 HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 Changed Functions of Software 340 56x 02 Z0 X9G OVE BABMYOS JO suoippuny pobueyy 12 Table of Contents HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 First Steps with the TNC 620 introduction Besramming Fundamentals File Programming Aids Programming Tools Programming Programming Contours Programming Subprograms and rogram Section Repeats 1 Programming Q Parameters 1 Programming Miscellaneous Functions 1 Programming Special Functions Programming Multiple Axis Machining 7 Manual Operation and Setup 1 Positioning with
301. ous Functions for Coordinate Data 262 Programming machine referenced coordinates M91 M92 262 Moving to positions in a non tilted coordinate system with a tilted working plane M130 264 9 4 Miscellaneous Functions for Contouring Behavior 265 Machining small contour steps M97 265 Machining open contours corners M98 267 Feed rate factor for plunging movements M103 268 Feed rate in millimeters per spindle revolution M136 269 Feed rate for circular arcs M109 M110 M111 269 Calculating the radius compensated path in advance LOOK AHEAD M120 270 Superimposing handwheel positioning during program run M118 272 Retraction from the contour in the tool axis direction M140 213 Suppressing touch probe monitoring M141 274 Automatically retract tool from the contour at an NC stop M148 275 24 10 1 Overview of Special Functions 278 Main menu for SPEC FCT special functions 278 Program defaults menu 279 Functions for contour and point machining menu 279 Menu of various DIN ISO functions 280 10 2 Defining DIN ISO Functions 281 Overview 281 HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 25 il 11 1 Functions for Multiple Axis Machining 284 11 2 The PLANE Function Tilting the Working Plane Software Option 1 285 Introduction 285 Define the PLANE function 287 Position display 287 Reset the PLANE function 288 Defining
302. ous ung for Contouring Behavior j il 9 4 Miscellaneous run lns for Contouring Behavior Calculating the radius compensated path in advance LOOK AHEAD M120 Standard behavior If the tool radius is larger than the contour step that is to be machined with radius compensation the TNC interrupts program run and generates an error message M97 see Machining small contour steps M97 on page 265 inhibits the error message but this results in dwell marks and will also move the corner If the programmed contour contains undercut features the tool may damage the contour Behavior with M120 The TNC checks radius compensated paths for contour undercuts and tool path intersections and calculates the tool path in advance from the current block Areas of the contour that might be damaged by the tool are not machined dark areas in figure You can also use M120 to calculate the radius compensation for digitized data or data created on an external programming system This means that deviations from the theoretical tool radius can be compensated Use LA Look Ahead after M120 to define the number of blocks maximum 99 that you want the TNC to calculate in advance Note that the larger the number of blocks you choose the higher the block processing time will be Input If you enter M120 in a positioning block the TNC continues the dialog for this block by asking you the number of blocks LA that are to be calculated in advance
303. ow LOG FILES ERROR LOG PREVIOUS FILE CURRENT FILE Press the LOG FILES soft key To open the error log press the ERROR LOG FILE soft key If you need the previous log file press the PREVIOUS FILE soft key If you need the current log file press the CURRENT FILE soft key The oldest entry is at the beginning of the error log file and the most recent entry is at the end 120 Programming Programming Aids il Keystroke log The TNC stores keystrokes and important events e g system startup in a keystroke log The capacity of the keystroke log is limited If the keystroke log Is full the control switches to a second keystroke log It this second file becomes full the first keystroke log is cleared and written to again and so on To view the keystroke history switch between CURRENT FILE and PREVIOUS FILE Press the LOG FILES soft key LOG FILES To open the keystroke log file press the KEYSTROKE KEYSTROKE Los LOG FILE soft key eae If you need the previous log Tile press the PREVIOUS FILE FILE soft key ae If you need the current log file press the CURRENT FILE FILE soft key The TNC saves each key pressed during operation in a keystroke log The oldest entry is at the beginning and the most recent entry Is at the end of the file Overview of the buttons and soft keys for viewing the log files Go to beginning of log file BEGIN Ea
304. piece blank TOOL CALL O lt B CYCL DEF DRILLING THREAD 200 Glo X jo Glo Call the tool Enter the tool data Confirm each of your entries with the ENT key Do not forget the tool axis Press the L key to open a program block for a linear movement Press the left arrow key to switch to the input range for G codes Press the GO soft key if you want to enter a rapid traverse motion Retract the tool Press the orange axis key Z in order to get clear in the tool axis and enter the value for the position to be approached e g 250 Confirm with the ENT key Confirm Radius comp RL RR no comp by pressing the ENT key Activate the radius compensation Confirm Miscellaneous function M with the END key The TNC saves the entered positioning block Call the cycle menu Display the drilling cycles Select the standard drilling cycle 200 The TNC starts the dialog for cycle definition Enter all parameters requested by the TNC step by step and conclude each entry with the ENT key In the screen to the right the TNC also displays a graphic showing the respective cycle parameter Move to the first drilling position Enter the coordinates of the drilling position switch on the coolant and spindle and call the cycle with M99 Move to the subsequent drilling positions Enter the coordinates of the respective drilling positions and call the cycle with M99 Retract the tool Press the orange axis key Z in orde
305. pindle orientation Angle for polar coordinates rotation tilting the working plane Polar coordinate angle for helical interpolation CP Datum numbers in Cycle 7 Scaling factor in Cycles 11 and 26 Miscellaneous functions M Q parameter numbers Q parameter values Surface normal vectors N and T with 3 D compensation Labels LBL for program jumps Labels LBL for program jumps Number of program section repeats REP Error number with Q parameter function FN14 418 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 5 4 places before and after the decimal point mm O to 32 767 9 5 1 16 characters enclosed by quotation marks with TOOL CALL Permitted special characters amp 99 9999 to 99 9999 2 4 mm O to 99 999 999 5 3 rom O to 99 999 999 5 3 mm min or mm tooth or mm rev O to 3600 000 4 3 s 99 9999 to 99 9999 2 4 mm O to 360 0000 3 4 360 0000 to 360 0000 3 4 5 400 0000 to 5 400 0000 4 4 O to 2999 4 0 0 000 001 to 99 999 999 2 6 O to 999 3 0 O to 1999 4 0 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 5 4 9 99999999 to 9 99999999 1 8 O to 999 3 0 Any text string in quotes 1 to 65 534 5 0 O to 1099 4 0 Tables and Overviews il 16 4 Exchanging the Buffer Battery A buffer battery supplies the TNC with current to prevent the data in RAM memory from being lost when the TNC is switched off If the TNC displays the error message Exchange b
306. preset table has the name PRESET PR and is saved in the directory TNC table Select any probe function Enter the desired coordinates of the datum in the appropriate input boxes depends on the touch probe cycle being run Enter the preset number in the Number in table input box Press the ENTER IN PRESET TABLE soft key The TNC saves the datum in the preset table under the entered number HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 12 5 Using 3 D Touch Probes j il 12 6 Calibrating 3 D Touch Probes 12 6 Calibrating 3 D Touch Probes Introduction In order to precisely specify the actual trigger point of a 3 D touch probe you must calibrate the touch probe otherwise the TNC cannot provide precise measuring results Always calibrate a touch probe in the following cases Commissioning Stylus breakage Stylus exchange Change in the probe feed rate Irregularities caused for example when the machine heats up Change of active tool axis During calibration the TNC finds the effective length of the stylus and the effective radius of the ball tio To calibrate the 3 D touch probe clamp a ring gauge of known height and known internal radius to the machine table Calibrating the effective length The effective length of the touch probe is always referenced to the tool datum The machine tool builder usually defines the spindle tip as the tool datum Set the datum in the spindle axis such that for the machine tool t
307. probing direction Position the touch probe approximately in the center of the circle PROBING Select the probe function by pressing the PROBING CC soft key To probe the workpiece press the machine START button four times The touch probe touches four points on the inside of the circle Datum In the menu window enter both coordinates of the circle center confirm with the SET DATUM soft key or write the values to a table see Writing the measured values from touch probe cycles in datum tables page 332 or see Writing the measured values from touch probe cycles in the preset table page 333 To terminate the probe function press the END soft key Outside circle Position the touch probe at a position near the first touch point outside of the circle Select the probe direction by soft key To probe the workpiece press the machine START button Repeat the probing process for the remaining three points See figure at lower right Datum Enter the coordinates of the datum and confirm your entry with the SET DATUM soft key or write the values to a table see Writing the measured values from touch probe cycles in datum tables page 332 or see Writing the measured values from touch probe cycles in the preset table page 333 To terminate the probe function press the END soft key After the probing procedure is completed the TNC displays the coordinates of the circle center and the circle radius PR HEIDENH
308. r to get clear in the tool axis and enter the value for the position to be approached e g 250 Confirm with the ENT key Confirm Radius comp RL RR no comp by pressing the ENT key Do not activate the radius compensation Confirm Miscellaneous function M Enter M2 to end the program and confirm with the END key The TNC saves the entered positioning block HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 100 90 10 20 80 90 100 Program run Programming CYCLE With Q parameters full sequence N150 T3 G17 51500 N16 GOO Z 200 G40 M3 Q200 2 SET UP CLEARANCE DEPT Q206 150 gt FEED RATE FOR PLNGNG Q202 5 gt PLUNGING DEPTH Q210 0 DWELL TIME AT TOP Q203 0 SURFACE COORDINATE Q204 50 72ND SET UP CLEARANCE Q211 0 DWELL TIME AT DEPTH N16 GOO X 55 Y 80 G40 M99 N15 G01 Z 100 G40 M30 N99999999 x333 Gl 43 1 3 Programming the First T 1 3 Programming the First _ m x D 3 D Z O T e zA A Definition of workpiece blank Tool call Retract the tool Define the cycle Spindle and coolant on call cycle Call the cycle Call the cycle Call the cycle Retract in the tool axis end program A 4 First Steps with the TNC 620 il 1 4 Graphically Testing the First Part Select the correct operating mode You can test programs only in the Test Run mode CYCL DEF 4 1 SET UPZ2 Press the operating modes key The TNC goes into GCL DEF 4 8
309. ram call a separate program for execution Programming with subprograms and program section repeats is described in Chapter 7 150 Programming Programming Contours il Programming with Q parameters Instead of programming numerical values in a part program you enter markers called Q parameters You assign the values to the Q parameters separately with the Q parameter functions You can use the Q parameters for programming mathematical functions that control program execution or describe a contour In addition parametric programming enables you to measure with the 3 D touch probe during program run Programming with Q parameters is described in Chapter 8 HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 e m a Q gt e 8 j il 2 6 2 Fundamentals of Path oO Functions J Programming tool movements for workpiece LL machining a ara You create a part program by programming the path functions for the y 1e individual contour elements in sequence You usually do this by 0 entering the coordinates of the end points of the contour x t elements given in the production drawing The TNC calculates the actual path of the tool from these coordinates and from the tool data and radius compensation 5 The TNC moves all axes programmed in a single block simultaneously ne T Movement parallel to the machine axes The program block contains only one coordinate The TNC thus moves P the tool parallel to the programmed axis O Depe
310. ramming dialog Some M functions can be programmed with additional parameters In this case the dialog is continued for the parameter input In the Manual Operation and Electronic Handwheel modes of operation the M functions are entered with the M soft key the start of a positioning block and others at the end Please note that some M functions become effective at regardless of their position in the NC block M functions come into effect in the block in which they are called some M functions are effective only in the block in which they are programmed Unless the M function is only effective blockwise either you must cancel it in a subsequent block with a separate M function or it is automatically canceled by the TNC at the end of the program Entering an M function in a STOPP block If you program a STOPP block the program run or test run is interrupted at the block for example for tool inspection You can also enter an M function in a STOPP block To program an interruption of program run press the STOPP key Enter a miscellaneous function M Example NC blocks 260 Programming Miscellaneous Functions il 9 2 Miscellaneous Functions for Program Run Control Spindle and Coolant Overview MO Stop program run Spindle STOP Coolant OFF M1 Optional program STOP Spindle STOP Coolant OFF M2 Stop program run Spindle STOP Coolant OFF Go to block 1 Clear the status display dependent on the clearMode
311. rate at outside corners to reduce machine stress for example at very great changes of direction E Inside corners The TNC calculates the intersection of the tool center paths at inside corners under radius compensation From this point it then starts the next contour element This prevents damage to the workpiece The permissible tool radius therefore is limited by the geometry of the programmed contour 148 Programming Tools Programming Programming Contours a J a Q gt O 8 6 1 Tool Movements Path functions A workpiece contour is usually composed of several contour elements such as straight lines and circular arcs With the path functions you can program the tool movements for straight lines and circular arcs Miscellaneous functions M With the TNC s miscellaneous functions you can affect the program run e g a program Interruption the machine functions such as switching spindle rotation and coolant supply on and oft the path behavior of the tool Subprograms and program section repeats If a machining sequence occurs several times in a program you can save time and reduce the chance of programming errors by entering the sequence once and then defining it as a Subprogram or program section repeat If you wish to execute a specific program section only under certain conditions you also define this machining sequence as a subprogram In addition you can have a part prog
312. rcle center for the secondary axes U V and W Entering the circle center incrementally If you enter the circle center with incremental coordinates you have programmed it relative to the last programmed position of the tool The only effect of CC is to define a position as circle center The tool does not move to this position The circle center is also the pole for polar coordinates HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 163 il 6 4 Path Contours c Mlsian Coordinates Circular path C around circle center CC Before pro gramming a circular arc you must first enter the circle center I J The last programmed tool position will be the starting point of the arc Direction of rotation In clockwise direction G02 In counterclockwise direction G03 Without arc with Move th Wid programmed direction G05 The TNC traverses the circular the last programmed direction of rotation e tool to the circle starting point Enter the coordinates of the circle center Enter the coordinates of the arc end point and if necessary Feed rate F Miscellaneous function M The TNC normally makes circular movements in the active working plane If you program circular arcs that do not lie in the active working plane for example G2 Z X with a tool axis Z and at the same time rotate this movement then the TNC moves the tool in a spatial arc which means a circular arc in 3 axes Example NC blocks Full circle For the end point
313. rcular in 2 axes Circular in 3 axes with tilted working plane software option 1 Helical superimposition of circular and straight paths 6 ms 3 D straight line without radius compensation 1 5 ms software option 2 Position loop resolution Signal period of the position encoder 1024 Cycle time of position controller 3 ms Cycle time of speed controller 600 us Maximum 100 m 3937 inches Maximum 100 000 rom analog soeed command signal Linear and nonlinear axis error backlash reversal spikes during circular movements thermal expansion Stick slip friction One each RS 232 C V 24 max 115 kilobaud Expanded data Interface with LSV 2 protocol for remote operation of the TNC through the data interface with the HEIDENHAIN software TNCremo Ethernet interface 100BaseT Approx 2 to 5 megabaud depending on file type and network load 2 x USB 1 1 Tables and Overviews il Ambient temperature E Operation 0 C to 45 C E Storage 30 C to 70 C Electronic handwheels E One HR 410 portable handwheel or E One HR 130 panel mounted handwheel or E Up to three HR 150 panel mounted handwheels via HRA 110 handwheel adapter Touch probes m TS 220 3 D touch trigger probe with cable connection or E TS 440 3 D touch trigger probe with infrared transmission E TS 444 Battery free 3 D touch trigger probe with infrared transmission m TS 640 3 D touch trigger probe with infrared transmission m TS 740 High precision 3 D touch trigger p
314. robe with infrared transmission m TT 140 3 D touch trigger probe for workpiece measurement _Software option 1 option number 08 Rotary table machining Programming of cylindrical contours as if in two axes Feed rate in mm min 16 3 Technical Information Coordinate transformation Tilting the working plane Interpolation Circle in 3 axes with tilted working plane 3 D machining Motion control with very little jerk HSC filter 3 D tool compensation through surface normal vectors only 1TNC 530 Keeping the tool normal to the contour Tool radius compensation normal to the tool direction Interpolation Linear in 5 axes Subject to export permit Block processing time 1 5ms _Touch probe function option number 17 Touch probe cycles Compensation of tool misalignment in manual mode Compensation of tool misalignment in automatic mode Cycles 400 to 405 Datum setting in manual mode Datum setting in automatic mode Cycles 410 419 Automatic workpiece measurement Cycles 420 427 430 431 0 1 Automatic tool measurement Cycles 480 483 HEIDENHAIN DNC option number 18 Communication with external PC applications over COM component HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 415 il FK free contour programming Programming in HEIDENHAIN conversational format with graphic support for workpiece drawings not dimensioned for NC Fixed cycles Peck drilling reaming boring counterboring centerin
315. rotation Retract the tool automatically from the contour at NC stop Cancel M148 Tool movements GOO G01 G02 G03 G05 G06 G07 G10 G11 G12 G13 G15 G16 Straight line interpolation Cartesian coordinates rapid traverse Straight line interpolation Cartesian coordinates Circular interpolation Cartesian coordinates clockwise Circular interpolation Cartesian coordinates counterclockwise Circular interpolation Cartesian coordinates without indication of direction Circular interpolation Cartesian coordinates tangential contour approach Paraxial positioning block Straight line interpolation polar coordinates rapid traverse Straight line interpolation polar coordinates Circular interpolation polar coordinates clockwise Circular interpolation polar coordinates counterclockwise Circular interpolation polar coordinates without indication of direction Circular interpolation polar coordinates tangential contour approach Chamfer Rounding Approach contour Depart contour G24 G25 G26 G27 Chamfer with length R Corner rounding with radius R Tangential contour approach with radius R Tangential contour approach with radius R Tool definition G99 With tool number T length L radius R i Tool radius compensation G40 No tool radius compensation G41 Tool radius compensation left of the contour G42 Tool radius compensation right of the contour G43 Paraxial compensation for
316. ry space for Take the time occasionally to delete any unneeded Tiles so system files such as the tool table HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 runa ipentals 3 3 File Management th the i1gfllanager ing wi 3 4 Work 3 4 Working with the File Manager Directories To ensure that you can easily find your files we recommend that you organize your hard disk into directories You can divide a directory into further directories which are called subdirectories With the key or ENT you can show or hide the subdirectories Paths A path indicates the drive and all directories and subdirectories under which a file is saved The individual names are separated by a backslash The path including all drive characters directories and the file name cannot exceed 256 characters Example The directory AUFTR1 was created on the TNC drive Then in the AUFTR1 directory the directory NCPROG was created and the part EES TNCA program PROG1 H was copied into it The part program now has the l following path t AUFTRI TNC AUFTR1 NCPROG PROG1 H DE NCPROG The chart at right illustrates an example of a directory display with C WZTAB different paths KAR25T 92 Programming Fundamentals File Management il Overview Functions of the file manager Copy a file Display a specific file type Create new file Display the last 10 files that were selected Delete a file or directory Tag a f
317. s The machine tool manual provides further information 142 Programming Tools Calling tool data A TOOL CALL block in the part program is defined with the following data Select the tool call function with the TOOL CALL key TOOL 07 10 E Tool number Enter the number or name of the tool The tool must already be defined in a G99 block or in the tool table Press the TOOL NAME soft key to enter the name The TNC automatically places the tool name in quotation marks The tool name always refers to the entry in the active tool table TOOL T If you wish to call a tool with other compensation values also enter the index you defined in the tool table after the decimal point There is a SELECT soft key for calling a window from which you can select a tool defined in the tool table TOOL T directly without having to enter the number or name Working spindle axis X Y Z Enter the tool axis Spindle speed S Enter the spindle speed in rom Alternatively you can define the cutting speed Vc in m min Press the VC soft key Feed rate F F mm min or 0 1 inch min is effective until you program a new feed rate in a positioning or T block Tool length oversize DL Enter the delta value for the tool length Tool radius oversize DR Enter the delta value for the tool radius Tool radius oversize DR2 Enter the delta value for the tool radius 2 Example Tool call Call tool number 5 in the tool axis Z with a spindle speed of 250
318. s the machining time as soon as a new BLK form G30 G3 is evaluated 364 Test Run and Program Run il 14 2 Show the Workpiece in the Working Space Application This MOD function enables you to graphically check the position of the workpiece blank or reference point in the machine s working space and to activate work space monitoring in the Test Run mode of operation with the Advanced graphic features software option This function is activated with the BLANK IN WORKSPACE soft key You can activate or deactivate the function with the SW limit monitoring soft key 2nd soft key row Another transparent cuboid represents the workpiece blank Its dimensions are shown in the BLK FORM table The TNC takes the dimensions from the workpiece blank definition of the selected program The workpiece cuboid defines the coordinate system for input Its datum lies within the traverse range cuboid For a test run it normally does not matter where the workpiece blank is located within the working space However if you activate working space monitoring you must graphically shift the workpiece blank so that It lies within the working space Use the soft keys shown in the table You can also activate the current datum for the Test Run operating mode see the last line of the following table Shift workpiece blank in positive negative X direction direction x Shift workpiece blank in positive negative Y _ Shift workpiece bl
319. select them directly by mouse or with the SchiUsseluor t probes 7 3 D compensation fl Cursor keys Delta values Face milling The following touch probe cycles are available in the manual modet Normalized vector Calibrate the effective length Calibrating the effective length Peripheral millin alibrate the effective lengi Sie alibrating the effective lengi he left side is active Tool orientation Calibrate the effective radius PROBING Calibrating the effective radius and compensating 3 D data center misalignment 3 D touch probes S e ect th e I ndex ta b gt i Sa naona Measure a basic rotation using a line ma Triggering Managing more tha Set the reference point in any axis PROBING Activate the Keyword input field Accessories an ches at Enter the word for the desired subject and the TNC orc es ae i ray lee s aiue synchronizes the index and creates a list in which you Angie measuring i Seams soe NESE ASCII files DLD can find the subject more easily or Pu ted TE Sus tios MESE pee roo using two PROBING Setting datum points using holes cylindrical studs Automatic tool mea ey U S e th e a rrow key to h ig h ig ht th e d es i red keywo rd a a RESTA Bus datum using four holes cylindrical ae Setting datum points using holes cylindrical studs Back boring Basic rotation Set a circ Measurina durina Z holes cyli Use the
320. sired path of tool departure from the contour Enter the requested path that the tool should follow when departing the contour or press the MB MAX soft key to move to the limit of the traverse range In addition you can program the feed rate at which the tool traverses the entered path If you do not enter a feed rate the TNC moves the tool along the entered path at rapid traverse Effect M140 is effective only in the block in which it is programmed M140 becomes effective at the start of the block Example NC blocks Block 250 Retract the tool 50 mm from the contour Block 251 Move the tool to the limit of the traverse range M140 is also effective if the tilted working plane function or M128 is active On machines with tilting heads the TNC then moves the tool in the tilted coordinate system With M140 MB MAX you can only retract In positive direction Always define a TOOL CALL with a tool axis before entering M140 otherwise the direction of traverse is not defined HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 9 4 Miscellaneous ung for Contouring Behavior C il 9 4 Miscellaneous run lns for Contouring Behavior Suppressing touch probe monitoring M141 Standard behavior When the stylus is deflected the TNC outputs an error message as soon as you attempt to move a machine axis Behavior with M141 The TNC moves the machine axes even if the touch probe is deflected This function is required if you wish to write your own measuri
321. ssed with the HANDLE All following SOL commands use the handle to refer to this set of selected columns and rows When concluding a transaction the handle is released SQL COMMIT or SQL ROLLBACK It is then no longer valid You can edit more than one result set at the same time The SQL server assigns a new handle for each Select command Binding Q parameters to columns The NC program does not have direct access to the table entries in the result set The data must be transferred in Q parameters In the other direction the data is first prepared in the Q parameters and then transferred to the result set Specify with SQL BIND which table columns are mapped to which Q parameters The Q parameters are bound assigned to the columns Columns that are not bound to O parameters are not included in the read write processes If anew table row is generated with SQL INSERT the columns not bound to Q parameters are filled with default values 224 SOL Q5 SELECT Tabelle ABC Dateiver waltung SOL FETCH Q1 HANDLE Q 1234 Q5 Handle fur selektierte Daten SQL Server Programming Q Parameters Programming SQL commands Program SOL commands in the Programming mode Call the SQL functions by pressing the SOL soft key SAL Select an SOL command via soft key see overview or press the SQL EXECUTE soft key and program the SOL command Overview of the soft keys SOL
322. stem Up to now you have been working with older TNC controls with REF based datum tables You wish to machine identical workpieces that are differently aligned The preset table can contain any number of lines datums To optimize the file size and the processing speed you should use only as many lines as you need for datum management For safety reasons new lines can be inserted only at the end of the preset table Saving the datums in the preset table The preset table has the name PRESET PR and is saved in the directory TNC table PRESET PR is editable in the Manual and E1 Handwheel modes only if the CHANGE PRESET soft key was pressed It is permitted to copy the preset table into another directory for data backup Lines that were written by your machine tool builder are also always write protected in the copied tables You therefore cannot edit them Never change the number of lines in the copied tables That could cause problems when you want to reactivate the table To activate the preset table copied to another directory you have to copy it back to the directory TNC table 324 Comment Manual operation Programming NO a DOC x y Z 1 6476 M 1 6476 0 0 s 1 6476 0 v 4D 0 0 T 0 0 4 amp 0 93 749 a 75 18907 65 34493 67 5 1 3 16382 7 67823 65 87356 2 21 94612 13 93953 65 87356 3 16 87879 3 59437 146 09302 2 4 3 26756
323. sting depth 187 Subprogram within a subprogram 188 Repeating program section repeats 189 Repeating a subprogram 190 7 6 Programming Examples 191 HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 21 il 8 1 Principle and Overview 198 Programming notes 199 Calling OQ parameter functions 200 8 2 Part Families O Parameters in Place of Numerical Values 201 Function 201 8 3 Describing Contours through Mathematical Operations 202 Application 202 Overview 202 Programming fundamental operations 203 8 4 Trigonometric Functions 204 Definitions 204 Programming trigonometric functions 205 8 5 If Then Decisions with Q Parameters 206 Application 206 Unconditional jumps 206 Programming If Then decisions 206 8 6 Checking and Changing O Parameters 207 Procedure 207 8 7 Additional Functions 208 Overview 208 D14 ERROR Displaying error messages 209 D18 Read system data 213 D19 PLC Transfer values to the PLC 221 8 8 Accessing Tables with SOL Commands 222 Introduction 222 A Transaction 223 Programming SOL commands 225 Overview of the soft keys 225 SOL BIND 226 SOL SELECT cue 227 SOL FETC Ases 230 SOL UPDATE 231 SOL INSERT 231 SOL COMMIT 232 SOL ROLLBACK 232 8 9 Entering Formulas Directly 253 Entering formulas 233 Rules for formulas 23
324. sue error message Off No error message Display the Enter a negative depth error message On Issue error message Off No error message Behavior when moving to wall of slot in the cylinder surface LineNormal Approach on a straight line CircleTangential Approach on a circular path M function for spindle orientation 1 Spindle orientation directly by the NC 0 Function inactive 1 to 999 Number of the M function for spindle orientation Geometry filter for culling linear elements Type of stretch filter Off No filter active ShortCut Omit individual points on a polygon Average The geometry filter smoothes corners Maximum distance of the filtered to the unfiltered contour 0 to 10 mm The filtered points lie within this tolerance to the resulting new path Maximum length of the path as a result of filtering 0 to 1000 mm Length over which geometry filtering is active 408 Tables and Overviews il Settings for the NC editor Generate backup files TRUE Generate backup file after editing NC programs FALSE Do not generate backup file after editing NC programs Behavior of the cursor after deletion of lines TRUE Cursor is placed on the preceding line after deletion ITNC behavior FALSE Cursor is placed on the following line after deletion Behavior of the cursor on the first or last line TRUE Cursor jumps from end to beginning of program FALSE Cursor does not jump from end to beginning of program Line break with mu
325. t block is a linear block it is dealt with in the same way as an additional radius compensation block so that the path will be contour parallel from the next but one linear block The tool is positioned above the last position that has been completely machined Last positioning block in the working plane does not necessarily need to contain both coordinates of the working plane Can cause problems with RND or CHF blocks Error message is issued Error message is issued if a contour element with length 0 is located before the RND or CHF block Contour element with length 0 is ignored if the contour element with length O is located after the RND or CHF block The algebraic sign of the direction of rotation is used if the sign defined for DR differs from the one defined for IPA Is executed can lead to undefined movements 5 axis movements before contour elements that are defined with a tangent at the starting point e g CT 5 axis movements before approach departure movements Tool radius compensation on circular arc or helix with angular length O Checking the algebraic sign of the depth parameter in fixed cycles Tool change while tool radius compensation is active HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 Error message is issued Error message is issued The transition between the adjacent elements of the arc helix is generated Also the tool axis motion is executed right before this transition If the element is the first or
326. t key to call the If Then conditions The TNC then displays the following soft keys D09 IF EQUAL JUMP Example D09 PO1 Q1 P02 Q3 P03 SPCAN25 oTo If the two values or parameters are equal jump to the given label D10 IF UNEQUAL JUMP T Example D10 P01 10 P02 Q5 P03 10 GOTO If the two values or parameters are unequal jump to the given label D11 IF GREATER JUMP on Example D11 P01 Q1 P02 10 P03 5 GoTo If the first value or parameter is greater than the second jump to the given label D12 IF LESS JUMP oe Example D12 P01 Q5 P02 0 P03 ANYNAME GoTo If the first value or parameter is less than the second jump to the given label 206 Programming Q Parameters il 8 6 Checking and Changing Q Parameters Procedure You can check Q parameters when writing testing and running Program run Programming full sequence programs in all operating modes and except in the test run edit them EX4 H If you are in a program run interrupt it if required for example by BLK FORM 0 2 x 50 V100 Z E FN 0 Q055 200 STARTING ANGLE L X 5 F500 ee MODE ie ss 8 Geer i L IX 75 Q parameter list 10 FCT DR CCX 75 CCY pressing the machine STOP button and the INTERNAL STOP soft key If you are in a test run interrupt it WOOVNOUBUONe To call Q parameter functions Press the Q INFO soft 21 Fer merze o From a fae tog Bdo 4 13 FLT AN 270 ee iiZA key in the Progr
327. t the probe direction perpendicular to the angle reference axis Select the axis by soft key To probe the workpiece press the machine START button Position the touch probe at a position near the second touch point To probe the workpiece press the machine START button The TNC determines the basic rotation and displays the angle after the dialog Rotation angle Activate basic rotation Press the SET BASIC ROTATION soft key Terminate the probe function by pressing the END soft key HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 12 7 Compensating wore Misalignment with 3 D Touch Probe j il Saving the basic rotation in the preset table After the probing process enter the preset number in which the TNC is to save the active basic rotation in the Number in table input box Press the ENTRY IN PRESET TABLE soft key to save the basic rotation in the preset table Displaying a basic rotation The angle of the basic rotation appears after ROTATION ANGLE whenever PROBING ROT is selected The TNC also displays the rotation angle in the additional status display STATUS POS Manual operation Programming aL WE 3 ation Rotation angle Angle of probed surface In the status display a symbol is shown for a basic rotation whenever the TNC is moving the axes according to a basic rotation 1st meas point 1st axis 1st meas point 2nd axis 2nd meas point 1st axis 2nd meas point 2nd axis ATi Number in table Canceling a
328. tarts up Devices not automatically mounted can be mounted anytime later in the program management It uses the communications protocol according to RFC You do not need to indicate the protocol with the TNC 620 894 HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 15 5 Ethernet Interface j il Settings on a PC with Windows 2000 Internet Protocol TCP IP Properties 2 x p Prerequisite eee The network card must already be installed on the PC and ou can get IF settings assigned automatically if your network supports rea dy for operation this capability Othenvise you need to ask your network administrator for the appropriate IF settings If the PC that you want to connect the TNC to is already integrated in your company network then keep the PC s Obtain an IP address automatically network address and adapt the TNC s network address Use the following IP address accordingly peda 160 1 180 subnet mask 250 255 0 To open Network Connections click lt Start gt lt Control Panel gt Default gateway lt Network and Dial up Connections gt and then Network Connections Right click the lt LAN connection gt symbol and then lt Properties gt in the menu that appears Double click lt Internet Protocol TCP IP gt to change the IP settings see figure at top right If it is not yet active select the lt Use the following IP address gt option Advanced In the lt IP address gt input field e
329. te values Feed rates Spindle speeds Cycle data Q parameters also enable you to program contours that are defined with mathematical functions You can also use O parameters to make the execution of machining steps depend on logical conditions Q parameters are designated by letters and a number between 0 and 1999 Parameters that take effect in different manners are available Please refer to the following table Freely applicable parameters as long as no Q0 to Q99 overlapping with SL cycles can occur globally effective for all programs stored in the TNC memory Parameters for special TNC functions Q100 to Q199 Parameters that are primarily used for cycles Q200 to Q1199 globally effective for all programs stored in the TNC memory Parameters that are primarily used for OEM Q1200 to Q1399 cycles globally effective for all programs stored in the TNC memory This may require coordination with the machine manufacturer or supplier 198 Programming Q Parameters il Parameters that are primarily used for Q1400 to Q1499 call active OEM cycles globally effective for all programs that are stored in the TNC memory Parameters that are primarily used for Q1500 to Q1599 Def active OEM cycles globally effective for all programs that are stored in the TNC memory Freely applicable parameters globally effective Q1600 to Q1999 for all programs stored in the TNC memory QS parameters the S stands for string are also available on t
330. ter M118 in a positioning block the TNC continues the dialog for this block by asking you the axis specific values The coordinates are entered with the orange axis direction buttons or the ASCII keyboard Effect Cancel handwheel positioning by programming M118 once again without coordinate input M118 becomes effective at the start of block Example NC blocks You want to be able to use the handwheel during program run to move the tool in the working plane X Y by 1 mm and in the rotary axis B by 5 from the programmed value M118 is effective in a tilted coordinate system if you activate the tilted working plane function for Manual Operation mode If the tilted working plane function is not active for Manual Operation mode the original coordinate system is effective M118 also functions in the Positioning with MDI mode of operation If M118 is active the MANUAL TRAVERSE function is not available after a program interruption You cannot use the function M118 if M128 is active 272 Programming Miscellaneous Functions il Retraction from the contour in the tool axis direction M140 Standard behavior In the program run modes the TNC moves the tool as defined in the part program Behavior with M140 With M140 MB move back you can enter a path in the direction of the tool axis for departure from the contour Input If you enter M140 in a positioning block the TNC continues the dialog and asks for the de
331. ters press the key for the screen layout and then the SHOW SYSTEM NAME soft key Follow the same procedure to return to the standard display The parameter values are entered in the configuration editor Each parameter object has a name e g CfgDisplayLanguage that gives Information about the parameters it contains Each object has a key for unique Identification 402 Tables and Overviews il Calling the configuration editor Select the Programming mode of operation Press the MOD key Enter the code number 123 Press the END soft key to exit the configuration editor The icon at the beginning of each line in the parameter tree shows additional information about this line The icons have the following meanings Branch exists but is closed EHS Branch is open Empty object cannot be opened _I nitialized machine parameter Uninitialized optional machine parameter fm Can be read but not edited i Cannot be read or edited HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 16 1 Machine Specific User Parameters i il 16 1 Machine Specific User Parameters Displaying help texts The HELP key enables you to call a help text for each parameter object or attribute If the help text does not fit on one page 1 2 is then displayed at the upper right for example press the HELP PAGE soft key to scroll to the second page To exit the help text press the HELP key again Additional information such as the unit of measure the initial va
332. th chip breaking Circular point pattern Linear point pattern Multipass milling Ruled surface Face milling Centering Single fluted deep hole drilling Datum setting Rectangular pocket complete machining Circular pocket complete machining Key way milling Circular slot Rectangular stud complete machining Circular stud complete machining Thread milling Thread milling countersinking Thread drilling milling Helical thread drilling milling Outside thread milling Miscellaneous functions Mo M1 M2 M3 M4 M5 M6 M8 M9 M13 M14 M30 M89 M91 M92 M94 M97 M98 M99 M109 M110 M111 M116 M117 M118 M120 M126 M127 Stop program Spindle STOP Coolant OFF Optional program STOP Spindle STOP Coolant OFF Stop program Spindle STOP Coolant OFF Clear status display depending on machine parameter Go to block 1 Spindle ON clockwise Spindle ON counterclockwise Spindle STOP Tool change Stop program run depending on machine parameter Spindle STOP Coolant ON Coolant OFF Spindle ON clockwise Coolant ON Spindle ON counterclockwise Coolant ON Same function as M2 Vacant miscellaneous function or Cycle call modally effective depending on machine parameter Within the positioning block Coordinates are referenced to machine datum Within the positioning block Coordinates are referenced to position defined by machine tool builder such as tool change position Reduce the rotary a
333. th of a string parameter a Page 244 Comparing alphabetic priority iat Page 245 arithmetic operation is always a string When you use the FORMULA function the result of the arithmetic operation is always a numeric value When you use a STRING FORMULA the result of the HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 8 10 String Parameters j il m 8 10 String Parameters Assigning string parameters You have to assign a string variable before you use it Use the DECLARE STRING command to do so Show the soft key row with special functions FCT Ea Select the menu for defining various plain language OSTIN functions STRING Select string functions DECLARE Select the DECLARE STRING function Example NC block 238 Programming Q Parameters il Chain linking string parameters With the concatenation operator string parameter you can make a chain of two or more string parameters SPEC FCT PROGRAM FUNCTIONS STRING FUNCTIONS STRING FORMULA Show the soft key row with special functions Select the menu for defining various plain language functions Select string functions Select the STRING FORMULA function Enter the number of the string parameter in which the TNC is to save the concatenated string Confirm with the ENT key Enter the number of the string parameter in which the first substring is saved Confirm with the ENT key The TNC displays the concatenation symbol Confirm your entry with the ENT key
334. the BLOCK SCAN soft key or Start up at N Enter the block number N at which the block scan should end Program Enter the name of the program containing block N Repetitions If block N is located in a program section repeat or in a subprogram that is to be run repeatedly enter the number of repetitions to be calculated in the block scan 14 5 Program Run To start the block scan press the machine START button Contour approach see following section Entering a program with the GOTO key If you use the GOTO block number key for going into a program neither the TNC nor the PLC will execute any functions that ensure a safe Start If you use the GOTO block number key for going into a subprogram the TNC will skip the end of the subprogram G98 LO In such cases you must always use the mid program startup function HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 375 il Returning to the contour With the RESTORE POSITION function the TNC returns to the workpiece contour in the following situations Return to the contour after the machine axes were moved during a program Interruption that was not performed with the INTERNAL STOP function Return to the contour after a block scan with RESTORE POS ATN for example after an interruption with INTERNAL STOP Depending on the machine If the position of an axis has changed after the control loop has been opened during a program interruption To select a return to contour press the RESTORE POSITION
335. the length and radius of each tool you are using Tool data can be entered either directly in the part program with G99 or separately in a tool table In a tool table you can also enter additional data for the specific tool The TNC will consider all the data entered for the tool when executing the part program Tool numbers and tool names Each tool is identified by a number between 0 and 32767 If you are working with tool tables you can also enter a tool name for each tool Tool names can have up to 16 characters The tool number O is automatically defined as the zero tool with the length L 0 and the radius R 0 In tool tables tool TO should also be defined with L 0 and R 0 Tool length L You should always enter the tool length L as an absolute value based on the tool reference point The entire tool length is essential for the TNC in order to perform numerous functions Involving multi axis machining Tool radius R You can enter the tool radius R directly 132 L1 ES L2 Programming Tools il Delta values for lengths and radii Delta values are offsets in the length and radius of a tool A positive delta value describes a tool oversize DL DR DR2 gt 0 If you are programming the machining data with an allowance enter the oversize value in the T block of the part program A negative delta value describes a tool undersize DL DR DR2 lt 0 An undersize is entered in the tool table for wear Delta valu
336. the machining plane with space angles PLANE SPATIAL 289 Defining the machining plane with projection angles PROJECTED PLANE 291 Defining the machining plane with Euler angles EULER PLANE 293 Defining the machining plane with two vectors VECTOR PLANE 295 Defining the machining plane via three points POINTS PLANE 297 Defining the machining plane with a single incremental space angle PLANE RELATIVE 299 Tilting the working plane through axis angle PLANE AXIAL FCL 3 function 300 Specifying the positioning behavior of the PLANE function 302 11 3 Inclined Tool Machining in a Tilted Plane Software Option 2 306 Function 306 Inclined tool machining via incremental traverse of a rotary axis 306 11 4 Miscellaneous Functions for Rotary Axes 307 Feed rate in mm min on rotary axes A B C M116 software option 1 307 Shorter path traverse of rotary axes M126 308 Reducing display of a rotary axis to a value less than 360 M94 309 Maintaining the position of the tool tip when positioning with tilted axes TCPM M128 software option DY sce 309 11 5 Peripheral milling 3 D radius compensation with workpiece orientation 212 Application 312 26 12 1 Switch On Switch Oft 314 Switch on 314 Switch off 316 12 2 Moving the Machine Axes 317 Note 317 To traverse with the machine axis direction buttons 317 Incre
337. the tool Is used by the Centering cycle Cycle 240 in order to calculate the centering depth from the diameter entry HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 Maximum tool age for TOOL CALL Current tool life Tool type Tool description PLC status Tool type for pocket table Retract tool Y N Number of the touch probe Point angle on 5 2 Tool Data j il 5 2 Tool Data Tool table Tool data required for automatic tool measurement For a description of the cycles for automatic tool measurement see the User s Manual for Cycle Programming CUT LTOL RTOL R2TOL DIRECT R OFFS L OFFS LBREAK RBREAK 136 Number of teeth 20 teeth maximum Permissible deviation from tool length L for wear detection If the entered value is exceeded the TNC locks the tool status L Input range O to 0 9999 mm Permissible deviation from tool radius R for wear detection If the entered value is exceeded the TNC locks the tool status L Input range 0 to 0 9999 mm Permissible deviation from tool radius R2 for wear detection If the entered value is exceeded the TNC locks the tool status L Input range O to 0 9999 mm Cutting direction of the tool for measuring the tool during rotation For tool length measurement Tool offset between stylus center and tool center Default setting No value entered offset tool radius Tool radius measurement tool offset in addition to offsetToolAxis 114104 between upp
338. three PROBING holes cylindrical studs q ec DIRECTORY Setting datum points using holes cylindrical stud Setting datum points using holes cylindrical studs Setting datum points using holes cylindrical studs WINDOW TNCGUIDE TNCGUIDE QUIT EXIT 123 4 7 Context Sensi vous System c Working with the TNCguide 5 Calling the TNCguide There are several ways to start the TNCguide _ LENEE Eiaa Y Press the HELP key if the TNC is not already showing an error Processins tf ne tauro tant ran arte sn he manal mo ok message Coreg tee e ives vests eh eee le ee Ay i a Click the help symbol at the lower right of the screen beforehand gt HOD Functions Calibrate the effective radius FE les pis ft cadas ei then click the appropriate soft keys sen Hare ster ne Use the file manager to open a help file chm file The TNC can Touch probe Cyc Merten mine wan a a open any chm file even if it is not saved on the TNC s hard disk P Working with Tol sea comer a diun cree A Set a circle center as datum snema Circle center as dat electing pr we ce AP Pag Recording me If one or more error messages are waiting for your uritina the i meena pg Nisan attention the TNC shows the help directly associated l introduction tease a tasie gota
339. til the soft key for detail enlargement appears gt Shift the soft key row until the soft key for the detail magnification functions appears Select the functions for detail magnification Press the corresponding soft key to select the workpiece surface see table below To reduce or magnify the blank form press and hold the MINUS or PLUS soft key respectively Restart the test run or program run by pressing the START soft key RESET START returns the workpiece blank to its original state Select the left right workpiece surface oy g Select the front back workpiece surface Tl 7 w N Select the top bottom workpiece surface Shift the sectional plane to reduce or magnify the blank form ie Select the isolated detail TRANSFER DETAIL AE After a new workpiece detail magnification is selected the control forgets previously simulated machining operations The TNC then displays machined areas as unmachined areas The TNC displays the selected workpiece side for each axis and the coordinates of the remaining form during a detail magnification 362 A o A Test Run and Program Run il m EE 00 06 19 me Repeating graphic simulation A part program can be graphically simulated as often as desired either with the complete workpiece or with a detail of it Restore workpiece blank to the detail RESET BLK magnification in which it was l
340. ting 11 2 The PLANE Function Input parameters X component of base vector X component BX of By the base vector B see figure at top right Input range 9 9999999 to 9 9999999 Y component of base vector Y component BY of the base vector B see figure at top right Input range 9 9999999 to 9 9999999 Z component of base vector Z component BZ of the base vector B see figure at top right Input range 9 9999999 to 9 9999999 X component of normal vector X component NX of the normal vector N see figure at center right Inout range 9 9999999 to 9 9999999 Y component of normal vector Y component NY of the normal vector N see figure at center right Input range 9 9999999 to 9 9999999 Z component of normal vector Z component NZ of the normal vector N see figure at lower right Input range 9 9999999 to 9 9999999 Continue with the positioning properties see Specifying the positioning behavior of the PLANE function on page 302 NC block Abbreviations used VECTOR Vector BX BY BZ Base vector X Y and Z components NX NY NZ Normal vector X Y and Z components 296 Programming Multiple Axis Machining il Defining the machining plane via three points POINTS PLANE Application A machining plane can be uniquely defined by entering any three points P1 to P3 in this plane This possibility is realized in the POINTS PLANE function Before programming note the fo
341. tion wig to n with the error messages To start the TNCguide you first Calipratina IBH eaor NMR tn ta an alc have to acknowledge all error messages compensating tN aes rte nt te Ee oo aI a z When the help system is called on the programming Back FORWARD ti i prrecToRY urNoo tncsuroe tcGUTDE station the TNC starts the internally defined standard iia mee browser usually the Internet Explorer or otherwise a browser adapted by HEIDENHAIN For many soft keys there is a context sensitive call through which you can go directly to the description of the soft key s function This functionality requires using a mouse Proceed as follows 4 7 Context Sensitiv Select the soft key row containing the desired soft key Click with the mouse on the help symbol that the TNC displays just above the soft key row The mouse pointer turns into a question mark Move the question mark to the soft key for which you want an explanation and click The TNC opens the TNCguide If no specific part of the help is assigned to the selected soft key the TNC opens the book file main chm in which you can use the search function or the navigation to find the desired explanation manually Even if you are editing an NC block context sensitive help is available Select any NC block Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the block Press the HELP key The TNC start the help system and shows a description for the active function does not apply
342. tions with the SPEC FCT key Programming approach and departure motions with the APPR DEP key Pressing the END hard key while the CYCLE DEF and TOUCH PROBE menus are active HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 Input via screen keyboard Not permitted Available Available Available Available Available Available Opens the Select file pop up window Not available Not available Not available Slightly different Insert Remove by soft key Selection via split screen menu After editing a value the horizontal arrow keys can be used for positioning within the column Pressing the key opens a soft key row as a submenu To exit the submenu press the SPEC FCT key again then the TNC shows the last active soft key row Pressing the key opens a soft key row as a submenu To exit the submenu press the APPR DEP key again then the TNC shows the last active soft key row Terminates the editing process and calls the file manager Input via ASCII keyboard Permitted Not available Not available Not available Not available Available Available Synchronizes the cursor Available Available Available Slightly different Insert Remove with ASCII keyboard Selection in a pop up window After editing a value the horizontal arrow keys can be used for positioning to the next previous column Pressing the key adds the soft key row as the last row To exit the menu press the SPEC FCT key again then the TNC shows the last activ
343. to auxiliary functions or cycles that were integrated by your machine tool builder 124 Programming Programming Aids Navigating in the TNCguide It s easiest to use the mouse to navigate in the TNCguide A table of contents appears on the left side of the screen By clicking the rightward pointing triangle you open subordinate sections and by clicking the respective entry you open the individual pages It is operated in the same manner as the Windows Explorer Linked text positions cross references are shown underlined and in blue Clicking the link opens the associated page Of course you can also operate the TNCguide through keys and soft keys The following table contains on overview of the corresponding key functions the control hardware and not on the programming The key functions described below are only available on station If the table of contents at left is active select the entry above it or below it If the text window at right is active Move the page downward or upward if texts or graphics are not shown completely If the table of contents at left is active Open a branch of the table of contents If the branch is at its end jump into the window at right If the text window at right is active No function If the table of contents at left is active Close a branch of the table of contents If the text window at right is active No function If the table of contents at left is active Use the curs
344. to the contour In the CfgLiftOff machine parameter define the value by which the tool is to be retracted In the CfgLiftOff machine parameter you can also switch off the function Effect M148 remains in effect until deactivated with M149 M148 becomes effective at the start of block M149 at the end of block HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 9 4 Miscellaneous ung for Contouring Behavior o il sOIAeYysg Hunnozuo 10 a SNODUE IISIW p 6 Programming Miscellaneous Functions il 276 A Overview of Special Functions 10 1 Overview of Special Functions Press the SPEC FCT and the corresponding soft keys to access further special functions of the TNC The following tables will give you an overview of which functions are available Main menu for SPEC FCT special functions Select the special functions FCT Define program defaults ae Page 279 Functions for contour and point conTouR Page 279 machining MACHINING Define the PLANE function TILT Page 287 MACHINING PLANE Define different DIN ISO Ea Page 280 functions FUNCTIONS Define structure items Page 113 278 Program run Programming full sequence 333 1 333 G71 N10 G30 G17 X 0 Y 0 2 25 N20 G31 X 150 Y 100 Z 0 comment N30 TS G1 S3500 40 GOO 2 100 G40 G90 M3x N50 X 30 Y 30 N60 Zz 5 N70 G01 X 15 Y 15 G41 F350 N80 G01 Y 85 N90 G25 RS N100 G01 X 85 N110 G25 R5 N120 G01 Y 15 N130 G01 X 15 N140 G01 X 30 Y
345. tories and files PGM Call the file manager MGT Use the arrow keys or the soft keys to move the highlight to the desired position on the screen Moves the highlight from the left to the right window and vice versa PAGE pase Moves the highlight one page up or down within a t window Step 1 Select drive Move the highlight to the desired drive in the left window SELECT To select a drive press the SELECT soft key or press the ENT key ENT Step 2 Select a directory Move the highlight to the desired directory in the left hand window the right hand window automatically shows all files stored in the highlighted directory HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 th the AA iii ing wi 3 4 Work th the Fi1dfllanager ing wi 3 4 Work Step 3 Select a file Press the SELECT TYPE soft key Press the SHOW ALL soft key to display all files or Move the highlight to the desired file in the right window Press the ENT key The TNC opens the selected file in the operating mode from which you called the file manager 96 Programming Fundamentals File Management il Creating a new directory Move the highlight in the left window to the directory in which you want to create a subdirectory Enter the new file name and confirm with ENT NEW ENT th the AA iii Press the YES soft key to confirm or Abort with the NO soft key Creating a new file
346. tween tool and workpiece will be reduced After T the path of the tool in the spindle axis as entered in the part program is adjusted by the difference between the length of the previous tool and that of the new one For tool length compensation the control takes the delta values from both the T block and the tool table into account Compensation value L DLyooL cay DLyag Where L is the tool length L from the G99 block or tool table DL TOOL CALL is the oversize for length DL in the T 0 block not taken into account by the position display DL 7AB is the oversize for length DL in the tool table 144 Programming Tools il Tool radius compensation The NC block for programming a tool movement contains G41 or G42 for radius compensation G43 or G44 for radius compensation in single axis movements G40 if there Is no radius compensation Radius compensation becomes effective as soon as a tool is called and is moved with a straight line block in the working plane with G41 or G42 The TNC automatically cancels radius compensation if yOu program a Straight line block with G40 program a PGM CALL select a new program with PGM MGT For radius compensation the TNC takes the delta values from both the T block and the tool table into account Compensation value R DRy901 caLL DRrapg where R Tool radius R from the G99 block or tool table DR TOOL CALL Oversize for radius DR in the T block not taken into accou
347. ual go to label number 11 If greater than go to label number IZ If less than go to label number Internal Clockwise CW G42 RR 13 Angle fromcsinaandccosa pocket Counterclockwise CCVV G41 RL 14 Error number External Clockwise CW G41 RL i A ment T island Counterclockwise CCW G42 RR HEIDENHAIN DR JOHANNES HEIDENHAIN GmbH Dr Johannes Heidenhain Strafge 5 83301 Traunreut Germany 49 8669 31 0 49 8669 5061 E mail info heidenhain de Technical support 49 8669 32 1000 Measuring systems 49 8669 31 3104 E mail service ms support heidenhain de TNC support lt gt 49 8669 31 3101 E mail service nc support heidenhain de NC programming 49 8669 31 3103 E mail service nc pgm heidenhain de PLC programming 49 8669 31 3102 E mail service plc heidenhain de Lathe controls gt 49 8669 31 3105 E mail service lathe support heidenhain de www heidenhain de 3 D Touch Probe Systems from HEIDENHAIN help you to reduce non cutting time For example in e workpiece alignment e datum setting e workpiece measurement e digitizing 3 D surfaces with the workpiece touch probes TS 220 with cable TS 640 with infrared transmission e tool measurement e wear monitoring e tool breakage monitoring with the tool touch probe TT 140 679 355 20 Ver00 SWO2 1 7 2009 F amp W Printed in Germany ACCA ON UT A
348. ues less than 360 is dependent on machine parameter shortestDistance 300401 This machine parameter defines whether the TNC should consider the difference between nominal and actual position or whether the it should always even without M126 choose the shortest path to the programmed position Examples 350 10 340 10 340 330 Behavior with M126 With M126 the TNC will move the axis on the shorter path of traverse for rotary axes whose display is reduced to values less than 360 Examples 350 10 20 10 340 30 Effect M126 becomes effective at the start of block To cancel M126 enter M127 At the end of program M126 is automatically canceled Programming Multiple Axis Machining il Reducing display of a rotary axis to a value less than 360 M94 Standard behavior The TNC moves the tool from the current angular value to the programmed angular value Example Current angular value 538 Programmed angular value 180 Actual distance of traverse 358 Behavior with M94 At the start of block the TNC first reduces the current angular value to a value less than 360 and then moves the tool to the programmed value If several rotary axes are active M94 will reduce the display of all rotary axes As an alternative you can enter a rotary axis after M94 The TNC then reduces the display only of this axis Example NC blocks To reduce display of all active rotary axes 11 4
349. uffer battery then you must replace the battery Make a data backup before changing the buffer battery To exchange the buffer battery first switch off the TNC The buffer battery must be exchanged only by trained service personnel P AYN 0 iy WN i Battery type 1 Lithium battery type CR 2450N Renata ID 315 878 01 1 The buffer battery is on the main board of the MC 6110 Remove the five screws of the MC 6110 housing cover Remove the cover The buffer battery is at the border of the PCB Exchange the battery The socket accepts a new battery only in the correct orientation t gt z a SS o1 A ON gt ae 5 aa k aa b re O os Q ras LLI i fe q HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 419 il Asayeg 1ng oy Buibueysxg p 9L Tables and Overviews il 420 Symbole 3 D compensation Peripheral milling 312 3 D touch probes Calibrating Triggering 334 3 D view 361 A Accessories 71 Actual position capture 83 Additional axes 75 Automatic program start 377 Automatic tool measurement 136 B Basic rotation Measuring in the Manual Operation mode 337 Block Deleting 85 Inserting editing 85 Blocks Butter battery exchange 419 C Calculating with parentheses 233 Calculator 114 Chamfer 161 Circle center point 163 Circular path 164 165 167 174 175 Code numbers 385 Com
350. uges 345 Touch probe monitoring 274 Trigonometric functions 204 Trigonometry 204 Index U Unit of measure selection 80 USB devices connecting removing 108 User parameters General For 3 D touch probes 404 Machine specitic 402 V Version numbers 385 Visual display unit 57 W Workpiece blank defining a 80 Workpiece measurement 342 Workpiece positions Absolute 77 Incremental 77 Workspace monitoring 365 368 Writing probed values in datum tables 332 Writing probed values in preset table 333 j i xX pu 424 Overview Tables Fixed cycles 7 14 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 21 28 29 32 200 201 202 203 204 205 Datum shift Mirror image Dwell time Rotation Scaling factor Program call Oriented spindle stop Contour definition Tilting the working plane Contour data SL Il Pilot drilling SL Il Rough out SL Il Floor finishing SL II Side finishing SL II Contour train Axis specific scaling Cylinder surface Cylindrical surface slot Cylinder surface ridge Tolerance Drilling Reaming Boring Universal drilling Back boring Universal pecking HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 Overview Tables S il Overview Tables 206 207 208 209 220 221 230 231 232 240 241 247 251 252 253 254 256 257 262 263 264 265 267 426 Tapping with a floating tap holder new Rigid tapping new Bore milling Tapping wi
351. upts program run and generates the error message Tool radius too large Behavior with M97 The TNC calculates the intersection of the contour elements as at inside corners and moves the tool over this point Program M97 in the same block as the outside corner function M120 LA see Calculating the radius compensated path in advance LOOK AHEAD M120 on page 270 Instead of M97 you should use the much more powerful Effect M97 is effective only in the blocks in which it is programmed finished You may wish to rework the contour with a A corner machined with M97 will not be completely smaller tool HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 9 4 Miscellaneous ung for Contouring Behavior j il 9 4 Miscellaneous run ns for Contouring Behavior Example NC blocks Large tool radius Move to contour point 13 Machine small contour step 13 to 14 Move to contour point 15 Machine small contour step 15 to 16 Move to contour point 17 N 66 Programming Miscellaneous Functions il Machining open contours corners M98 Standard behavior The TNC calculates the intersections of the cutter paths at inside corners and moves the tool in the new direction at those points If the contour is open at the corners however this will result in incomplete machining Behavior with M98 With the miscellaneous function M98 the TNC temporarily suspends radius compensation to ensure that both corners are completely machined
352. ure at center right Z coordinate of 2nd plane point Z coordinate P2Z of the 2nd plane point see figure at center right X coordinate of 3rd plane point X coordinate P3X of the 3rd plane point see figure at bottom right Y coordinate of 3rd plane point Y coordinate P3Y of the 3rd plane point see figure at bottom right Z coordinate of 3rd plane point Z coordinate P3Z of the 3rd plane point see figure at bottom right orking Plane Software Option 1 Continue with the positioning properties see Specifying the positioning behavior of the PLANE function on page 302 NC block i j Abbreviations used POINTS Points 11 2 The PLANE Function 298 Programming Multiple Axis Machining il Defining the machining plane with a single incremental space angle PLANE RELATIVE Application Use the incremental space angle when an already active tilted machining plane is to be tilted by another rotation Example machining a 45 chamfer on a tilted plane The defined angle is always effective in respect to the active working plane irrespective of the function you have used to activate it Before programming note the following You can program any number of PLANE RELATIVE functions in a row If you want to return to the machining plane that was active before the PLANE RELATIVE function define the PLANE RELATIVE function again with the same angle but SPA SPB SPC with t
353. ustrial PC IPC 61xx 430 lt XJ X X x lt XK XXX xxx x lt x lt x amp Comparison PC software Programming station software Available Available TNCremoNT for data transfer with Available Available TNCbackup for data backup TNCremoPlus data transfer software Available Available with live screen RemoTools SDK 1 2 Function library Limited functionality available Available for developing your own applications for communicating with HEIDENHAIN controls virtualTNC Control component for Not available Available virtual machines ConfigDesign Software for Available Not available configuring the control Comparison Machine specific functions Switching the traverse range Function not available Available function Central drive 1 motor for multiple Function not available Available function machine axes Functions of the TNC 620 and the ITNC 530 C axis operation Spindle motor drives Function not available Available function E rotary axis e Automatic exchange of milling head Function not available Available function T Som Support of angle heads Function not available Available function Balluf tool identification Function not available Available function z Management of multiple tool Function not available Available function O magazines Q Expanded tool management via Python Function not available Available function HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 431 il Functions of the TNC 620 and the IT
354. utton If you have absolute linear and angle encoders on your machine there is no need for a reference run Further information on this topic Traversing the reference marks See Switch on on page 314 Operating modes See Programming and Editing on page 61 HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 Manual operation PLOS 1092 9 0 t29 ga 452 l 49 0 8O 860 Bw Saas lee 2S fi 57 F O0OVR TOUCH PROBE A PRESET TABLE 1 2 Machine Switch B 1 3 Programming the First _ 1 3 Programming the First Part Select the correct operating mode You can write programs only in the Programming and Editing mode Press the operating modes key The TNC goes into the Programming and Editing mode Further information on this topic Operating modes See Programming and Editing on page 61 The most important TNC keys Confirm entry and activate the next dialog prompt Ignore the dialog question ms Z ad End the dialog immediately Abort dialog discard entries Soft keys on the screen with which you select functions appropriate to the active state Further information on this topic Writing and editing programs See Editing a program on page 84 Overview of keys See Controls of the TNC on page 2 36 First Steps with the TNC 620 il Create a new program file management carr Press the PGM MGT key the TNC displays the file ee Su Programming MGT
355. ve program section repeats with block ie as overview pan La eve m Pos e selection number label number and number of 19 CYCL DEF 11 8 SCALING Bik nos LBL fea chone 7 m ibl d repeats repeats yet to be run Possl programme p p y 22 CALL LBL 15 REPS __S 23 PLANE RESET STAY fall i i 24 LBL Active subprogram numbers with block number in 25 END PGM STATA MN Ei which the subprogram was called and the label EA moron pana one number that was called S IST 12 44 2 4 Status Di Information on standard cycles CYC tab 57 F OUR Mo 33 747 Y 72 578 Z 9 754 O C 0 000 S 94 680 a Softkey Meaning z a AcTL He oke Tt 3 mm min Dur 57 8 M5 No direct Active machining cycle a eee ee 2 STATUS STATUS TOOL STATUS STATUS OF selection OVERVIEW E a STATUS T E R Q PARAM z possible Programming Active values of Cycle G62 Tolerance R aa pun I oS ener 17 LBL 15 Overview Pem La cyc m pos o 18 L IX 1 R FMAX 19 CYCL DEF 11 0 SCALING felt 20 CYCL DEF 11 1 SCL 0 9995 e o ZITSTOR z 22 CALL LBL 15 REPS 23 PLANE RESET STAY 24 LBL 25 END PGM STAT1 MM HSC MODE TA xyz XYZ S IST 12 44 TEN 57 F OVR me E 33 747 Y 72 5781 2 9 754 C 0 000 S 94 680 xs act HO eke r 3 _ mm min vr 57 8 M5 ees STATUS STATUS TOOL STATUS STATUS OF COORD
356. verview status form To select an additional status display Shift the soft key rows until the STATUS soft keys appear Either select the additional status display e g srk positions and coordinates or a use the soft keys to select the desired view With the soft keys or switch over soft keys you can choose directly between the available status displays below is not available unless the associated software A Please note that some of the status information described option is enabled on your TNC HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 2 4 Status E ii Overview After switch on the TNC displays the Overview status form provided Program run full sequence Programming that you have selected the PROGRAM STATUS screen layout or Sy POSITION STATUS The overview form contains a summary of the is L ixe 1 ro Fmax overvar eee ee fa lays 19 CYCL DEF 11 0 SCALING most important status information which you can also find on the DEF 11 1 SCL 9 9995 at T E 3 WKZ 3 A various detail forms ee aa L t5000 R 3 00 E 0 0 0 ae ane S STAT1 MM DL PGM 0 2500 DR PGM 0 1000 M110 Y 0 0000 am xy iti j 4 0 0000 d Position display aee OVERVIEW asi Sea ce s OOOO a oe 12 44 oe eee eee 00 00 33 dp Bere dt D Tool information 33 747 Y 72 578 Z 9 754 O q 0 000 S 94 680 x Active M functions ar sat N Cey actL M ok rT 3 Z 6 o F mm min Our 57 8 M 5 EERE SNE ESS
357. witched off Then the TNC moves the axes in the tilted coordinate system when an axis direction key is pressed Position the tool in such a way that a collision is excluded during the subsequent crossing of the reference points To cross the reference points you have to deactivate the Tilt Working Plane function see Activating manual tilting page 349 If one of the two functions that were active before is active now the NC START button has no function The TNC outputs a corresponding error message HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 12 1 Switch On Switch Off o i 12 1 Switch On Switch Off Switch off To prevent data from being lost at switch off you need to shut down the operating system of the TNC as follows Select the Manual Operation mode AO Select the function for shutting down confirm again with the YES soft key When the TNC displays the message NOW IT IS SAFE TO TURN POWER OFF in a Superimposed window you may cut off the power supply to the TNC Remember that pressing the END key after the control has been shut down restarts the control Switch off during a restart can also result in data loss Inappropriate switch off of the TNC can lead to data loss 316 Manual Operation and Setup il 12 2 Moving the Machine Axes Note vary depending on the machine tool The machine tool D Traversing with the machine axis direction buttons can manual provides further information To traverse with the machine axis
358. with straight line blocks to the hole center coordinates at a setup clearance of 5 mm above the workpiece surface Then drill the hole with Cycle G200 13 1 Programming oj Executing Simple Machining Operations HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 Call tool tool axis Z Spindle speed 2000 rom Retract tool rapid traverse Move the tool at rapid traverse to a position above the hole Spindle on Position tool to 2 mm above hole Define Cycle G200 Drilling Set up clearance of the tool above the hole Hole depth algebraic sign working direction Feed rate for drilling Depth of each infeed before retraction Dwell time at top for chip release in seconds Workpiece surface coordinate Position after the cycle with respect to Q203 Dwell time in seconds at the hole bottom Call Cycle G200 PECKING Retract the tool End of program j i Executing Simple Machining Operations 13 1 Programming Example 2 Correcting workpiece misalignment on machines with rotary tables Use the 3 D touch probe to rotate the coordinate system See Touch Probe Cycles in the Manual and Electronic Handwheel Operating Modes section Compensating workpiece misalignment in the Touch Probe Cycles User s Manual Write down the rotation angle and cancel the basic rotation Select operating mode Positioning with MDI Select the rotary table axis enter the rotation angle and feed rate you wrote down for example G01 G40 G90 C 2 561 F50 B Conc
359. word for ascending descending order If you do not use this option the rows are placed In random order Lock out the selected rows for other applications with the SQL SELECT FOR UPDATE option Other applications can continue to read these rows but cannot change them We strongly recommend using this option if you are making changes to the table entries Empty result set If no rows match the selection criteria the SOL server returns a valid handle but no table entries HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 8 8 Accessing T with SQL Commands j il a Parameter no for result O parameter for the Example Select all table rows handle The SQL server returns the handle for the group of columns and rows selected with the current select command In case of an error Selection could not be carried out the SOL server returns the code 1 Code 0 Identifies an invalid handle Data bank SQL command text with the following elements SELECT keyword Name of the SOL command Names of the table columns to be transferred Separate column names with a comma See examples Q parameters must be bound to all columns entered here FROM table name Synonym or path and file names of this table The synonym is entered directly whereas the path and table names are entered in single quotation marks see examples of the SOL command names of the table columns to be transferred separate several Example Selection of table rows with the WHERE
360. xis display to a value below 360 Machine small contour steps Machine open contours completely Blockwise cycle call Constant contouring speed at tool cutting edge increase and decrease feed rate Constant contouring speed at tool cutting edge feed rate decrease only Reset M109 M110 Feed rate for rotary axes in mm min Reset M116 Superimpose handwheel positioning during program run Pre calculate radius compensated contour LOOK AHEAD Shortest path traverse of rotary axes Reset M126 HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 Page 261 Page 379 Page 261 Page 261 Page 261 Page 261 Page 261 Page 261 Cycles Manual Page 262 Page 262 Page 309 Page 265 Page 267 Cycles Manual Page 269 Page 307 Page 272 Page 270 Page 308 S il Overview Tables Overview Tables M128 M129 M130 M140 M141 M148 M149 428 Retain position of tool tip when positioning tilting axes TCPM Reset M128 Moving to position in an untilted coordinate system with a tilted working plane Retraction from the contour in the tool axis direction Suppress touch probe monitoring Retract the tool automatically from the contour at NC stop Reset M148 Page 309 Page 264 Page 273 Page 274 Page 275 Comparison Functions of the TNC 620 and the iT NC 530 Comparison Specifications Axes Input resolution and display step Linear axes Rotary axes Control loops for high frequency spindles and torque linear motors Display
361. xt page in table PAGE HEEE Find the text or number FIND Move to beginning of line BEGIN r H Z m m D Move to end of line r H zZ m Copy highlighted field FIELD Insert copied field PASTE FIELD Add the entered number of lines tools at the APPEND end of the table N LINES Insert a line with definable tool number aS LINE Delete current line tool DELETE LINE ae fea ea 138 Programming Tools il Sort the tools according to the content of a a column Show all drills in the tool table an Show all cutters in the tool table care Show all taps thread cutters in the tool table Tees Show all touch probes in the tool table ES Leaving the tool table Call the file manager and select a file of a different type such as a part program HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 on 5 2 Tool Data j il 5 2 Tool Data Pocket table for tool changer The machine tool builder adapts the functional range of O the pocket table to the requirements of your machine The machine tool manual provides further information For automatic tool changing you need the pocket table TOOL_P TCH The TNC can manage several pocket tables with any file names To activate a specific pocket table for program run you must select it in the file management of a Program Run mode of operation status M Editing a pocket table in a Program Run operating mode Too Press the TOOL TABLE soft key to select the too
362. y line is inserted must be filled with zeros manually Not available Not available Not available With the Edit the current field function and the on line keyboard With X Y coordinates independent of machine type switchover with FUNCTION PARAXMODE Relative references in contour subprograms are not corrected automatically Error message Key non functional Terminates the editing process and calls the file manager The basic sott key row is selected when the file manager is exited Not available Not available Available Switchover by toggle soft key Only allowed at end of table Line with value 0 in all columns is inserted Available Available Available Via ASCII keyboard Machine dependent with the existing parallel axes All relative references are corrected automatically Handling of error messages Help with error messages Help for error messages while a block is being edited Switching the operating mode while help menu is active Selecting the background operating mode while helo menu is active Identical error messages Acknowledgment of error messages Access to protocol functions Saving service files Find function List of words recently searched for Show elements of active block Show list of all available NC blocks Starting the find function with the up down arrow keys when highlight is on a block Programming graphics Depiction of the traverse paths of an individu
363. ys run on the TNC 620 If NC blocks contain invalid elements the TNC will mark them as ERROR blocks when the file is opened between the iITNC 530 and the TNC 620 see Comparison Functions of the TNC 620 and the ITNC 530 on page 429 Please also note the detailed description of the differences 56 2 2 Visual Display Unit and Keyboard Visual display unit The TNC is delivered with a 15 inch TFT color flat panel display see figure at top right 1 oO oh Q oN Header When the TNC is on the selected operating modes are shown in the screen header the machining mode at the left and the programming mode at right The currently active mode Is displayed in the larger box where the dialog prompts and TNC messages also appear unless the TNC is showing only graphics Soft keys In the footer the TNC indicates additional functions in a soft key row You can select these functions by pressing the keys immediately below them The lines immediately above the soft key row indicate the number of soft key rows that can be called with the black arrow keys to the right and left The active soft key row is indicated by brightened bar Soft key selection keys Shift between soft key rows Sets the screen layout Shift key for switchover between machining and programming modes Soft key selection keys for machine tool builders Switches soft key rows for machine tool builders USB connection HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 K

TNC 620 - heidenhain

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents